You are on page 1of 444

BC-5380 Auto Hematology Analyzer

Service Manual

Copyright
2008 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2008-12 (Version: 1.0).

Intellectual Property Statement


SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under
the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability
arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure
of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual
in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and

other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial
purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party


Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements;

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment


to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will
be unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause
personal injury.

II

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;

any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;

any product of any other manufacturer.

Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray,
the following procedure should be followed:
1.

Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on
the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the
Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number,
and a brief description of the reason for return;

2.

Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges);

3.

Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer
Service department.

III

Company Contact
Manufacturer:
Address:

Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.


Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan,ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,

Phone:

+86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax:

+86 755 26582934 26582500

IV

Table of Contents
1

Using This Manual............................................................................................... 1-1


1.1

Introduction............................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2

Who Should Read This Manual............................................................................. 1-2

1.3

How to Find Information ........................................................................................ 1-3

1.4

Conventions Used in This Manual......................................................................... 1-4

1.5

Symbols ................................................................................................................. 1-5

System Structure................................................................................................. 2-1


2.1

Introduction............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2

Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3

Hardware System .................................................................................................. 2-3

2.4

Main Structure ....................................................................................................... 2-4

2.5

Software structure ............................................................................................... 2-11


2.5.1
Menu structure ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.2
Passwords.............................................................................................. 2-31

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade................................................. 3-1


3.1

Preparations .......................................................................................................... 3-1


3.1.1
Purpose .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2
Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3
Accessories .............................................................................................. 3-1

3.2

Installation Requirements ...................................................................................... 3-2


3.2.1
Space Requirements ................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2
Power Requirements................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.3
Environment Requirements...................................................................... 3-2
3.2.4
PC Configuration Requirements .............................................................. 3-3

3.3

Package Checking and Unpacking ....................................................................... 3-7


3.3.1
Checks before unpacking......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2
Unpacking the main unit........................................................................... 3-7
3.3.3
Checking packing list................................................................................ 3-9

3.4

Removal and Installation ..................................................................................... 3-10

3.5

Connections......................................................................................................... 3-23

3.6

Start-up ................................................................................................................ 3-27


3.6.1
Inspection before Startup ....................................................................... 3-27

3.7

Setup and Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-35

3.8

Testing Other Functions....................................................................................... 3-41

3.9

Confirming Gain................................................................................................... 3-42

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test ....................................................................... 3-47


3.11 Software upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-53
4

Fluidic System ..................................................................................................... 4-1


4.1

Introduction of Fluidic Parts ................................................................................... 4-1


4.1.1
Piercing needle......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2
Probe Wipe............................................................................................... 4-1
1

Table of Contents
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8

Pumps ...................................................................................................... 4-1


Syringes ................................................................................................... 4-1
Valves ....................................................................................................... 4-1
Baths ........................................................................................................ 4-1
Volumetric tube......................................................................................... 4-2
Filters........................................................................................................ 4-2

4.2

Fluidic System ....................................................................................................... 4-3


4.2.1
Reagent volume required......................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2
Fluidic System Drawing............................................................................ 4-5
4.2.3
WBC Measurement Procedures .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.4
RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures........................................................ 4-6
4.2.5
HGB Measurement Procedures ............................................................... 4-7

4.3

Sequence of Whole Blood CBC+DIFF Measurement ........................................... 4-8


4.3.1
Sampling and dispensing procedures ...................................................... 4-8
4.3.2
DIFF Channel ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.3
WBC/HGB Channel................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.4
RBC/PLT Channel .................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.5
Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement........................ 4-18
4.3.6
Sequence of CBC Measurement ........................................................... 4-18

Hardware System ................................................................................................ 5-1


5.1

Mother board ......................................................................................................... 5-3


5.1.1
Introduction............................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2
Board Composition................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-26
5.1.4
Removal ................................................................................................. 5-28
5.1.5
Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-30

5.2

Data board ........................................................................................................... 5-32


5.2.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.2
Board composition.................................................................................. 5-32
5.2.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-45
5.2.4
Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-49
5.2.5
Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-51

5.3

Drive board .......................................................................................................... 5-59


5.3.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.2
Board composition.................................................................................. 5-59
5.3.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................... 5-75
5.3.4
Disassembly and assembly method....................................................... 5-78
5.3.5
Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 5-80

5.4

Autoloader board ................................................................................................. 5-99


5.4.1
Introduction............................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.2
Board Composition................................................................................. 5-99
5.4.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-109
5.4.4
Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-110
5.4.5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-112

5.5

Power board ...................................................................................................... 5-117


5.5.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-117
5.5.2
Board Composition............................................................................... 5-117
5.5.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-122
5.5.4
Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-124
5.5.5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-127

5.6

Volumetric and pressure detecting board.......................................................... 5-129


5.6.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-129
5.6.2
Board Composition............................................................................... 5-129
5.6.3
Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-132
5.6.4
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-134
2

Table of Contents
5.7

Liquid-level detecting board .............................................................................. 5-140


5.7.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-140
5.7.2
Board composition................................................................................ 5-140
5.7.3
Replacement and Connection.............................................................. 5-143
5.7.4
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-145

5.8

Laser Control Board .......................................................................................... 5-148


5.8.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-148
5.8.2
Board Composition............................................................................... 5-148
5.8.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-150
5.8.4
Assembly and disassembly.................................................................. 5-151
5.8.5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-151

5.9

Pre-amplification board...................................................................................... 5-154


5.9.1
Introduction........................................................................................... 5-154
5.9.2
Board Composition............................................................................... 5-154
5.9.3
Adjustment and Test Points.................................................................. 5-158
5.9.4
Disassembly and assembly.................................................................. 5-158
5.9.5
Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-158

5.10 Indicator Board .................................................................................................. 5-160


5.10.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-160
5.10.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-160
5.10.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-161
5.10.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-162
5.11 Key Board .......................................................................................................... 5-163
5.11.1 Introduction........................................................................................... 5-163
5.11.2 Board Composition............................................................................... 5-163
5.11.3 Disassembly and assembly method..................................................... 5-164
5.11.4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 5-165
6

Maintenance......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1

Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding Settings ....................................... 6-1

6.2

General .................................................................................................................. 6-3

6.3

Disassembling the Panels ..................................................................................... 6-4


6.3.1
Removing the left door ............................................................................. 6-4
6.3.2
Removing the right door........................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3
Removing the top cover ........................................................................... 6-6
6.3.4
Removing the back panel......................................................................... 6-7
6.3.5
Removing the front door........................................................................... 6-8
6.3.6
Removing the front cover assembly......................................................... 6-9

6.4

Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes........................................................ 6-11


6.4.1
Replacing valves .................................................................................... 6-13
6.4.2
Replacing the Pressure Chamber .......................................................... 6-15
6.4.3
Replacing the Vacuum Chamber ........................................................... 6-17
6.4.4
Replacing the Syringe Assembly............................................................ 6-18
6.4.5
Replacing the Waste Pump.................................................................... 6-24

6.5

Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly............................................................... 6-26

6.6

Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting Position ..................................... 6-29


6.6.1
Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe ................................................. 6-29
6.6.2
Replacing the Optical Sensor................................................................. 6-31
6.6.3
Removing the Sampling Module ............................................................ 6-33

6.7

Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction Bath ........................................... 6-37

6.8

Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)................................................................... 6-39


6.8.1
Removing and replacing the closed-tube sample compartment assembly
6-39
6.8.2
Removing and replacing the detection switches of the sample transport unit
3

Table of Contents

6.8.3
6.9

6-45
Replacing the sample transport unit....................................................... 6-46

Mix mechanism.................................................................................................... 6-58

6.10 Adjustment........................................................................................................... 6-66


6.10.1 Adjusting Sample Probe Position........................................................... 6-66
6.10.2 Adjusting Pincher Position ..................................................................... 6-73
7

Optical System..................................................................................................... 7-1


7.1

Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting.................................................. 7-1

7.2

Removing and Installing Optical System Assemblies............................................ 7-3


7.2.1
Laser driver board .................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2
Front light assembly ................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.3
Flow cell assembly ................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.4
Rear light collimator assembly ................................................................. 7-7
7.2.5
Beam splitter assembly ............................................................................ 7-7
7.2.6
Rear light collector assembly ................................................................... 7-8
7.2.7
Rear light detector assembly.................................................................. 7-10

7.3

Adjustment........................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.1
Coarse adjustment ................................................................................. 7-12
7.3.2
Preparation before fine tuning................................................................ 7-18
7.3.3
Fine tuning.............................................................................................. 7-19
7.3.4
Gain setup .............................................................................................. 7-24

7.4

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 7-27


7.4.1
Laser spot-deviation ............................................................................... 7-27
7.4.2
Flow cell clog.......................................................................................... 7-27
7.4.3
Dirty flow cell .......................................................................................... 7-28

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. 8-1


8.1

Error code and information .................................................................................... 8-1

8.2

Errors indicated by error messages ...................................................................... 8-9


8.2.1
Pressure errors......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.2
Reagent errors ......................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3
Hardware errors ..................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.4
Measurement errors............................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5
Temperature errors................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.6
Scattergram errors ................................................................................. 8-13

Appendixes ......................................................................................................... A-1


A.

Accessories ...........................................................................................................A-1

B.

List of Wearing Parts .............................................................................................B-1

C.

Fluidic diagram ..................................................................................................... C-1

D.

Pump and Valve Function Table ........................................................................... D-1

E.

Tubing....................................................................................................................E-1

F.

Method to identify cross network cable and direct-connected network cable ....... F-1

Using This Manual

1.1 Introduction
The chapter explains how to use the BC-5380 service manual. This manual provides the
reference information and procedures needed in servicing the BC-5380. Before servicing the
BC-5380, read and understand the manual carefully for servicing the equipment properly and
for your safety.
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the operators manual of BC-5380.It does not
contain information and procedures already covered in the operators manual of BC-5380.

Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this


manual and the operators manual.

1-1

Using This Manual

1.2 Who Should Read This Manual


To use this service manual effectively, the reader should posses:
A thorough understanding of

Basic electronic and fluidics principles and devices

Reagent systems

Quality control

Troubleshooting concepts

The ability to

Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology

Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope

Read fluidics schematics and understand related terminology

Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology

1-2

Using This Manual

1.3 How to Find Information


This service manual comprises 8 chapters and 5 appendices. Refer to the table below to find
the information you need.
If you want to

See

learn about the system structure and the basic

Chapter 2 System Structure

principle of the BC-5380


learn about the installation requirements and how to

Chapter

upgrade the BC-5380 software

Software Upgrade

learn about the fluidic system of the BC-5380

Chapter 4 Fluidic System

learn about the hardware system of the BC-5380

Chapter 5 Hardware System

learn about how to maintain the BC-5380

Chapter 6 Maintenance

learn about the optical system of the BC-5380

Chapter 7 Optical System

learn about how to troubleshoot the common errors

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

System

Installation

and

of the BC-5380
learn about the main spare parts of the BC-5380

Appendix A Accessories

learn about the main wearing parts of the BC-5380

Appendix B List of Wearing Parts

learn about the schematic diagram of the fluidic

Appendix C Fluidic Diagram

system of the BC-5380


learn about the function of each valve and pump of

Appendix D Pump and Valve Function

the BC-5380

Table

learn about the tubing connection of the BC-5380

Appendix E Tubing

learn about how to identify cross network cable and

Appendix F Method to Identify Cross

direct-connected network cable

Network Cable and Direct-Connected


Network Cable

1-3

Using This Manual

1.4 Conventions Used in This Manual


This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meaning in the text:

all capital letters enclosed in [ ] indicate a key name (on the external keyboard), such as
[ENTER].

bold letters included in indicate text you can find on the screen, such as Clean.

bold letters indicate chapter titles, such as Chapter 1 Using This Manual.

All illustrations in this manual are provided as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect
your analyzer setup or data displayed.

1-4

Using This Manual

1.5 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual:
When you see

Then
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or
unreliable analysis results.
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to information that requires your attention.
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.

You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see

It means
CAUTION, CONSULT ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTS.

BIOLOGICAL RISK

HIGH VOLTAGE

WARNING, LASER BEAM

WARNING, HOT SURFACE

PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)

1-5

Using This Manual

EARTH (GROUND)

ALTERNATING CURRENT

FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE

BATCH CODE

USE BY

SERIAL NUMBER

CATALOG NUMBER (FOR CONTROLS)

USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD) (FOR


CONTROLS)

DATE OF MANUFACTURE

MANUFACTURER

TEMPERATURE LIMITATION

CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

IRRITATING SUBSTANCE
THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION OF THE
WEEE LABEL APPLIES TO EU MEMBER
STATES ONLY: THE USE OF THIS

1-6

Using This Manual


SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THIS
PRODUCT SHOULD NOT BE TREATED
AS HOUSEHOLD WASTE. BY ENSURING
THAT THIS PRODUCT IS DISPOSED OF
CORRECTLY, YOU WILL HELP PREVENT
BRINGING POTENTIAL NEGATIVE
CONSEQUENCES TO THE
ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN HEALTH.
FOR MORE DETAILED INFORMATION
WITH REGARD TO RETURNING AND
RECYCLING THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE
CONSULT THE DISTRIBUTOR FROM
WHOM YOU PURCHASED THE
PRODUCT.
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients, operators and yours
when you are servicing the analyzer.

1-7

Using This Manual

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment


to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may
result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.


ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.

Contacting exposed electronic components while the equipment is attached


to power can cause personal injury from electric shock or damage to
electronic components. Power down before removing covers to access
electronic components.

Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.

To prevent personal injury during the maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs
and hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and
piercer.

Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal


injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.

Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc.


according to government regulations.

The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and diaphragm. Wear proper
personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe
laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
doctor.

1-8

Using This Manual

Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer


strictly as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer
carefully after the maintenance.

For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray


customer service department for maintenance advice.

To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove


metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.

Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a


possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an
ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.

Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear


proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.

All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious.

Take proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.

The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.

1-9

System Structure

2.1 Introduction

Hardware

Hardware collects signals, controls and drives moving parts, and processes and displays
information. It mainly consists of the mother board, drive board, data board, power board, laser
control board, FS pre-amplification board, SS pre-amplification board, volumetric board,
indicator board, liquid-level detecting board, key board and autoloader control board.

Interface

The system mainly consists of two parts, the main unit (analyzer) and the external computer,
which are connected through the network port. Other connections are realized through the
interfaces of the external computer.

Software operating environment

The system software consists of the main unit software and the operation software. The main
unit software is operated on the data board inner the analyzer; the operation software is
operated under the WINDOWS platform of the external computer. The main unit software
analyzes the sequence, collects and identifies data. The operation software displays and prints
the results and stores them into the database, and realizes the interaction of the functions
including count, QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and communication, etc.

Fluidic System

The fluidic system indicates the tubing where reagents, samples and air pass in the analyzer.
The fluidic system controls the correlatively jointed fluidic parts in a set sequence by the
software and driving of the hardware to control the distribution and direction of the medium.

2-1

System Structure

2.2 Fluidic System


Refer to Chapter 4 Fluidic System of this manual

2-2

System Structure

2.3 Hardware System


Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System of this manual

2-3

System Structure

2.4 Main Structure


The BC-5380 auto hematology analyzer consists of the main unit (analyzer) and the
accessories.

Figure 2-1 Front of the analyzer

1---Front cover

2---Power/Status indicator

3---[OPEN] key

4---[RUN] key

5---Tube

6---Tube rack

7---Tube

8---Adapter

9---Sample compartment door

2-4

System Structure

Figure 2-2 Back of the analyzer

1 --- Network interface

2 --- M-53D diluent sensor connector

3 --- M-53D diluent inlet

4 --- M-53 cleanser inlet

5 --- M-53LH lyse inlet

6 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet

7 --- M-53LEO() lyse inlet

8 --- AC input

9 --- Waste outlet

10 --- Waste sensor connector

2-5

System Structure

Figure 2-3 Left side of the analyzer

1--- Door lock

2---Power switch

2-6

System Structure

Figure 2-4 Right side of the analyzer

1---Door lock

2---Tube

3---Tube rack

2-7

System Structure

Figure 2-5 Front of the analyzer (front cover removed)


1 --- Sampling module

2 --- Tube

3 --- Tube rack

4 --- Sample transport assembly

5 --- Sample compartment assembly

6 --- Sheath fluid syringe assembly

7--- Sample injection syringe assembly

8 --- Sampling syringe assembly

9 --- Fluidic valve

10 --- Relieve valve assembly

2-8

System Structure

Figure 2-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door removed)

1 --- Front cover assembly

2 --- Diluent syringe assembly

3 --- Lyse syringe assembly

4 --- Pressure chamber assembly

5 --- Air pumps

6 --- Left door

7 --- liquid level detection unit

8 --- Valve assembly (2)

9 --- Valve assembly (1)

10 --- Power switch

11 --- Drive board

12 --- Data board

13 --- Mother board

14 --- Top cover

2-9

System Structure

Figure 2-7 Right side of the analyzer (right door removed)

1 --- Optical system

2 --- Isolation chamber

3 --- Sampling assembly

4 --- Fluidic valves

5 --- Fluidic valves

6 --- Volumetric unit

7 --- Vacuum chamber assembly

8 --- Right door

9 --- Waste pump assembly

10 --- Valve assembly (3)

11 --- Bath assembly

12 --- WBC reaction bath assembly

13 --- Pinch valve

14 --- Autoloader control board

15 ---Mix mechanism

2-10

System Structure

2.5 Software structure


The software system consists of the main unit software which operates on the data board inner
the analyzer and the operation software which operates under the WINDOWS platform of the
external computer. The main unit software analyzes sequence, collects data and calculates the
parameters. The operation software realizes the interaction of the functions including count,
QC, calibration, maintenance, data management and parameter setup, etc.

2.5.1 Menu structure


1. Shortcut button area
When switching to any screen, a guidance bar will always be displayed on the left of the
screen containing 10 frequently used shortcut buttons. Click them to perform the
corresponding operations. The menu structure of the shortcut buttons is shown in Figure 2-8.

Any screen

Run
STAT
Diluent
Worklist
Graph
Table
QC
Logout
Shutdown
Exit

Figure 2-8 Menu structure of the shortcut button area


2. Run message box
The menu structure of the Run message box is shown in Figure 2-9.

2-11

System Structure

RUN

AL-WB

Start
Ok
Cancel

CT-WB

Start
Ok
Cancel

CT-PD

Start

Ok
Cancel
Figure 2-9 Menu structure of the Run message box
3. Worklist screen
At the Worklist screen, you can click the function buttons to perform the corresponding
worklist-related operations.
The menu structure of the Worklist screen is shown in Figure 2-10.

2-12

System Structure

Figure 2-10 Menu structure of the worklist screen


4. Review screen
The Review menu has five submenus: Graph, Table, Data Backup, Data Export and
Compare. The Data Backup and Data Export functions can be enabled only when the analyzer
has just been started up or you are at the Table review screen; otherwise, they grey out. The
Table review includes the functions of auto-backup and auto-restore, which will be performed
automatically by the software when the condition of backup or restoring is fulfilled. The menu
structures of each screen of the Review screen are shown below.

Graph

The menu structure of the graph review screen is shown in Figure 2-11.

2-13

System Structure

Figure 2-11 Menu structure of the graph review screen

Table

The menu structure of the table review screen is shown in Figure 2-12.
TABLE

Sample List

Samples
within Today

Delete
Deselect
Print

All Samples

Trend Graph
Samples
Found
Optical

Result

Edit Result
Restore Result
Store

Sample/
Patient Info.

Validate
Batch Validate
Search

Microscopic
Exam. and
Others

Transmit
Pos./Total

Others

Data Backup
Data Export
Auto-backup
Auto-restore

Figure 2-12 Menu structure of the table review screen

Data Export

The menu structure of the Data Export screen is shown in Figure 2-13.

2-14

CV

System Structure

Figure 2-13 Menu structure of the data export screen

Data Backup

The menu structure of the Data Backup screen is shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Menu structure of the data backup screen

Compare

The menu structure of the Compare screen is shown in Figure 2-15.

2-15

System Structure

COMPARE

Comparison
Summary

Re-fill
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print

Result Trend

Re-fill
Search
Adjust Parameter
Order
Print

Figure 2-15 Menu structure of the compare screen


5. QC screen
The QC programs include the L-J QC, X-B QC, X QC and X -R QC. Click the shortcut
button QC of the guidance bar on the left of the screen to enter the L-J QC graph screen.
Click Menu QC, then the submenus of four QC programs will pop up for you to select.

L-J

The menu structure of the L-J QC program is shown in Figure 2-16.

2-16

System Structure

Figure 2-16 Menu structure of the L-J QC program

2-17

System Structure

X-B

The menu structure of the X-B QC program is shown in Figure 2-17.


X-B

Settings

Set Limits
Have Preset
Values
Restore
Defaults
Save
Print

Graph

Delete
Calculate
Preset Values
Save Preset
Values
Print
Pos./Total

List

Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total

Figure 2-17 Menu structure of the X-B QC program

The menu structure of the X QC program is shown in Figure 2-18.

2-18

System Structure

Figure 2-18 Menu structure of the X QC program

2-19

System Structure

X -R

The menu structure of the X -R QC program is shown in Figure 2-19.

X -R

Settings

Save
Print

Run

Start
Print
Pos./Total

Graph

Delete
New Vial
Data Compare
Display order
Outliers
Print
Pos./Total

Table

Delete
Print
Communication
Data Backup
Data Export
History
Pos./Total

Figure 2-19 Menu structure of the X -R QC program

6. Service screen
The Service screen contains screens of Maintenance, Status, Self-test, Debug,
Log, Counter and Version and Config. Information. The menu structures of these
2-20

System Structure
screens are shown below.

Maintenance screen

The menu structure of the Maintenance screen is shown in Figure 2-20.

2-21

System Structure

Figure 2-20 Menu structure of the Maintenance screen

2-22

System Structure

Status screen

The menu structure of the Status screen is shown in Figure 2-21.

Status

Temperature&Pressure

Export
Print

Voltage&Current

Export
Print

Sensor

Export

Print
Signal Collection

Export
Print

Figure 2-21 Menu structure of the Status screen

Self-test screen

The menu structure of the Self-test screen is shown in Figure 2-22.

2-23

System Structure

Figure 2-22 Menu structure of the Self-test screen

2-24

System Structure

Debug screen

The menu structure of the Debug screen is shown in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23 Menu structure of the Debug screen

Counter screen

The menu structure of the Counter screen is shown in Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24 Menu structure of the Counter screen

Log screen

The menu structure of the Log screen is shown in Figure 2-25

2-25

System Structure

Figure 2-25 Menu structure of the Log screen

Version and Config. Information screen

The menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen is shown in Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26 Menu structure of the Version and Config. Information screen

2-26

System Structure
7. Setup screen
The Setup screen contains screens of Gain, Data Format, Reagent, Auxiliary, Para.
Unit, Ref. Range, Print, Auto Maintenance, User and Password and Advanced.
The menu structure of the Setup screen is shown in Figure 2-27.

2-27

System Structure
SETUP

Date Format
Reagent
Auxiliary
Para. Unit
Apply
Ref. Range
Print
Ok
Communication
RUO
Cancel
Gain
Auto Maintenance
Autoloader
Barcode Info.
Lab Info.

Ok
Cancel

Advanced

Maintenance

User and
Password

New
Edit
Delete
Reset Password
Change Password
Close

Figure 2-27 Menu structure of the Setup screen

8. Statistics screen

2-28

System Structure
The menu structure of the Statistics screen is shown in Figure 2-28.
Calculate
Workload

STATISTICS

Statistical
Condition

Re-fill

Statistical
Item

Statistics

Workload
Summary

Adjust Order

Print
Calculate
Charge

Statistical
Condition

Re-fill

Statistics
Charge
Summary

Adjust Order

Print
Figure 2-28 Menu structure of the Statistics screen

9. Shortcut Code screen


The menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen is shown in Figure 2-29.

Figure 2-29 Menu structure of the Shortcut Code screen

10. Calibration screen


The menu structure of the Calibration screen is shown in Figure 2-30.

2-29

System Structure

Figure 2-30 Menu structure of the Calibration screen

11. Help info.


The menu structure of the Help screen is shown in Figure 2-31.
HELP

Contents

Service

Review
Search
Daily
Operations
Print

Setup

Calibration

QC
Figure 2-31 Menu structure of the Help screen

12. Shutdown
The menu structure of Shutdown is shown in Figure 2-32.

2-30

System Structure

SHUTDOWN

Sleep

Shutdown

Figure 2-32 Menu structure of Shutdown

13. Exit
The menu structure of Exit is shown in Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33 Menu structure of EXIT

2.5.2 Passwords
The passwords are divided into three levels: common user, administrator (set by the user at
the User and Password screen) and service engineer (user name: service, and password:
Se s700. Note: there is a space between e and s). An administrator is enabled to have all
the authorities of a common user, and a service engineer is enabled to have all the authorities
of an administrator. Tables below introduce the authorities enabled for each level of user.

Table 2-1 Authorities enabled for the common user level


Level
Common

Module
Worklist

Screen

Authorities enabled

Worklist

Users of three levels are enabled with all

User

the authorities of the worklist screen, which


including:
Delete,

New,

Save,

Search,

Insert,
Hide,

Select(Deselect), Browse, Copy and


Print.

2-31

System Structure
Count

All

screens

except the QC
Run

Users of three levels are all enabled with


the authority of running samples.

and

Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test

and

Debug);

as

well

as

the

Run screen
Review

Graph

Data/Graph,

Saving

of

DIFF,

Print,

Pos./Total, Lock, Data Browse (the buttons


of Validate, Edit Result and Restore
Result are available, but when you click
them, a message box will pop up for
authority identification.)
Saving of the Microscopic Exam. and
Others screen, Print, Pos./Total, Lock,
Data Browsing and Setup of blood ESR ref.
range.
TABLE

Save, Print, Communication, Deselect,


Search, Trend Graph (cannot be printed),
CV (cannot be printed), arrow buttons
above the Pos./Total control (the buttons
of Validate, Batch Validate, Edit
Result

and

Restore

Result

are

available, but when you click them, a


message box will pop up for authority
identification.)
Data Export

Data Export

Data Backup

Data Backup

Compare

Search and re-fill patient information,


adjust

and

print

parameters

in

the

comparison summary, adjust and print


parameters in the result trend.
Auto-backup

Auto-backup

Auto-restore

Auto-restore

2-32

System Structure
QC

L-J

L-J QC setup: browse file information of


different lot No.(but can not edit the QC
settings), Print
L-J QC count: Start QC Run, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,
Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
L-J QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup,

Data

Export,

History

and

Pos./Total
X-B

X-B QC setup: browse the information of


the screen but no edit allowed, Print
X-B QC graph: Calculate Preset Values,
Save Preset Values, Print and Pos./Total
X-B QC table: Print, Communication, Data
Backup,

Data

Export,

History

and

Pos./Total
X QC setup: browse file information of

different lot No.(but can not edit the QC


settings), Print
X QC count: Start QC Run, Print and

Pos./Total
X QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,

Display Order, Calculate Preset Values,


Save Preset Values, Outliers, Print and
Pos./Total
X QC table: Print, Communication, Data

Backup,
Pos./Total

2-33

Data

Export,

History

and

System Structure
X -R

X -R QC setup: browse file information of

different lot No.(but can not edit the QC


settings), Print
X -R QC count: Start QC Run, Print and

Pos./Total
X -R QC graph: New Vial, Data Compare,

Display

Order,

Outliers,

Print

and

Pos./Total
X -R QC table: Print, Communication,

Data Backup, Data Export, History and


Pos./Total
Service

Maintenance

Replace

Reagent

(All

Reagents

unavailable), Clean, (Empty WBC Bath,


Empty RBC Bath, Empty DIFF Bath
all unavailable), Maintain the whole device
Status

Temperature&Pressure

Analyzer

Information unavailable at the Print


message

box),

Voltage&Current

(Analyzer Information unavailable at the


Print and Export message boxes)
Self-test

Self-test

for

syringes

and

sampling

mechanism, valves and others


Counter

Check and print all the information

Log

Check, print and see details of logs


including Set Paras, Other Logs and
All Logs

Version

Setup

and

Check, export and print the information of

Config.

the Version and Config. Information

Information

screen

General

Date

Format

(Authority unavailable)

Format,

Reagent,

Auxiliary

1. Check the information of the User list


screen, but New, Edit, Delete and Reset
User

and

Password

password are disabled.


2. When log in as a common user, the
password of the current login user can be
modified.

2-34

System Structure

Statistics

Lab

Check the Lab information, but not allowed

Information

to edit

Select

Calculate

Calibration

Shutdown
Exit

set

statistical

summaries

Calculate

Set calculate conditions, adjust and print

Charge

charge summaries

Department

Check

Deliverer

Check

Diagnosis

Check

Gender

Check

Calibration

Browse and print user calibration factors

Factor
Help

items,

conditions, adjust and print workload

Workload

Shortcut Code

statistical

Help

Check the help information


Perform

Shutdown

the

Sleep

and

Shutdown

procedures

Exit

Log out and exit the system

Table 2-2 Authorities enabled for the administrator level


Level
Administrator

Module

Screen

Worklist

Worklist

Run

All

Authorities enabled

screens

except the QC
Run

Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test

and

Debug)

and

Calibration
Review

Graph

Delete, Histogram Adjust., Validate, Edit


Result and Restore Result

Table

Validate, Batch Validate, Edit Result and


Delete

Data Export

2-35

System Structure
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC

L-J

L-J QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set


limits, get preset values
L-J QC count
L-J QC graph: Delete
L-J QC table: Delete

X-B

X-B QC setup: Edit QC files, get preset


values, restore defaults, save
X-B QC graph: Delete
X-B QC table: Delete
X QC setup: Edit QC files, save and set

limits, get preset values


X QC count
X QC graph: Delete
X QC table: Delete
X -R

X -R QC setup: edit QC files, save

X -R QC count
X -R QC graph: Delete
X -R QC table: Delete

Service

Maintenance
Status

Temperature&Pressure

(Analyzer

Information

available

at

the

Print

message

box),

Voltage&Current

(Analyzer Information available at the


Print message box)
Self-test
Counter
Log

Check, print and see the details of the


Error Info.

Version

and

Config.
Information

2-36

System Structure
Authority setting items of the Auxiliary

Setup

screen
General Setup

Check and set the parameters of screens


including Para. Unit, Ref. Range, Print,
Communication, RUO, Auto Maintenance,
Autoloader and Barcode Info.

User

and

Password

of all users and change the administrators


own password

Lab

Check and edit the Lab Information

Information
Shortcut Code
Statistics

New, Edit, delete user, reset the passwords

New, Edit and Delete the shortcut code

Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge

Shortcut Code

Calibration

Department

New, Edit and Delete

Deliverer

New, Edit and Delete

Diagnosis

New, Edit and Delete

Gender

New, Edit and Delete

Calibration

Save and restore the User Calibration

Factors

Factors (all the User Calibration Factors)


1. Calibration in the CT-CBC+DIFF mode

Calibrator

2. Calibrate one or more parameters


among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.
1. Fresh Blood calibration in the CT-WB

Fresh Blood

and CT-PD Mode;


2. Calibrate one or more parameters
among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT.

Help

Help

Shutdown

Shutdown

Exit

Exit

Table 2-3 Authorities enabled for the service engineer level


Level
Service

Module
Worklist

Screen

Authorities enabled

Worklist

2-37

System Structure
Engineer

Run

All

screens

except the QC
Run

Service
(Maintenance,
Status,
Self-test

and

Debug)

and

Calibration
Review

Graph

Special Info.

Table

Trend graph (can be printed), CV (can be


printed), Optical

Data Export
Data Backup
Compare
Auto-backup
Auto-restore
QC

L-J
X-B
X
X -R

Service

Maintenance

1. Replace All Reagents


2. Empty WBC Bath, Empty RBC Bath and
Empty DIFF Bath at the Maintenance
screen

Status

Temperature&Pressure

(Analyzer

Information available at the Export


message

box),

Voltage&Current

(Analyzer Information available at the


Export message box), Sensor, Signal
collection

and

Export

the

Analyzer

Information
Self-test
Counter

Initialize the number of times that each


item

has

been

calculated

except

the Sample Count Times (samples in


QC, calibration, background counts and
reliability tests not included)

2-38

System Structure
Log

Export, Save, Print and see Details of Set


Paras, Other Logs, All Logs, Error
Info. and RunSequence

Debug
Version

Debug
and

Config.
Information
Setup

Edit FS, SS and SF values of the Gain


General Setup

screen; set the value for Auto prompt


when n samples were run at the Auto
Maintenance screen

User

and

Password
Lab
Information
Shortcut Code
Advanced
Statistics

Maintain

Calculate
Workload
Calculate
Charge

Shortcut Code

Department
Deliverer
Diagnosis
Gender

Calibration

Import and Export User Calibration Factors


and Factory Calibration Factors, Restore

Calibration

Defaults, Save, Restore (All the Factory

Factors

Calibration Factors and Factory Transfer


Factors), Print
1. Factory calibrator calibration in the
WB-CBC, WB-CBC+DIFF, PD-CBC and
PD-CBC+DIFF mode.

Calibrator

2. Calibrate one or more parameters


among WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT and
MPV.

Help

Help

2-39

System Structure
Shutdown

Shutdown

Exit

Exit

2-40

Instrument Installation and Software


Upgrade

3.1 Preparations
3.1.1 Purpose
Install the instrument and update the software properly as per the procedures introduced in this
chapter.

3.1.2 Tools

Blade or clipper

USB flash drive

Pipette (200l)

Cross-headed screwdriver

Thermometer with a probe

The software copied in the U-drive must be the specified one for the
analyzer of the specified model. Otherwise, you can not proceed to install.

3.1.3 Accessories

Plastic test tube

Glass Pipette

7m standard particles

Gloves

Tissues

Controls (high and normal level)

Do prepare the 7m standard particles firstly to proceed with the later


confirmation work of the optical gain.

3-1

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.2 Installation Requirements


3.2.1 Space Requirements
Check the site for proper space allocation. In addition to the space required for the analyzer
itself, arrange for:

at least 100 cm on both left and right sides;

at least 50 cm behind;

enough room on or below the countertop to accommodate the diluent, rinse and waste
containers

3.2.2 Power Requirements


1. Make sure the analyzer is properly grounded. Before turning on the analyzer, make sure
the input voltage meets the requirements.
2. Using pinboard may bring the electrical interference and the analysis results may be
unreliable.

Please place the analyzer near the electrical outlet to avoid using the

plug-board.
3. Please use the original electrical wire shipped with the analyzer. Using other electrical wire
may damage the analyzer or cause unreliable analysis results.
Voltage: A.C. 100V-240V
Input power: 300 VA
Frequency: 50/60 Hz

3.2.3 Environment Requirements


The installation environment of analyzer must meet the following requirements:
1. Optimal operating temperature: 15 - 30
2. Optimal operating humidity: 30 % - 85 %
3. Atmospheric pressure: 70 kPa - 106 kPa
4. The environment should be as free as possible from dust, mechanical vibrations, loud
noises, pollution and electrical interference.
5. It is advisable to evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to the operation of this
analyzer. Make sure the electromagnetic interference is less than CLASS B. Do not use
this analyzer in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.
6. Do not place the analyzer near brush-type motors, flickering fluorescent lights, and
electrical contacts that regularly open and close.
7. Do not place the analyzer on a slope.
8. The environment should have good ventilation. Do not place the analyzer in direct sunlight
or in front of a source of heat or drafts.

3-2

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Make sure the installation environment meets the above 8 requirements.


Otherwise, the performance of the analyzer might be affected.

3.2.4 PC Configuration Requirements


1. Startup the computer, then right-click My Computer and select Properties to enter the
property screen shown in Figure 3-2. You can check the operation system and RAM of the
computer here. They should meet the following requirements:
Operation system Windows 2000 Professional + SP4, Windows XP Home/XP
Professional + SP2 or Windows Vista.
RAM256MB at least

Figure 3-1 Checking Properties of My computer

3-3

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Operating
system

RAM

Figure 3-2 System properties


2. Right-click the desktop and select Properties, and then click the Settings tag to enter
the screen shown in Figure 3-4. You can check the resolution of the display here. It should
meet the following requirements:
Resolution1024 x 768 or higher (adjust as shown in Figure 3-4)

Figure 3-3 Checking Properties of desktop

3-4

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Screen resolution

Figure 3-4 Setting screen resolution


3. Double-click My Computer to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-5. You can check the
space available on each disk here. It should meet the following requirements:
Hard disk space4GB available on one disk at least.

Disk space

Figure 3-5 My computer


Then, close these 3 dialog boxes.

3-5

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

The PC hardware configuration and operation system must meet the


foregoing requirements. Otherwise, the analyzer can not work properly.

If the operating system on the external PC is Windows 2000 Professional


+SP4, the software for the analyzer can only be installed successfully after
installing the Windows2000-KB835732 patch of the corresponding language.

To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, you should copy the


installation files from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a
CD-ROM, and then copy the files to the PC for installation through U drive.
To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, install or update the software
using the CD directly. To connect to the LIS, the PC should be configured
with two network cards.

3-6

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.3 Package Checking and Unpacking


3.3.1 Checks before unpacking
Please check if the package is intact before unpacking.

3.3.2 Unpacking the main unit


1. The appearance of the main unit is shown in Figure 3-6. Cut off the binding belt before
unpacking.

Figure 3-6 External package of main unit


2. Cut off the binding belt and remove the wooden cover. Then, remove the accessory box
shown in the figure below.

Figure3-7 Remove wooden cover


3. Lift the carton to expose the main unit.
3-7

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure3-8 Remove accessory box


4. Remove the protection foam from both sides of the main unit.

Figure3-9 Remove carton


5. Remove the plastic bag from the main unit. Grab the bottom of the main unit and lift it onto a
countertop. Note that the main unit must be lifted by at least two persons.

Figure 3-10 Lift main unit

3-8

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

When lifting the main unit, keep it as level as possible and avoid strong
impact.

3.3.3 Checking packing list


Check the delivered components against the packing list to see if everything is delivered.

3-9

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.4 Removal and Installation


1. Open the right door of the main unit, remove the plastic cable tie vertically fixing the
sampling assembly and remove the clamp fixing the synchronous belt, as Figure 3-11
shows.

Figure 3-11 Remove the plastic cable tie and the clamp
2. When using the tubes of 1475mmor 1575mmmodel, you should disassembly
the adapter from the rack to load the tubes. Disassembly as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Remove the adapter from the tube rack


3. To install the software on a PC without CD-ROM, the installation files should be copied
from the installation CD to a USB flash drive on a PC with a CD-ROM, and then plug the
flash drive to the USB interface of the PC for installation and open the folder with
3-10

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


installation files. To install the software on a PC with a CD-ROM, put the installation CD
directly into the CD-ROM.and open the folder with instaltion files. Copy the installation files
from the disk to the U drive. Then, plug the U drive to the USB interface and then open the
installation folder.
4. Check if there is any software of other hematology analyzer on the PC. If there is, uninstall
the software or database before installation, and then double-click Setup.exe to install
the software. Select the language from the pull-down list in the pop-up message box, and
then click OK to continue installing, as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Language selecting


5. An installation directory box will pop up with the default directory: D:\Mindray\Auto
Hematology Analyzer. You can click Browse to change the directory if necessary. Then,
click Next to continue installing as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Selecting directory


6. A progress bar shown in Figure 3-15 will pop up. Please wait while the software is being
installed.

3-11

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-15 Progress bar


7. When the installation of the software is finished, a message box shown in Figure 3-16 will
pop up. Click Next to install the necessary components and database.

Figure 3-16 Continuing installing


8. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-17 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept to continue installing.

3-12

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-17 Installing .NET Framework 2.0


9. The message boxes shown in Figure 3-18 will pop up while installing, please click the
Accept button to continue installing.

3-13

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-18 Installing Windows Installer 3.1


10. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-19 will pop up while installing, please click
the Accept to continue installing.

3-14

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-19 Installing SQL


11. Then, the message boxes shown in Figure 3-20 will pop up while installing, please click
the Install button to continue installing.

Figure 3-20 Installing VC++ R L


12. A progress bar Installing XXX shown in Figure 3-21 will pop up while installing the
components. Please be patient and wait as it may take longer time.

3-15

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-21 Progress bar


13. After part of the components is installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-22 may pop up.
You should click Yes to restart the computer and the installation program may continue
automatically after restarting.

Figure 3-22 Restarting the PC


14. When finish installing the components, the database will be installed automatically as
shown in Figure 3-23 .

Figure 3-23 Installing database

3-16

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


15. When the installation is complete, a message box shown in Figure 3-24 will pop up. Click
Close to close the box and the entire software installation procedure is finished.

Figure 3-24 Installation complete

If it is found that the main unit software mismatches the PC software, you
should upgrade the main unit software as per the procedures specified in
3.11.2 to match it with the software of the PC-end.

16. Install the driver program of the printer properly on the PC.
17. The BC-5380 consists of the IPU PC and the main unit as designed. Only basic interactive
keys like the [RUN] and [OPEN] keys are located on the main unit. The rest of the
operations are realized through the IPU PC. The IPU PC has two network interfaces, one
connecting the BC-5380 and the other one may connect to other information devices (e.g.
LIS system) or the LAN of the hospital, which are used to export data. There are two icons
of Local Area Connection for the two network interfaces existed. follow the procedures to
configure the network interfaces of the IPU PC:
(1) Right click My Network Places and select Properties from the pop-up dialog box.

3-17

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-25 Right clicking Network neighbor


(2) Right click one of the network interfaces and select Properties. In the pop-up message
box, select the check box of Show icon in notification area when connected and Notify
me when this connection has limited or no connectivity, and then click OK. Repeat this
procedure to set the other network interface.

Figure 3-26 Connection properties


(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
and then click Properties. At the pop-up screen, select Use the following IP address, and
then enter 10.0.0.1 into the IP address box and 255.0.0.0 into the Subnet mask box, as
shown in Figure 3-27 .

3-18

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-27 Setting IP address


(4) Then, click OK to save all the settings.

Never set the Default gateway and DNS server for the network interface
(10.0.0.1) connecting the BC-5380. Otherwise, you may not access to the
network connecting the other network interface.

If other computers or network are connected to the IPU PC (through the


other network interface), be sure that the IP address 10.0.0.1 (used by the
IPU PC) or 10.0.0.2 (used by the BC-5380) is not applied to other computers
or computers in the other network.

18. The LIS computer is used to transmit data by connecting the IPU computer. Do as follows
to check and set the IP for the LIS computer.
(1) At the desktop of the LIS computer, right click My Network Places and select
Properties from the pop-up dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-28 .

3-19

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-28 Network Neighbor (LIS computer)


(2) Right click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties, as shown in Figure
3-29 .

Figure 3-29 Connection properties


Then, the following box will pop up:

3-20

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-30 Connection properties (LIS computer)


(3) At the Local Area Connection Properties screen, double click Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) to enter the following screen.

3-21

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-31 Setting IP address


(4) Check and record the IP address shown in the screen. It will be used to set the IP
information on the BC-5380.
(5) If the IP address is not displayed here, you should set it manually (do not set the gateway
and DNS server). After setting the IP address, the subnet mask will be generated automatically.
Then, click OK to save the settings.

The IP address you set here can not be 10.0.0.1 or 10.0.0.2.

3-22

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.5 Connections
1. See Figure 3-32 for connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the
M-53LEO(I) lyse, M-53LEO(II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and the analyzer should be placed in a
plane of the same level, and the M-53D diluent, M-53 cleanser, and waste containers
should be placed under the countertop.

Figure 3-32 Connections of reagent and waste containers

Make sure the M-53LEO (I) lyse, M-53LEO (II) lyse, M-53LH lyse and M-53
cleanser are placed on the same level as the analyzer.

Make sure the tubes are electrically isolated.


See Figure 3-33 for proper connections of reagent and waste containers. Note that the tube
connectors and their counterparts on the analyzer are of the same colors.

3-23

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-33 linking wires and lines

2. Locate the power inlet at the back of the main unit and connect the female end of the
power cable to the power inlet, and connect the three-pronged end of the power cable to a
power outlet.

Figure 3-34 Connection of PC and power supply

3. Connect the BC-5380 with the IPU computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-35 .

3-24

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-35 Connecting the main unit and the IPU computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the IPU computer and the
LIS computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable have no difference. You can plug
them to IPU computer and the LIS computer respectively at will. Please see
appendix H for method of how to distinguish a cross network cable from a
direct-connected network cable.

4. There are two ways to connect the BC-5380 and the LIS computer.
(1) Connect the BC-5380 with the LIS computer by a cross network cable, as shown in Figure
3-36 .

Figure 3-36 Connecting the IPU computer and the LIS computer

Be sure to use the cross network cable to connect the analyzer and the LIS
computer.

The two ends of a cross network cable can be randomly plugged into the
two computers respectively.

(2) Connect the IPU computer to the LAN of the hospital, as shown in Figure 3-37 .
3-25

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-37 Connecting the IPU computer and LAN

Be sure to use the direct-connected network cable to connect the IPU


computer to the LAN.

The two ends of a direct-connected network cable can be randomly plugged


into the IPU computer and the network devices (HUB, Exchanger, Router,
etc.) respectively.

Adopt one of the two ways to finish the network connection according to the condition of the
hospital or doctors requirement.
5. Connect the printer with the IPU computer with specified cable and connect the power
cord properly.

3-26

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.6 Start-up
3.6.1 Inspection before Startup
Check and make sure the marks on the relieve valve are on the same line, as shown in Figure
3-38. Change the relieve valve if the marks are not on the same line.

Marks on relieve valve

Figure 3-38 Marks on relieve valve


1. Check and make sure the sampling tube and the two pipes connected the probe wipe are
not bended and clogged at the place of the flatten cable clamp (at top of the sampling
assembly), as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Sampling and probe wipe tubing


2. Before starting up, remove the right door of the analyzer, and then check and make sure
the tubes connecting the V25, V26 and the tee-connector of the volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged, as Figure 3-40 shows.

3-27

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Check and make sure


the tubes connecting
the V25, V26 and the
tee-connector of the
volumetric tube are not
bended and clogged

Figure 3-40 Tubing free from bending and clogging


3. Check and make sure the thick 50 tube connecting the V27 is not bended and clogged, as
Figure 3-41 shows.

Check and make


sure the thick 50
tube
connecting
the V27 is not
bended
and
clogged

Figure 3-41 Tubing free from bending and clogging


4. Check and make sure the two-way connector and the tee connector connecting tube 1 are
in the same distance towards the pinch valve, as shown in Figure 3-42 .

3-28

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Two-way
connector

Tube 1

Tee connector
Figure 3-42 Checking the pinch valve

3.6.2 Start up for the first time

1. Turn on the analyzer, wait a moment and then a prompt

will appear

on the task bar. It means the local-connection-related network interface connects the

BC-5380 already. Similarly, if the other prompt

appears on the

task bar, it means the local-connection-2-related network interface doesnt connect the
BC-5380, and it is available to connect the LAN of the hospital. If the two prompts are all

then, you should unplug the network cable connecting the


BC-5380 from the IPU computer, and then plug it into the other network interface; then,
plug the network cable connecting the LIS computer into the rest network interface.
2. Double click the BC-5380 Hematology Analyzer icon on the desktop of the IPU
computer to start up the software. Then, enter the user name service and the password
Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the login box, as shown in
Figure 3-43 , and then click OK to initialize the analyzer.

3-29

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-43 Logging in


3. During the initialization, a dialog box Skip fluidic initialization? will pop up. Click No to
continue the initialization.

Figure 3-44 Skip fluidic initialization?


4. When initialization is finished, click Menu Setup Communication to enter the
screen shown below. Set the IP address and Port here, and then click Ok to save the
settings.

3-30

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-45 Communication setup

The IP address you set here should be the one of the LIS computer
connecting the IPU computer. The Port you set here should be the
interception port of the LIS computer. The IP address of external server
cannot be 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, and format like 10.0.0.* is not recommended.

5. Before transmitting data, make sure the LIS computer connecting the IPU computer is
working. Thus, the IPU program could locate the destination for transmitting.
6. If the connection is established between the IPU computer and the LIS computer, the LIS
icon in the IPU screen will turn to colorful, as shown in Figure 3-46, indicating you can start
transmitting data now.

3-31

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-46 LIS communication

The data communication will be terminated automatically once the IPU


software is closed. The LIS computer is the server terminal and the IPU
software is the customer terminal. The IPU software keeps trying to connect
after starting up, if it is intercepted correctly by the server terminal, then the
connection will be established and ready for communication.

The IPU computer can connect LIS computer through cross network cable;
connect LIS computer in the same network through devices like HUBs or
exchangers; connect LIS computer in a different network through devices
like routers.

3.6.3 Inspection after Startup


1. Click Menu Service Version and Config. Information, as shown in Figure 3-47 to
enter the version and configuration information screen shown in Figure 3-48.

3-32

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-47 Menu option

Figure 3-48 Version and config. Info.


2. Check and make sure the following items are the correct and specified version: Boot
Software, Application Software, Operating System, Driver Board FPGA, Driver Board MCU,
Data board FPGA, Fluidics Sequence and Algorithm Library, as shown in Figure 3-48, and
then close the message box.

3-33

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

The specified version here means the PC end software should be complied
with that of the main unit end. Upgrade the main unit end software to match
the PC end software if necessary.

3-34

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.7 Setup and Adjustment


3.7.1 Setting Parameters
1. At the main screen, click MenuSetupReagent to enter the reagent screen where
you can set the expiration date for the reagents, as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Clicking Reagent


2. Set the expiration date for the following reagents: Diluent, LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II)
Lyse, LH Lyse and Cleanser.

3-35

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-50 Setting the expiration date


3. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in
Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-51 Entering Advance screen

3-36

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-52 Advance screen


4. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen, as shown in Figure 3-52, and the
Ambient Temp. Calibration screen will pop up. Put the thermometer to about 5cm from
the right side of the analyzer (do not touch the analyzer). Read the measured value after 1
minute and enter it in the blank box at the screen. Click Calculate New Difference to get
the new deviation, and then click Ok to go back to the Advanced screen, as shown in
Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53 Ambient Temp. Calibration screen


5. Click Ambient Temp. at the Advanced screen to go to the Ambient Temp.
Calibration screen;
6. Read the measured temperature after 1 minute and make sure the deviation of the value
measured by the analyzer from that by the thermometer should be less than 1. If not,
readjust the ambient temperature until the deviation is less than 1.
7. Input the ambient temperature measured by the analyzer and the thermometer, and then

3-37

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


click Ok at the Ambient Temp. Calibration screen to go to the Advanced screen.
Click Ok to close the Advanced screen.

3.7.2 Adjusting Position


1. Press the [RUN] key. Then, the analyzer will run a background count once.
2. At the graph review screen, click the Special info. button as shown in Figure 3-54 to
enter the special information screen shown in Figure 3-55.

Figure 3-54 Clicking Special info.

Figure 3-55 Special info. Screen


3. Firstly, make sure the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200. Otherwise, do the
background count till the DIFF pulse data length is less than 200, as shown in Figure 3-55.
3-38

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


Use the cross-headed screw driver to remove the shielding cover of the volumetric board.
Make sure the WBC Start signal delay is within [2.5, 3] and the RBC Start signal delay is
within [4, 5.5]. If they are found out of the limit, fine adjust the distance between the tee
connector under the volumetric tube and the lower fixing plate of the volumetric board
according to the WBC and RBC Start signal delay, as shown in Figure 3-56. When WBC
start signal delay is less than 2.5s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube downwards; When
WBC start signal delay is more than 3s, fine adjust the WBC volumetric tube upwards;
When RBC start signal delay is less than 4s, fine adjust the RBC volumetric tube
downwards; When RBC start signal delay is more than 5.5s, stop adjusting the RBC
volumetric tube upwards. When the WBC and RBC Start signal delay are within the limit,
do the background count three times consecutively to check and make sure the two values
are within the range every time, and then record the values of the last time. Meanwhile,
check the WBC and RBC count time and calculate the mean time. Then, close the special
info. message box.

Be sure to adjust the position of the volumetric tube by your hand directly.
Never pull the tee connector hard to adjust, otherwise, the tee connector
may leak and the volumetric tube may be broken.

Figure 3-56 Distance under the volumetric tube


4. At the main screen, click MenuSetupAdvanced to enter the screen shown in
Figure 3-58.
3-39

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-57 Entering Advance screen

Figure 3-58 Advance screen


5. Confirm whether the WBC and RBC count mean time that you recorded previously
complies with the time displayed in the screen, as shown in Figure 3-58. Enter the
recorded mean time if the time displayed doesnt comply with the recorded one.

3-40

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.8 Testing Other Functions


Click MenuSetupPrint to enter the print screen. You can set the connection between
the IPU computer and the printer here, as shown in Figure 3-59.

Select printer

Click OK

Figure 3-59 Print Setup

3-41

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.9 Confirming Gain


3.9.1 HGB blank voltage
After the transportation and initialization, the HGB blank voltage required may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, confirming and adjusting the HGB blank voltage through gain setup is necessary.
1. Entering the setup screen
At the main screen, click Menu SetupGain to enter the screen.

HGB gain
HGB blank
voltage

Figure 3-60 Setup screen


2. Confirming the HGB gain
You can adjust the HGB blank voltage by adjusting the HGB gain. The HGB blank voltage shall
be set to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable. Do as follows to adjust:
At the Gain screen, click the adjusting button of the HGB current value to set the HGB
blank voltage to 4.48-4.52 V, 4.50V is favorable.

3.9.2 Gain of Optical System


After the transportation, the gain of the DIFF channel of the optical system may differ from the
factory settings.
Thus, adjusting the gain of the optical system is necessary. Do as follows to adjust:
1. At the Graph screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF and then perform the
background count once and make sure the background results meet the specified
3-42

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


requirement.
2. At the Table review screen, select the background record run previously, and then click
Optical to enter the screen shown in Figure 3-62 .

Figure 3-61 Setup screen

SS 0.1max total

FS 0.1max total

Click Calculate

Click OK

Figure 3-62 Setup screen


3. Click Calculate, and then make sure the calculated FS and SS 0.1max total (the larger
3-43

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


number) is less than 50. Otherwise, you should clean the flow cell and DIFF bath at the
Maintenance screen. Then, repeat steps 1 to 3 until the number of FS and SS 0.1max
particles are less than 50. Then, click Ok to back to the main screen, as shown in Figure
3-62.
4. Run the calibrator on the analyzer. Select the test results from the Graph review screen,
and click Optical to go to the Optical screen. Click Calculate, and then check if the
gravity center position of FS and SS meet the following requirements (choose the one
have more particles within the FS 0.1max range): the FS gravity center should locate
within 0.57 of the low angle target peak; the SS gravity center should locate within 0.63
of the high angle target peak
5. If the position of FS and SS gravity centers do not meet the requirements, input the FS and
SS gain target values of the corresponding particle at the Optical screen, and then get
the gain values, as shown in Figure 3-63

Figure 3-63 Optical screen


6. Click Ok to close the Optical screen, and then click Menu SetupGain. Confirm
the values in the FS and SS boxes are the same with the FS and SS gain values. If not,
input the recorded FS and SS gain values as current FS and SS values, and then click
Ok to exit the screen, as shown in Figure 3-64

3-44

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-64 Setting optical gains


7. At the Graph review screen, select the work mode as WB-CBC+DIFF. Then, prepare
the standard particle sample at the ratio that dispenses 3 drops of standard particles into
1ml distilled water. Then, well mix the sample and run the sample once.

Be sure to use the distilled water to prepare the standard particle sample.
Prepared standard particle sample should be run within 12 hours.

8. When finish running, enter the Table screen and select the standard particle sample just
run, and then click the Optical button, as shown in Figure 3-65.

3-45

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-65 Table review screen


9. At the Optical screen, click the Calculate button. Check if the following requirements
are met: FS gravity center within (16.68, 19.42); SS gravity center within (100.56, 107.92);
SS 0.1max width 15.21, and then click OK to exit the optical screen.
10. If the gravity center and the 0.1max width of the standard particle do not meet the
requirements, fine tune the FS and SS gain values at the Gain screen. Run the calibrator
and the 7um standard particles, until the following requirements are met: for the calibrator,
the gravity center of the low angle should be within 1.51; the gravity center of the high
angle should be within 2.4 from the target values; for the 7um standard particles, the
gravity center of low angle should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); gravity center of high
angle should be 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angle width 6.50, high angle width of
7um standard particles 15.21. If these requirements are met, name and save the values.

3-46

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.10 Calibration and Performance Test


3.10.1

Background Count

Back to the Graph screen and perform the background count in WB-CBC+DIFF mode. The
background results shall meet the specified requirement: WBC:0.1109/L, RBC:0.031012/L,
HGB:1g/L, HCT:0.5%, PLT:5109/L.

3.10.2

Carryover

Follow the procedure 3 instructed in section 9.3.1 of the Operators Manual to make sure the
carryover of the analyzer meets the requirements listed in the table below:

3.10.3

Parameter

Carryover

WBC

0.5

RBC

0.5

HGB

0.6

HCT

0.5

PLT

1.0

Reproducibility

In the AL-WB-CBC+DIFF mode, AL-WB-CBC mode, CT-PD-CBC+DIFF mode and


CT-PD-CBC mode, make sure the reproducibility of the analyzer meets the requirements
specified in Appendix B 5.4 of the Operators Manual
The CV requirements for whole blood mode:
Para.

Condition

CV% / absolute deviation d (WB)

WBC

(6.015.0)109/L

2.0%

12

RBC

(4.006.00)10 /L

1.5%

HGB

(110180)g/L

1.5%

MCV

(80110)fL

1.0%

PLT

(150500)10 /L

4.0%

The CV requirements for predilute mode:


Para.

Condition

CV% / absolute deviation d (PD)


9

WBC

(6.015.0)10 /L

4.0%

RBC

(4.006.00)1012/L

3.0%

HGB

(110180)g/L

3.0%

MCV

(80110)fL

2.0%

PLT

(150500)109/L

8.0%
3-47

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.10.4

Calibration

1. Click MenuCalibration, and then click Calibrator to enter the screen. Select the
calibration mode as Whole Blood; enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the
calibrator, and then enter the WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into
the table.

Figure 3-66 Calibration (WB)


2. Well mix the calibrator and then open the cap. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample
compartment and put the calibrator into the compartment. Close the compartment door
manually, and then press the [RUN] key, as Figure 3-67 shows. When you hear the beep,
the analyzer is starting to run automatically.

3-48

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-67 Calibrator sampling

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (1 ml at
least).

3. Repeat running the calibrator for 11 times as instructed by Step 2.Then, click the Start
button. The setup of whole blood calibration factors is completed. Click Diluent and a
message box will pop up. Put the tube into the tube holder and put the loaded tube holder
into the sample compartment, and then close the compartment door manually. Then press
the [RUN] key to start dispensing the diluent, as Figure 3-68 shows. Dispense the diluent
into the tube for 6 times consecutively. Then click the Cancel button to close the
message box. Press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment and take out the
tube and the tube holder.

3-49

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Click
Diluent

Then click
Cancel

Figure 3-68 Dispensing diluent


4. Well mix the calibrator. Set the pipette to 120L and load the tip, and then aspirate the
calibrator, as Figure 3-69 shows.

Figure 3-69 Pipette


5. Clean the tip of the pipette by lint-free tissue, and then dispense the aspirated calibrator
into the tube loading the diluent and well mix it by the pipette, as Figure 3-70 shows.

3-50

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-70 Mix the sample


6. Go back to the Calibrator screen, and then select the calibration mode as Predilute
and enter the lot No. and the expiration date of the calibrator, and then enter the WBC,
RBC, HGB, MCV and PLT targets of the calibrator into the table.

Figure 3-71 Calibration (PD)


7. Present the vial of calibrator well mixed as instructed by Step 6 into the tube holder, and
3-51

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


then put the loaded tube holder into the sample compartment. Close the compartment door,
and then press the [RUN] key. When you hear the beep, the analyzer is starting to run
automatically.

Be sure to immerse the tip of the sample probe into the calibrator (at least
1ml).

8. Running the calibrator consecutively for 11 times as instructed by Step 8. The setup of
predilute calibration factors is completed.

3.10.5

Linearity

See installation verification report of the BC-5380.

3-52

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

3.11 Software upgrade


3.11.1

Upgrading the PC installed software

We only update the IPU software provided that it has been completely installed on the PC. The
update will not change users custom configuration including settings and database. Follow the
following steps to update the software:

1. Double-click the setup. exe icon to launch the update program;


2. A window will pop up as shown in Figure 3-72;

Figure 3-72 Selecting the updating mode

3. Click Next to go to the installation screen shown in Figure 3-73;

Figure 3-73 Progress bar

4. When the program finishes the installation, a message box shown in Figure 3-74 will pop
up;

3-53

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-74 Prompting to update the database

5. Click the Next button to update the database, as shown in Figure 3-75;

Figure 3-75 Installing database files

6. When all the database files are installed, a message box shown in Figure 3-76 will prompt
3-54

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


the completion of installation.

Figure 3-76 Finishing installation

To update the Version 1.3 BC-5100 software, select the Install mode to
install the new version in the previous folder rather than update the outdated
software.

If the system prompts for not enough space on disk during installation,
select another disk to install and make sure the free space on that disk is at
least 4G.

3.11.2

Upgrading the software of the main unit (analyzer)

1. Click MenuAll ProgramsBC-5380 Auto Hematology AnalyzerAnalyzer


Upgrade to launch the update software;

Before perform this step, make sure that the analyzer is powered on for at
least 30 seconds. Otherwise, the connection to the main unit may fail after
reboot or the update server may be uploaded again after being connected to
the main unit.

3-55

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-77 Client update software interface


For PC using Windows Vista, the IPU software or the update client may loose connection to
the main unit after reboot. Right click on the Analyzer Upgrade item and choose Run as
administrator to solve this problem, as shown in Figure 3-78;

Figure 3-78 Running the update client in Windows Vista


2. Click Analyzer Upgrade shown in Figure 3-77 and a message box will pop up. Enter the
user name service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e
and s) in the message box, as shown in Figure 3-79;

3-56

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-79 Logging in the client update software


3. Ensure proper connection between the PC (IPU software end) and the analyzer (main unit
end). If the connection fails, a message box shown in Figure 3-80 will pop up;

Figure 3-80 Connection failure message box


If the connection is proper, the update software will automatically check if the version of the
update server is suitable. If the version meets the requirement, Step 4 will be skipped;
otherwise, the update software will upload the latest update server files to the analyzer, as
shown in Figure 3-81;

Figure 3-81 Automatically uploading the update server to the analyzer


4. After the update server files have been uploaded successfully, you will be asked to restart
the main unit. Click Ok to restart, as shown in Figure 3-82;

3-57

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-82 Reboot message box

At this time, the update program has already been disconnect from the
analyzer, so Step 1 and 2 should be performed again to launch the update
program.

After the update server program being successfully updated and main unit
being rebooted, wait 2 minutes before logging on to the client.

5. After logging on, a message box shown in Figure 3-83 will pop up, asking you to choose
the directory of the update files;

Figure 3-83 Selecting the directory of the update files (1)


6. Click Browse in the message box shown in Figure 3-83 and select the update
package folder step1 (or other names as defined) generated by the installation CD as the
target directory, as shown in Figure 3-84;

3-58

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-84 Selecting the directory of the update files (2)


7. Click Ok and the directory will be displayed in the box. Check if the displayed directory is
correct, as shown in Figure 3-85;

Figure 3-85 Selecting the directory of the update files (3)


8. Click Ok to start uploading update files to the main unit, as shown in Figure 3-86;

Figure 3-86 Uploading the update files

3-59

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

During uploading the update files, if the message box of Analyzer


disconnected! Can not upgrade the analyzer! pops up, check if the selected
folder is correct, and then perform the update procedures again.

9. After finishing uploading, a message box of successful uploading shown in Figure 3-87 will
pop up;

Figure 3-87 Uploading files successfully

The uploading process takes 1 to 2 minutes according to the size of the


update files.

10. Click Ok and wait for a while. A message box will pop up to show the items to be updated,
as shown in Figure 3-88;

3-60

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade

Figure 3-88 Items to be updated


11. Click Ok to start updating, as shown in Figure 3-89;

Figure 3-89 Progress bar

During installation, if a message box of Disconnected from the analyzer.


Unable to finish updating! Please connect the analyzer and the PC end
software and try to update again. pops up, do not switch off the power
supply of the analyzer and restart the updating process from the beginning
after 5 minutes.

3-61

Instrument Installation and Software Upgrade


12. Click Ok in the message box prompting successful update, and then switch off and
restart the analyzer;
13. Update the folder step2 (including the main unit software, configuration files and fluidic
sequence) according to the same process, and then switch off the analyzer;
14. Use the screwdriver to remove the three cross-headed screws to open the top cover, and
then open the right door. Connect the J3 interface of the data board and the J11 interface
of the autoloader board using a dedicated cord, and then restart the main unit.

Use the dedicated cord in the accessory box provided by the manufacturer.

15. Update the folder step4 (including the hardware writing software) according to the same
process, and then switch off the analyzer.

Do not delete the files under ftp://10.0.0.2/3101 before updating and keep the
power supply of the main unit on. Always update the hardware after Step2 is
updated successfully.

After

replacing

the

data

board

(including

rootfs,

material

code:

051-000014-00), remember to perform all the steps to update the software at


the main unit end.

3-62

Fluidic System

4.1 Introduction of Fluidic Parts


4.1.1 Piercing needle
Pierces the evacuated blood collection tube; aspirates and dispenses the blood sample.

4.1.2 Probe Wipe


Washes the interior and exterior of the sample probe

4.1.3 Pumps
P1: provides pressure for the pressure chamber.
P2: empties the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber and creates vacuum.
P3: empties the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.

4.1.4 Syringes

Aspiration-Syringe: full volume 100 l; it aspirates and dispenses samples and aspirates
the second diluted sample.

Diluent-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses diluent into the WBC and RBC bath and
supplies the diluent to the probe wipe.

Lyse-Syringe: full volume 2.5ml; 3 syringes are driven by a motor; it dispenses M-53Leo
(I), M-53Leo (II) and M-53H.

Sheath-Syringe: full volume 10ml; it dispenses the sheath into the flow cell, cleans the
flow cell and DIFF bath, and is also be used for sample preparation.

Sample-Syringe: full volume 250l; it dispenses the sample into the flow cell.

4.1.5 Valves

Fluidic valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; controls the fluidic or air flow
direction.

Pinch valve: turns on and off by electromagnetic force; starts/stops the fluidic flow.

Pressure switch: monitors the pressure of the DIFF channel.

4.1.6 Baths

WBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The WBC sample mixes and
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of HGB and WBC.

RBC bath: consists of a front bath, back bath and aperture. The RBC sample mixes and
4-1

Fluidic System
reacts here and it is used for the measurement of RBC/PLT.

DIFF bath: DIFF sample mixes and reacts here.

Vacuum chamber: creates and stores stable vacuum for counting the WBC and RBC by
impedance method; cleans the back bath and empties the volumetric tube.

Pressure chamber: creates and stores stable pressure to generate bubbles for the baths.

WBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference

RBC isolation chamber: provides air buffer to isolate outside interference

4.1.7 Volumetric tube

WBC volumetric tube: volume 500ul; it measures the volume of the WBC sample

RBC volumetric tube: volume 300ul; it measures the volume of the RBC sample

4.1.8 Filters

Filter of WBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the WBC volumetric tube

Filter of RBC volumetric tube: it filters the air entered the RBC volumetric tube

P1 filter: it filters the air entered the air pump.

4-2

Fluidic System

4.2 Fluidic System


4.2.1 Reagent volume required

Sample analysis for a single sample each time

2 analysis modes: Open vial-whole blood mode and open vial-predilute mode.
Table 4-1 Reagent volume required when running samples
Reagents

Name

M-50 Diluent
M-53 Lyse

Volume of single analysis


CBC+DIFF

CBC

M-53D Diluent

45mL

34mL

M-53LEO(I) Lyse

1.1ml

M-53LEO(II) Lyse

0.135ml

M-53LH Lyse

0.5ml

Normal startup function (excluding background)

Reagents volume required:


Table 4-2 Reagents volume required when starting up normally
Reagents

Name

Volume of normal startup

M-50 Diluent

M-53D Diluent

89ml

M-53LEO(I) Lyse

M-53LEO(II) Lyse

M-53LH Lyse

2ml

M-53 Cleanser

M-53 Lyse
Cleanser

Abnormal startup function (excluding background)

Reagents volume required:


Table 4-3 reagents volume required when starting up abnormally
Reagents

Name

Volume of abnormal startup

M-50 Diluent

M-53D Diluent

172ml

M-53LEO(I) Lyse

M-53LEO(II) Lyse

M-53LH Lyse

2ml

M-53 Cleanser

M-53 Lyse
Cleanser

Starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to Ship procedure has be done)(excluding
startup background)

Reagents volume required:


4-3

Fluidic System
Table 4-4 reagents volume required for starting up a drained system (after the Prepare to
Ship procedure has been done)
Volume of starting up a
Reagents

drained system (after the

Name

prepare to ship procedure


has been done)

M-50 Diluent
M-53 Lyse
Cleanser

M-53D Diluent

207ml

M-53LEO(I) Lyse

12ml

M-53LEO(II) Lyse

12ml

M-53LH Lyse

12ml

M-53 Cleanser

8ml

Normal shutdown function

Reagents volume required:


Table 4-5 reagents volume required when normally shutting down
Reagents

Name

Volume of normal shutdown

M-50 Diluent

M-53D Diluent

53ml

M-53LEO(I) Lyse

M-53LEO(II) Lyse

M-53LH Lyse

M-53 Cleanser

29ml

M-53 Lyse
Cleanser

4-4

Fluidic System

4.2.2 Fluidic System Drawing

Figure 4-1 Fluidic system (Whole Blood Mode)

Figure 4-2 Fluidic system (Predilute Mode)

4-5

Fluidic System

4.2.3 WBC Measurement Procedures

WBC Count/BASO channel

The reagents used include:

M-53LH Lyse: it lyses erythrocytes and platelets and separates basophiles from other WBCs.
Diluent: it is used for cleaning and provides the environment for reaction and measurement.

Principles: Electrical Impedance Method

Parameters: WBC, BASO# and BASO%

Diagrams: WBC histogram

Dilute ratio: 1:500

Metering volume: 500

Function description: 6l blood sample, 2.5ml diluent and 0.5ml LH Lyse are mixed in the
bath, and then they react. After reaction, the sample flows to the back bath via the
aperture, driven by the vacuum, and the blood cells are counted when passing through
the aperture. The volume of the sample is measured by the volumetric tube.

DIFF channel

The reagents used include:

LEO (I) and LEO (II): they lyse RBCs and differentiate WBCs into 4 sub-populations.
Diluent: cleans the fluidic system and provides sheath.

Principles: flow cytometry and semiconductor laser scatter

Parameters: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS# and


EOS%

Diagrams: 4-DIFF scattergram

Dilute ratio: 1:138

Metering volume: 127l

Function description: 0.6ml Leo (I) is dispensed into the bath as the initial volume, and
then 9l blood sample and 0.6ml Leo (I) are dispensed. After the sample is well mixed and
reacts with the reagent for a while, 0.135ml Leo (II) is dispensed. After the sample reacts
with the reagents for a while, the sample is driven to the bottom of the flow cell and the
sheath flow is enabled. Then the sample is dispensed into the flow cell by the sample
syringe for measurement.

4.2.4 RBC/PLT Measurement Procedures

4-6

Fluidic System

RBC/PLT channel

The reagents used include:

Diluent: dilutes samples, washes, provides a conductive environment and processes the cells

Principles: Electrical Impedance Method

Parameters: RBC and PLT

Diagrams: RBC histogram and PLT histogram

Dilute ratio: 1:20000

Metering volume: 300l

Function description: 52.08l sample dilution (1:417.7) is aspirated by the sample probe
from the WBC bath. The sample probe then moves to the RBC bath and mixes the
sample with 2.5ml diluent to dilute the sample to the ratio of 1:20000. Then, the mixed
sample is driven into the back bath through the aperture by the vacuum, and the blood
cells are counted when passing through the aperture. The volume of the sample is
measured by the volumetric tube.

4.2.5 HGB Measurement Procedures


HGB channel

The reagents used include:

Diluent: dilutes samples and washes


LH lyse: lyses the red blood cells and combines the hemoglobin

Principles: Colorimetry

Parameters: HGB

Dilute ratio: 1:500

The HGB unit calculates the concentration of HGB by comparing the light passing through
the sample with the blank reference reading.

4-7

Fluidic System

4.3 Sequence

of

Whole

Blood

CBC+DIFF

Measurement
4.3.1 Sampling and dispensing procedures
A.

Aspirating samples and dispensing samples into the DIFF bath

20l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe from the sample tube, and then the
sample probe ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the DIFF bath.
The sample probe descends into the DIFF bath and dispenses 9l sample.
B.

First Diluting

The sample probe ascends from the DIFF bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath, and then dispenses 6l sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the 2.5ml diluent that is already there to form the 1:417.7
dilution.
C.

Cleaning the residual sample

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses diluent into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the residual
sample.
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
D.

RBC second diluting

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample. The
dispensed sample is diluted by the diluent that is already in the bath to form the 1:20000
dilution.
E.

Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath, meanwhile the probe exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe returns to the home position.

4-8

Fluidic System

E
Figure 4-3 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

4-9

Fluidic System

4.3.2 DIFF Channel


Cleaning the reaction bath before dispensing samples0 - 6s
During this period:
The DIFF bath is drained. Then, 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath and then
the bath is drained again. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate the diluent.
1. During 0-1.5s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
2. During 2.8-3.8s, valve 05 is energized and the lyse syringe dispenses 0.6ml LEO (I) Lyse
into the DIFF bath to clean it.
3. During 4.5-6s, valve V38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath
and then the DIFF bath is ready to receive sample.
4. Valve 39 is pinched. The sheath syringe and sample syringe aspirate diluent respectively.

Sample dispensing, mixing and DIFF sample preparation (6-19.8s)


During this period:
1. Dispensing LEO (I) Lyse for the first time: valve V05 is energized and 1.1ml pre-heated
LEO (I) Lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml lyse syringe.
2. Sample dispensing and mixing: The 100ul aspiration syringe dispenses 9ul sample into
the DIFF bath.
3. Mixing by bubbling: valve V09 is energized to mix the sample with the LEO(I) lyse by
bubbling.
4. Dispensing LEO (II) Lyse: valve V06 is energized and 0.135ml pre-heated LEO (II) Lyse is
dispensed into the DIFF bath via the 2.5ml Lyse syringe.
5. Mixing sample by bubbling: valve 09 is energized to mix the sample by bubbling.
6. DIFF sample preparation: valve V39 is de-energized to open the path between the DIFF
bath and the syringe. Valve 22 is energized and valve 23 keeps de-energized. The
sheath syringe aspirates 1.2ml sample from the DIFF bath.
When the sample preparation is done, the status of the fluidic system of the DIFF unit is shown
in Figure 4-4. The tubing highlighted in red is the part that holds the sample.

The sheath flow of the DIFF channel and the measurement (19.8-40.5s)
During this period:
1. Sheath fluid forming: V23 and V24 are energized. The sheath syringe dispenses the
diluent into the flow cell at a certain speed to form the sheath.
2. Dispensing the sample at a high speed: The sample syringe dispenses the sample into the
flow cell at a high speed.
3. Measurement: when the sample fluid is stable, the sample syringe dispenses the sample
4-10

Fluidic System
into the flow cell at a low speed while the sheath syringe dispenses the diluent into the flow
cell to surround the sample. Thus, the sheath flow passes through the flow cell at a stable
speed for measurement.
The fluidic system status of this period is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 Fluidic status of DIFF channel sample preparation

4-11

Fluidic System

Figure 4-5 Fluidic status of DIFF channel measurement

Cleaning of DIFF channel (40.5-59s)


During this period:
1. The sample surrounded by the sheath passes through the flow cell. Then, the flow cell and
the sample probe are washed.
2. Cleaning the sample preparation tubing: valve V22 are energized and valve V23 and V24
keep energized. The sheath syringe dispenses diluent to clean the sample preparation
tubing. Meanwhile, valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF
bath.
3. Cleaning the DIFF bath
a. Dispensing 1.7ml diluent for cleaning: the sheath syringe dispenses 1.7ml diluent into
the DIFF bath through V21 and V22 to clean the bath.
b. Draining: valve 38 is energized and waste pump 2 operates to drain the DIFF bath.
Meanwhile, the sheath syringe aspirates 1.5ml diluent.
c.

Dispensing 1.5ml diluent for soaking: valve V22, V23 and V24 are energized. The
sheath syringe dispenses 1.5ml diluent to soak the DIFF bath.

4-12

Fluidic System

4.3.3 WBC/HGB Channel


HGB background, cleaning, draining volumetric tube and sample
distribution (0-18.2s)
1. 5s HGB background test.
2. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the volumetric tube and cleaning the back
bath is provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, the waste pump is needed to create the
vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
3. Zapping and cleaning the back bath.
4. Draining the WBC bath: valve V36 is energized and waste pump 3 operates to drain the
WBC bath.
5. Draining the WBC volumetric tube: valve V25 and V31 are energized to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.

Figure 4-6 Fluidic status when draining WBC volumetric tube

6. WBC sample distribution:


a. At 9.4s, valve V02, V03 are energized; and at 9s, V27is energized and the waste
pump operates. The sample probe ascends while the diluent syringe dispenses the
diluent to clean the exterior of the sample probe.
b. Dispensing initial volume and sample probe moving to the WBC bath: valve V03 is
energized. The 10ml diluent syringe dispenses a small portion of the diluent into the
WBC bath as the initial volume. The sample probe moves to the WBC bath, and then
descends into the WBC bath.
c.

Dispensing the blood sample: the aspiration syringe dispenses 6 l sample into the
WBC bath while mixing the sample by bubbling.

4-13

Fluidic System

Dispensing lyse and mixing (18.3-25s)


1. The sample probe ascending: the sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile
its exterior is washed.
2. Dispensing HGB lyse and mixing: valve V07 is energized. The 2.5ml lyse syringe
dispenses the LH Lyse into the WBC bath and the samples mixes with the lyse by bubbling.
The system waits for the sample becoming stable.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)


Vacuum is the power that drives the fluid movement. Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the
vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between -300HPa and -260HPa.

Counting and bath cleaning


1. WBC counting: valve V33 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
-300 to -260 HPa, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in Figure 4-7. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent volume
that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube..
2. HGB measurement: HGB measurement starts at 41s.
3. Cleaning the front bath twice.
4. Cleaning the back bath: valve V29 and V31 are energized. Driven by the vacuum, the
diluent enters the volumetric tube via valve V29, and then passes through valve V31 and
enters the vacuum chamber. Then, valve V31, V33 and V13 are energized. The diluent
flows into the back bath through the volumetric tube to drain the waste in the back bath.
Driven by waste pump 2, the waste in the vacuum chamber is drained through V37.

Figure 4-7 Fluidic status when WBC counting

4-14

Fluidic System

Fi
gure 4-8 Fluidic status when cleaning the WBC back bath

4.3.4 RBC/PLT Channel


Cleaning, volumetric tube draining (0-18.2s)
1. Creating vacuum: the vacuum used for draining the RBC volumetric tube and cleaning the
back bath is all provided by the vacuum chamber. Thus, waste pump P2 is used to create
the vacuum in the vacuum chamber.
2. Zapping and cleaning the back bath: zap the RBC aperture, and then open V30, V34 and
V14 to clean the back bath and drain the bubbles caused by zapping.
3. Draining the RBC bath and volumetric tube: valve V35 is energized and waste pump P3
operates to drain the RBC bath. Then, V26 and V32 are energized together to drain the
volumetric tube for three times.
4. First dilution and aspiration: during 0-8.7s, the sample probe finishes sampling and sample
is dispensed into the DIFF bath. Thus, the first dilution is formed during the 8.8-20.5s
period and then a portion of the diluted sample is aspirated back into the sample probe.

4-15

Fluidic System

Figure 4-9 Fluidic status when draining RBC volumetric tube

Second diluting and mixing (18.4-25s)


1. Aspirating the first dilution: the aspiration syringe aspirates the sample diluted at the ratio
of 1:417.6 from the WBC bath, and then ascends while its exterior is being cleaned.
2. Sample probe moving to RBC bath and dispensing initial volume and the sample: the
sample probe moves to the RBC bath. Valve V03 and V08 are energized at the same time,
and the diluent syringe dispenses a certain amount of diluent into the RBC bath and then
the sample probe descends into the RBC bath. Valve V01 and V03 are energized and the
10ml diluent syringe dispenses the first dilution into the RBC bath to form the second
dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
3. Mixing: Valve V11 is energized. Driven by the pressure, the sample is mixed by bubbling
for three times.

Creating vacuum (18.1-25s)


The stable vacuum is created to drive the fluidics when running samples.
Waste pump 2 pumps out the air in the vacuum chamber to create the vacuum between
-300HP and -260HP.

Counting and bath cleaning


The fluidic status of RBC counting is shown in Figure 4-10.
1. RBC counting: valve V34 is energized to start counting. Driven by the stable vacuum
4-16

Fluidic System
-300 to -260 HP, the sample in the front bath flows to the back bath in the direction
shown in the following figure. The sample volume measured is determined by the diluent
volume that flows between the two photocouplers of the WBC volumetric tube.

Figure 4-10 Fluidic status of RBC counting

Figure 4-11 Fluidic status when cleaning the back bath and draining the front bath

2. Draining the front bath and cleaning: Valve V35 is energized and waste pump pumps the
remaining sample out of the RBC bath. The diluent syringe dispenses 3ml diluent into the
RBC bath for soaking.
4-17

Fluidic System
3. Cleaning the back bath: The vacuum of -400 to -300HP is created in the vacuum chamber.
Valve V30 and V32 are energized. The volumetric tube is cleaned and bubbles are
discharged from the top of the volumetric tube. Vale V32, V14, V34 and V30 are energized
to clean the back bath, and then the waste is discharged.

4.3.5 Sequence of Predilute Mode CBC+DIFF Measurement


In the predilute mode, the sample needs to be first manually diluted at the ratio of 1:10. The
sequence inside the analyzer has no great difference with the whole blood mode.

4.3.6 Sequence of CBC Measurement


In the CBC mode, the DIFF channel is not used and the sample dispensing procedures are
also changed.

Sampling and sample dispensing procedures of CBC Mode

A.

Aspirating sample and dispensing sample into the WBC bath

15l sample is aspirated by the aspiration syringe, and then the sample probe ascends
meanwhile its exterior is cleaned and the sample probe dispenses 3l sample into the probe
wipe.
The sample probe moves to above the WBC bath
The sample probe descends into the WBC bath and dispenses 6l sample into the WBC
bath.
B.

Cleaning the sample remains

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath, meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe dispenses cleanser into the probe wipe from the top to wash off the
residual sample..
The sample probe descends again into the WBC bath and aspirates the diluted sample.
C.

RBC second dilution

The sample probe ascends from the WBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
The sample probe moves to above the RBC bath.
The sample probe descends into the RBC bath, and then dispenses 1ml diluted sample into
RBC bath, where the sample is further diluted by the diluent that is already there to form the
second dilution at the ratio of 1:20000.
D.

Sample probe returning to home position

The sample probe ascends from the RBC bath meanwhile its exterior is cleaned.
4-18

Fluidic System
The sample probe returns to the home position.

Figure 4-12 Dispensing procedures of sample probe

4-19

Hardware System

The BC-5380 hardware system consists of the boards, power execution parts, sensors,
switches and cables. Their relationship is shown below.

Sample
drive
motors

Syringe
drive
motors

Heater
for optics
system
And
Temp.
sensors

Heater
for Diff
pool and
temp.
sensors

Ambie
nce
temp.
sensor

BC-5380
Hardware System

NetPort
Fan
Sensor on right door
Vavles and
pumps

Sensor on optics system

Volume mesure
board and press
sensors

Laser
board

Liquid level
sensor

SS
Pre-amp
board

Mother
Board

Jam drive motor

Feed drive motor

Auto-sample
board

FS
Pre-amp
board

Optics couple
sensor
Door driver

Key
Board
WBC Pole

Indication
Board

AC Power
Switch

Data Board
RBC Pole

Power
Supply
Board

Drive Board

HGB Module

Figure 5-1 BC-5380 hardware system structure

Note:
In the figure, the thin arrows represent the cable connections; the thick arrows (connecting the
data board and the driver board) represent the plugboard connections; the square boxes
5-1

Hardware System
represent the boards and the ellipses represent the components.
The boards of the BC-5380 and their functions are shown in the table below.
Table 5-1 Boards of the BC-5380 and their functions
No.
1

Name
Data board

Functions
CPU basic system + FPGA + A/D + Analog
channel

Drive board

MCU+FPGA+ Valves and pumps driving +


Photocoupler detecting + Temperature and
pressure monitoring

Mother board

Power distribution and centralized wiring.


Plugboard supported

Laser control board

Laser creating and controlling

FS

Collecting and pre-amplifying the low-angle

pre-amplification

board
6
7

SS

scattered light
pre-amplification

Collecting and pre-amplifying the high-angle

board

scattered light

Volumetric board

Creating the volumetric signals of RBC and


WBC channels; the vacuum and pressure
sensors and amplifying the detected signals

Indicator board

Buzzer and indicator

Power board

Supply D5V,P12V,P24V,A12V power


Supply AC120V/50Hz zapping power

10

Liquid-level board

Liquid-level detection of reagents

11

Autoloader board

Sample

transport,

mix

electromagnetic valve control


12

Key board

[RUN] key and [OPEN] key

5-2

control,

Hardware System

5.1 Mother board


5.1.1 Introduction
The function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring of board
input/output.

5.1.2 Board Composition


The mother board is composed of two slots and several connectors. The two slots are for
connecting the data board and the drive board respectively; while the connectors are for
various input/output signals.

Function

Power interface

Slot for data board

Slot for drive board

Connectors for board signals (autoloader board, laser control board, pre-amp board,
volumetric board, liquid level checker, key board and indicator board, etc.)

Connectors for component (valves, pumps, motors, heaters, fan, HGB module,
independent key, optics, etc.) signals

Communication interface (COM port and LAN port)

Block diagram

5-3

Hardware System

DB9(rs23
2)

RJ45

rs232 int.
driver

Isolate
transfoemer

Socket for suck key


and right door chec
ker

Socket for Indicator


and key board

Power filter
& indicator

Socket for laser


control board

Data borad power

Socket for valume


mesure and press
control board

Socktes for Data


Board

Sockets for pre-amp.


board
Socket for HGB
module

Sockets
for
Power
Supply

RS422 int
driver

Drive boatd power

Socket for Autosample

Sockets for
vavles,pumps,motors,heat
ers

Sockets for Drive


Board

Sockets for
optics sensor

Socket for fan

Socket
for
power( Autosa
mple board)

Socket for
Temp. sensor

Socket for
Liq.level
checker

Figure 5-2 Function of mother board

Interface definition

List of connectors
Table 5-2 List of connectors
SN.

PIN Number

Function Description

PA1

96

Data board connector, digital signals

PA2

96

Data board connector, analog signals

PB1

96

Drive board connector, digital signals and part of optics signals

PB2

96

Drive board connector, part of optics signals and motor drive

5-4

Hardware System
signals
PB3

96

Drive board connector, drive signals of motors, valves, pumps,


and heaters

J1

RS-232 LAN port

J2

Reserved for COM port debugging

J3

10

Multi-functional JTAG port, debugging or upgrading MCU


programs of autoloader board

J4

RS-422 COM port, COM port of autoloader board

J5

Connector for the key board and indicator board

J6

Right door switch, and optical shielding box switch

J7

Laser control board connector

J8

Reserved for side fluorescence channel (SF)

J9

side scatter channel (SS)

J10

Connector for forward scatter channel (FS)

J11

HGB module connector

J12

A+/- 12V connector

J13

AC120V connector

J14

Temperature sensor connector

J15

12

Volumetric board connector

J16

34

Connector for level sensors and associated photocouplers

J17

No in use

J18

24

Connector for photocouplers 1-6

J19

24

Connector photocouplers 7-12

J20

24

Connector photocouplers 13-18

J21

Reserved for DC mix motor

J22

Connector stepping motors 1-2

J23

Connector stepping motors 3-4

J24

Connector stepping motors 5-6

J25

Connector stepping motors 7-8

J26

No in use

J27

Connector for heater 2

J28

Connector for heater 1

J29

20

Connector for pumps 1-7

J30

20

Connector for valves 1-10

J31

20

Connector for valves 11-20

J32

20

Connector for valves 21-30

J33

20

Connector for valves 31-40

J34

Fan connector

J35

10

Connector for P12V and P24V


5-5

Hardware System

J36

Connector for autoloader board power

J37

D+5V connector

Data board slots (PA1 and PA2)

Data board slots are two 96pin DIN 41612 connectors.


Connector type: AMP VME female connector

3*32PIN vertical connection

Model: 5535043-4
Table 5-3 Definition of PA1 for mother board
Column A

Column B

Column C

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

10

DGND

DGND

DGND

11

DGND

DGND

DGND

12

TP_TX+

PWFBOUT

TP_RX+

13

TP_TX-

DGND

TP_RX-

14

DGND

DGND

DGND

15

DGND

DGND

DGND

16

TMS_TO_DRV

TMS_TO_AS

UART3_TO_PC

17

TCK_TO_DRV

TCK_TO_AS

UART3_TO_DAT

18

DATA_TO_DRV

DATA_TO_AS

DGND

19

DATA_FROM_DRV

DATA_FROM_AS

DGND

20

DGND

UART1_TO_DAT+

UART1_TO_AS+

21

DGND

UART1_TO_DAT-

UART1_TO_AS-

22

UART0_TO_DRV

DGND

DGND

23

UART0_TO_DAT

DGND

DGND

24

DGND

DGND

#SUCK_KEY

25

DGND

#VM_ON

DGND

26

DGND

#RBC_START

#BUZ

27

DGND

#RBC_STOP

#COUNT_KEY

28

DGND

#WBC_START

FAULT

29

DGND

#WBC_STOP

READY

5-6

Hardware System
30

DGND

DGND

OPTI_DOOR

31

DGND

#LASER_ON

#RIGHT_DOOR

32

DGND

DGND

#INSERT_DOOR

Table 5-4 Definition of PA2 for mother board


Column A

Column B

Column C

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

LASER_CURT

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

AGND

10

AGND

AGND

AGND

11

AGND

NC

AGND

12

AGND

AGND

A GND

13

AGND

SS

AGND

14

AGND

AGND

AGND

15

AGND

FS

AGND

16

AGND

AGND

AGND

17

AGND

HGB_IN

AGND

18

AGND

AGND

AGND

19

AGND

HGB+

AGND

20

AGND

HGB-

AGND

21

AGND

A-12V

A-12V

22

AGND

A-12V

A-12V

23

AGND

A+12V

A+12V

24

AGND

A+12V

A+12V

25

AGND

A+12V

A+12V

26

NC

NC

NC

27

NC

A+70V

NC

28

NC

NC

NC

29

NC

NC

NC

30

NC

AC120_B

NC

31

NC

NC

NC

32

AC120_A

NC

NC

5-7

Hardware System

Connector J1 for LAN port

Connector type: RJ-45 female connector with iron casing


Model: 5406217-1
Table 5-5 Definition of J1 for mother board
Definition

Description

ET_TP+

Transmit, positive

ET_TP-

Transmit, negative

ET_RP+

Receive, positive

ET-NGP

Receive, virtual ground

ET-NGP

Receive, virtual ground

ET_RP-

Receive, negative

ET-NGR

Receive, virtual ground

ET-NGR

Receive, virtual ground

Connector J2 for COM port

Connector type: DB9 male / female connector


Table 5-6 Definition of J2 for mother board (male connector)
Pin

Definition

Description

NC

RXD/TXD

Send/receive

TXD/RXD

Receive/send

NC

GND

6-9

NC

Table 5-7 Definition of J2 for mother board (female connector)


Pin

Definition

Description

GND

NC

TXD/RXD

Send/receive

RXD/TXD

Receive/send

5-9

NC

Connector J3 for JTAG

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP2*5 TOP 70246SERIES


Model: 70246-1001, MOLEX

5-8

Hardware System
Table 5-8 Definition of J3 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

D3V3

GND

GND

TCK

JTAG clock

TMS

JTAG status select

DATA_FROM_AS

JTAG data to data board

DATA_TO_AS

JTAG data to drive board

NC

GND

10

NC

Connector J6 for aspirate key and door switch on/off checking

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*6SIDE PHSERIES


Model: B6B-PH-K 2MM 'JST'
Table 5-9 Definition of J6 for mother board
Pin

Definition

#SUCK_KEY

GND

#RIGHT_DOOR

GND

OPTI_DOOR

GND

Description
NC
Right door switch on/off
optical shielding box switch

Connector J4 for autoloader board signal

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*4SIDE PHSERIES


Model: B4B-PH-K 'JST'
Table 5-10 Definition of J4 for mother board
Pin
1

Definition
UART2_TO_AS+

Description
5474 serial port 2 to positive end of
sample board data

UART2_TO_AS-

5474 serial port 2 to negative end of


sample board data

UART2_TO_DAT+

sample board serial port to positive


end of 5474 serial port data

UART2_TO_DAT-

sample board serial port to negative


end of 5474 serial port data
5-9

Hardware System

Connector J5 for indicator board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*8

TOP PHSERIES

Model: B8B-PH-K 'JST' 2MM


Table 5-11 Definition of J5 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

D+5V

#COUNT_KEY

Start sampling switch, effective low

#INSERT_DOOR

Insert STAT switch, effective low

FAULT

Fault status indicator light, effective high

READY

Ready status indicator light, effective high

NC

#BUZ

GND

Buzzer driven

Connector J7 for laser board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6SIDE XHSERIES


Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'
Table 5-12 Definition of J7 for mother board
Pin

Definition

NC

AGND

LASER_CURT

A+12V

#LASER_ON

D+5V

Description

Laser current feedback, analog signal


Laser source on/off signal, effective low

Connector J9 and J10 for pre-amplification board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*8SIDE XHSERIES


Model: B8B-XH-K 'JST'

5-10

Hardware System
Table 5-13 Definition of J9, J10 for mother board
Pin

Definition

AGND

FS/SS

AGND

AGND

A-12V

AGND

A+12V

MHOLE

Description
FS/SS signal input, analog signal

Connecting inner shield of cable


Connecting external shield of cable

Connector J11 for HGB module

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*5SIDE PHSERIES


Model: B5B-PH-K 'JST'
Table 5-14 Definition of J11 for mother board
Pin
1

Definition
HGB+

Description
HGB

light

drive,

light

drive,

positive
2

HGB-

HGB
negative

HGB_IN

AGND

AGND

HGB feedback

Connector J12 for analog A12V

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*4 SIDE, 5566 serial


Model: 1-794509-1 'JST'
Table 5-15 Definition of J12 for mother board
Pin

Definition

AGND

NC

NC

NC

A+12V

AGND

AGND

A-12V

Connector J13 for AC120V


5-11

Description

Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*3 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-3B-XH-A 'JST' 2.5MM
Table 5-16 Definition of J13 for mother board
Pin

Definition

AC120V_A

NC

AC120V_B

Description
A end of 120V AC
B end of 120V AC

Drive board slots: PB1, PB2 and PB3

DIN41612, 96PIN female


Definition of PB1-PB3 signals:
Note: On the mother board, PB1 is placed laterally, with column A under it, and row 1 at left
side. Since the drive board and mother board is connected vertically, column A should be
arranged at the nearest joint side of board.
Table 5-17 Definition of PB1 for mother board
column A

column B

column C

HT1_SA

HT1_SB

AMBI_SA

HT2_SA

HT2_SB

AMBI_SB

POSI_PRESS

NEGA_PRESS

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND

10

DGND

DGND

DGND

11

DGND

DGND

DGND

12

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

13

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

14

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

15

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

16

D+5V

D+5V

D+5V

17

DGND

DGND

DGND

18

#LIQ1

#LIQ2

TMS_TO_DRV

19

#LIQ3

#LIQ4

TCK_TO_DRV

20

#LIQ5

#LIQ6

DATA_TO_DRV

21

#LYSE_SENSOR

#WASTE_SENSOR

DATA_FROM_DRV

22

#LS_ON

DGND

DGND

5-12

Hardware System
23

DGND

DGND

DGND

24

OP17_CTRL

OP17_STS

UART0_TO_DRV

25

OP18_CTRL

OP18_STS

UART0_TO_DAT

26

OP19_CTRL

OP19_STS

DGND

27

OP20_CTRL

OP20_STS

DGND

28

OP1_CTRL

OP1_STS

OP2_CTRL

29

OP2_STS

OP3_CTRL

OP3_STS

30

OP4_CTRL

OP4_STS

OP5_CTRL

31

OP5_STS

OP6_CTRL

OP6_STS

32

OP7_CTRL

OP7_STS

OP8_CTRL

Table 5-18 Definition of PB2 for mother board


column A

column B

column C

OP8_STS

OP9_CTRL

OP9_STS

OP10_CTRL

OP10_STS

OP11_CTRL

OP11_STS

OP12_CTRL

OP12_STS

OP13_CTRL

OP13_STS

OP14_CTRL

OP14_STS

OP15_CTRL

OP15_STS

OP16_CTRL

OP16_STS

DM_ON

DGND

DGND

DGND

NC

NC

NC

P+24V

SM1_AP

SM1_AP

10

P+24V

SM1_AN

SM1_AN

11

P+24V

SM1_BP

SM1_BP

12

P+24V

SM1_BN

SM1_BN

13

P+24V

SM2_AP

SM2_AP

14

P+24V

SM2_AN

SM2_AN

15

P+24V

SM2_BP

SM2_BP

16

P+24V

SM2_BN

SM2_BN

17

P+24V

SM3_AP

SM3_AP

18

P+24V

SM3_AN

SM3_AN

19

P+24V

SM3_BP

SM3_BP

20

P+24V

SM3_BN

SM3_BN

21

P+24V

SM4_AP

SM4_AP

22

P+24V

SM4_AN

SM4_AN

23

P+24V

SM4_BP

SM4_BP

24

P+24V

SM4_BN

SM4_BN

25

PGND

SM5_AP

SM5_AP

5-13

Hardware System
26

PGND

SM5_AN

SM5_AN

27

PGND

SM5_BP

SM5_BP

28

PGND

SM5_BN

SM5_BN

29

PGND

SM6_AP

SM6_AP

30

PGND

SM6_AN

SM6_AN

31

PGND

SM6_BP

SM6_BP

32

PGND

SM6_BN

SM6_BN

Table 5-19 Definition of PB3 for mother board


column A

column B

column C

PGND

SM7_AP

SM7_AP

PGND

SM7_AN

SM7_AN

PGND

SM7_BP

SM7_BP

PGND

SM7_BN

SM7_BN

PGND

SM8_AP

SM8_AP

PGND

SM8_AN

SM8_AN

PGND

SM8_BP

SM8_BP

PGND

SM8_BN

SM8_BN

PGND

HT1_ON

HT1_ON

10

PGND

HT2_ON

HT2_ON

11

PGND

PGND

PGND

12

PGND

PUMP7

PUMP7

13

PGND

PUMP6

PUMP6

14

P+12V

PUMP5

PUMP5

15

P+12V

PUMP4

PUMP4

16

P+12V

PUMP3

PUMP3

17

P+12V

PUMP2

PUMP2

18

P+12V

PUMP1

PUMP1

19

V1

V2

V3

20

V4

V5

V6

21

V7

V8

V9

22

V10

V11

V12

23

V13

V14

V15

24

V16

V17

V18

25

V19

V20

V21

26

V22

V23

V24

27

V25

V26

V27

28

V28

V29

V30

5-14

Hardware System

29

V31

V32

V33

30

V34

V35

V36

31

V37

V38

V39

32

V40

NC

NC

Connector J14 for temperature sensor

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*6 TOP XHSERIES


Model: B-6B-XH-A 'JST'
Table 5-20 Definition of J14 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

HT1_SA

both ends of thermistor of heater

HT1_SB

HT2_SA

both ends of thermistor of heater

HT2_SB

AMBI_SA

both

AMBI_SB

environment temperature

ends

of

thermistor

of

Connector J15 for sensors of volumetric board and pressure control board

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*12 TOP PHSERIES


Model: SIP12TD-B12B-PH-K 'JST'
Table 5-21 Definition of J15 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

P+12V

PGND

DGND

POSI_PRESS

Pressure chamber (pressure) signal

NEGA_PRESS

Vacuum chamber (vacuum) signal

DGND

#VM_ON

Volumetric optics is on, effective low

#RBC_START

RBC volume measurement starts, effective low

#RBC_STOP

RBC volume measurement stops, effective low

10

#WBC_START

WBC volume measurement starts, effective low

11

#WBC_STOP

WBC volume measurement stops, effective low

12

D+5V

Connector J16 for liquid level sensor

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*17 TOP


Model: B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 'JST'

5-15

Hardware System
Table 5-22 Definition of J16 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

D+5V

#LIQ1

LIQ1status, effective low

#LIQ2

LIQ 2 status, effective low

#LIQ3

LIQ 3 status, effective low

#LIQ4

LIQ 4 status, effective low

#LIQ5

LIQ 5 status, effective low

#LS_ON

Control signal for liquid level board

GND

NC

10

NC

11

#LIQ6

12

GND

13

#LYSE_SENSOR

14

GND

15

#WASTE_SENSOR

16

GND

17

NC

18

NC

19

OP17_CTRL

Optics 17 control

20

OP17_STS

Optics 17 status

21

GND

22

GND

23

OP18_CTRL

Optics 18 control

24

OP18_STS

Optics 18 status

25

GND

26

GND

27

OP19_CTRL

Optics 19 control

28

OP19_STS

Optics 19 status

29

GND

30

GND

31

OP20_CTRL

Optics 20 control

32

OP20_STS

Optics 20 status

33

GND

34

GND

LIQ 6 status, effective low


LYSE level sensor, status, i, effective low
Waste level sensor status, effective low

Connector J18, J19, J20 for optics of position sensor

Position sensor has three connectors, all using double-row and 2mm connectors.
5-16

Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.0MM DIP2*12 TOP
Model: B24B-PHDSS-B (LF) (SN) 'JST'
Table 5-23 Definition of J18 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

OP1_CTRL

Optics 1 drive

OP1_STS

Optics 1 status

3,4

DGND

OP2_CTRL

Optics 2 drive

OP2_STS

Optics 2 status

7,8

DGND

OP3_CTRL

Optics 3 drive

10

OP3_STS

Optics 3 status

11,12

DGND

13

OP4_CTRL

Optics 4 control

14

OP4_STS

Optics 4 status

15,16

DGND

17

OP5_CTRL

Optics 5 drive

18

OP5_STS

Optics 5 status

19,20

DGND

21

OP6_CTRL

Optics 6 drive

22

OP6_STS

Optics 6 status

23,24

DGND

Table 5-24 Definition of J19 for mother board


Pin

Definition

Description

OP7_CTRL

Optics 7 drive

OP7_STS

Optics 7 status

3,4

DGND

OP8_CTRL

Optics 8 drive

OP8_STS

Optics 8 status

7,8

DGND

OP9_CTRL

Optics 9 drive

10

OP9_STS

Optics 9 status

11,12

DGND

13

OP10_CTRL

Optics 10 drive

14

OP10_STS

Optics 10 status

15,16

DGND

17

OP11_CTRL

Optics 11 drive
5-17

Hardware System
18

OP11_STS

Optics 11 status

19,20

DGND

21

OP12_CTRL

Optics 12 drive

22

OP12_STS

Optics 12 status

23,24

DGND

Table 5-25 Definition of J20 for mother board


Pin

Definition

Description

OP13_CTRL

Optics 13 drive

OP13_STS

Optics 13 status

3,4

DGND

OP14_CTRL

Optics 14 drive

OP14_STS

Optics 14 status

7,8

DGND

OP15_CTRL

Optics 15 drive

10

OP15_STS

Optics 15 status

11,12

DGND

13

OP16_CTRL

Optics 16

14

OP16_STS

Optics 16 status

15,16

DGND

17-24

NC

Connector J21 (reserved) for DC mix motor

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP1*3

TOP PHSERIES

Model: B3B-PH-K 'JST'


Table 5-26 Definition of J21 for mother board
Pin

Definition

DM_ON

NC

DGND

Description
DC Motor drive

Connector J22, J23, J24, J25 for stepping motors

Each connector connects two motors.


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.54MM DIP1*8 TOP XHSERIES
Model: B-8B-XH-A 'JST' 2.54MM

5-18

Hardware System
Table 5-27 Definition of J22 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

SM1_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 1

SM1_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 1

SM1-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 1

SM1_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 1

SM2_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 2

SM2_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 2

SM2-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 2

SM2_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 2

Table 5-28 Definition of J23 for mother board


Pin

Definition

Description

SM3_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 3

SM3_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 3

SM3-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 3

SM3_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 3

SM4_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 4

SM4_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 4

SM4-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 4

SM4_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 4

Table 5-29 Definition of J24 for mother board


Pin

Definition

Description

SM5_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 5

SM5_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 5

SM5-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 5

SM5-BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 5

SM6_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 6

SM6_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 6

SM6-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 6

SM6_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 6

5-19

Hardware System
Table 5-30 Definition of J25 for mother board
Pin

Definition

Description

SM7_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 7

SM7_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 7

SM7-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 7

SM7_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 7

SM8_AP

A-phase coil drive , motor 8

SM8_AN

A-phase coil drive , motor 8

SM8-BP

B-phase coil drive , motor 8

SM8_BN

B-phase coil drive , motor 8

Connector J27, J28 for heaters

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*4 TOP XHSERIES


Model: B-4B-XH-A 'JST'
Table 5-31 Definition of J27 for mother board
Pin

Definition

P+24V

HT1_ON

3,4

Description
Heater 1 drive
Heater 1 control

Table 5-32 Definition of J28 for mother board


Pin

Definition

P+24V

HT2_ON

3,4

Description
Heater 2 drive
Heater 2 control

Connector J29, J30, J31, J32, J33 for pumps and valves

Valves and pumps have five double-row PH-model connectors.


Connector type: HEADER WTB 2MM DIP2*10 TOP PHDSERIES
Model: B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
Table 5-33 Definition of J29 for mother board
Pin

Definition

1~6

NC

PUMP7

P+12V

PUMP6

10

P+12V

Description
Pump 7 drive
Pump 6 drive

5-20

Hardware System
11

PUMP5

12

P+12V

13

PUMP4

14

P+12V

15

PUMP3

16

P+12V

17

PUMP2

18

P+12V

19

PUMP1

20

P+12V

Pump 5 drive
Pump 4 drive
Pump 3 drive
Pump 2 drive
Pump 1 drive

Table 5-34 Definition of J30 for mother board


Pin

Definition

V1

P+12V

V2

P+12V

V3

P+12V

V4

P+12V

V5

10

P+12V

11

V6

12

P+12V

13

V7

14

P+12V

15

V8

16

P+12V

17

V9

18

P+12V

19

V10

20

P+12V

Description
Valve 1 drive
Valve 2 drive
Valve 3 drive
Valve 4 drive
Valve 5 drive
Valve 6 drive
Valve 7 drive
Valve 8 drive
Valve 9 drive
Valve 10 drive

Table 5-35 Definition of J31 for mother board


Pin

Definition

V11

P+12V

Description
Valve 11 drive

5-21

Hardware System
3

V12

P+12V

V13

P+12V

V14

P+12V

V15

10

P+12V

11

V16

12

P+12V

13

V17

14

P+12V

15

V18

16

P+12V

17

V19

18

P+12V

19

V20

20

P+12V

Valve 12 drive
Valve 13 drive
Valve 14 drive
Valve 15 drive
Valve 16 drive
Valve 17 drive
Valve 18 drive
Valve 19 drive
Valve 20 drive

Table 5-36 Definition of J32 for mother board


Pin

Definition

V21

P+12V

V22

P+12V

V23

P+12V

V24

P+12V

V25

10

P+12V

11

V26

12

P+12V

13

V27

14

P+12V

15

V28

16

P+12V

17

V29

Description
Valve 21 drive
Valve 22 drive
Valve 23 drive
Valve 24 drive
Valve 25 drive
Valve 26 drive
Valve 27 drive
Valve 28 drive
Valve 29 drive

5-22

Hardware System
18

P+12V

19

V30

20

P+12V

Valve 30 drive

Table 5-37 Definition of J33 for mother board


Pin

Definition

V31

P+12V

V32

P+12V

V33

P+12V

V34

P+12V

V35

10

P+12V

11

V36

12

P+12V

13

V37

14

P+12V

15

V38

16

P+12V

17

V39

18

P+12V

19

V40

20

P+12V

Description
Valve 31 drive
Valve 32 drive
Valve 33 drive
Valve 34 drive
Valve 35 drive
Valve 36 drive
Valve 37 drive
Valve 38 drive
Valve 39 drive
Valve 40 drive

Connector J37 for D+5V

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*2 TOP 5566SERIES


Model: 3928-1043
Table 5-38 Definition of J37 for mother board
Pin

Definition

D+5V

D+5V

DGND

DGND

Connector J35 for P+12V, P+24V


5-23

Hardware System
Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2X5 TOP 5566SERIES
Model: 39-31-0108
Table 5-39 Definition of J35 for mother board
Pin

Definition

P+24V

P+24V

P+24V

P+12V

P+12V

PGND

PGND

PGND

PGND

10

PGND

Connector J34 for fan power

Connector type: HEADER WTB 2.5MM DIP1*2 TOP XHSERIES


Model: B-2B-XH-A 'JST'
Table 5-40 Definition of J34 for mother board
Pin

Definition

P+12V

PGND

Connector J36 for power (autoloader board)

Connector type: HEADER WTB 4.2MM DIP2*3 TOP 5566SERIES


Model: 3928-1063
Table 5-41 Definition of J36 for mother board
Pin

Definition

D+5V

P+12V

P+24V

DGND

PGND

PGND

5-24

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-3 Assembly drawing of the mother board

5-25

Hardware System

5.1.3 Adjustment and Test Points


There are no test points designed specially for mother board. To test certain power or signal,
use the touch points of connectors directly.
On the mother board with the Debug Serial Communication Port (DSCP) configured, the
configuration of COM port is implemented by several connection matrices. See the following
introduction for connection method.
By adjusting JP1 to JP3, the J2 COM port can support the following 5 debugging modes (all via
PC COM port).
1. Data board COM 3: debugging the data board function
2. Data board COM 0: debugging the data boards function of controlling the drive board
3. Drive board COM: debugging the drive board function
4. Data board COM 1: debugging the data boards function of controlling the autoloader
board
5. Autoloader board COM: debugging the function of autoloader board
Notice: In case of functions 2 or 3 (4 and 5 are the same), do not connect the drive board and
the data board at the same time. Namely, in case of function 2, do not connect the drive board,
and in case of function 3, do not connect the data board.
JP1 and JP2 respectively connect UART1, 3, 0 to the input of the RS-232 transceiver. JP1 can
also be used for selecting the UART1 COM direction. JP2 connects interface signals of the
data board or the autoloader board to the RS-422 transceiver. (U2 in Figure 5-3)
See Table 5-42 for configuration details.
Table 5-42 Configuration details
Debugging COM port
Data board UART0

JP1

JP2

Put jumpers on pins 1-2 and

No jumpers

3-4,
Drive board COM

Put jumpers on

pins 5-6

No jumpers

and 7-8
Data board UART1

Put jumpers on pins 9-10

Put

and 11-12.

1-2,,3-4,,5-6, and,7-8..

Put jumpers on pins 9-10

Put

COM

and 11-12.

9-10,11-12,13-14,and 15-16.

Data board UART3

Put jumpers on pins 13-14

No jumpers.

Autoloader

board

jumpers
jumpers

on
on

pins
pins

and 15-16.
A male or female receptacle can be installed at J2. Four cable types can be supported, as
shown in the following table.

5-26

Hardware System
Table 5-43 COM port receptacle and cable selection
Connector

cable
Serial

DB9

male

cable

JP3

with

female

3-4, 7-8, 13-14, 15-16

connectors on both ends,

receptacle

signals not intercrossed

(straight or 90

Serial

installation)

connectors on both ends,

cable

with

female

3-4, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12

signals intercrossed; namely


the COM cable
Serial cable with a female
DB9

female

1-2, 5-6, 13-14, 15-16

connector on one end and a

receptacle

male connector on the other

(straight or 90

end, signals not intercross;

installation)

namely the COM extension


cable
Serial cable with a female

1-2, 5-6, 9-10, 11-12

connector on one end and a


male connector on the other
end, signals intercross
JP4 needs to be configured as shown in the following table when the MCU JTAG of the drive
board or the autoloader board is to be connected to J3.
Table 5-44 Connection matrix of multi-functional JTAG port
JTAG function
Connect MCU JTAG of

JP4
No jumpers

autoloader board
Connect MCU JTAG of

Put jumpers on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and

drive board

7-8.

Note: the mother board does not provide a fixed connection to the JTAG port of the autoloader
MCU. If you need to update the autoloader MCU on the analyzer, connect the J11 and J3
receptacles using the cable dedicated for autoloader update before updating on PC using the
client update software. The dedicated cable is provided to the service and manufacture
personnel, not as an accessory of the analyzer.

5-27

Hardware System

5.1.4 Removal
Purpose
The mother board is unlikely to be damaged. But in case you need to replace it, follow the
steps below.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the mother board:

To remove the mother board from the analyzer:

1. Power off the analyzer.


2. Unplug the power cable and the LAN cable from the back of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top cover and front cover of the analyzer
4. Remove the data board and the drive board.
5. Disconnect all cables from the mother board.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws
fixing the bracket.
7. Pull the bracket to remove it.

5-28

Hardware System

Figure 5-4 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-1


1 Bracket

2 Mother board

3 M4X8 panhead screw

To disassemble the mother board:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the fourteen M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws on the mother board.
2. Pull the mother board towards the panel by a certain distance, remove the LAN port
connector from the metal plate and take out the mother board.

Figure 5-5 Disassembly diagram of the mother board-2


1 Bracket

2 Mother board

3M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws


5-29

Hardware System

Installation
Install the mother board as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.
Note: Since the mother board has many connectors, pay attention to the number indicated on
the connector to avoid wrong connection. The design of the mother board has included certain
error-proof measures. Generally speaking, wrong connection will not lead to safety issues, yet
the whole unit cannot function properly

Verification
1. Power on the analyzer, the fan at the back of the analyzer should run normally. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage of D+5V, P+12V, P+24V, A+/-12V, AC120V, and all
measurements should be within normal ranges.
2. Power indicators of the boards are on, showing that the mother board is functioning
correctly.

5.1.5 Troubleshooting
Since the function of the mother board is to realize power distribution and centralized wiring, a
failure in the mother board usually takes the form of hardware system failure.
Table 5-45 Troubleshooting
Failure
Abnormal

Cause
voltage

detected

cable
connected

not

Recommended Action
properly

to

power

connector

Check connectors J12, J13, J35,


J37;
If the connection is normal, use a
multimeter to check if the voltage
of each power source indicated
on the mother board is correct.

Fan not running.

Fan damaged or no power

Check connector J34;

supply

Check the P12V indicator on the


drive board

Communication failure

Connector J4 abnormal..

Check connector J4

of autoloader board

Connector J36 abnormal..

Check connector J36

Pressure

Connector J15 abnormal

Check connector J15

Volumetric abnormal

Connector J15 abnormal

Check connector J15

Liquid level inspection

Connector J16 abnormal

Check connector J16

control

abnormal

5-30

Hardware System
abnormal, misinform
Laser not light or laser

Connector J17 abnormal

Check connector J7

Pre-amp board has no

Connectors J9 and J10

Check connectors J9 and J10

power

abnormal

current

detected

abnormal
or

work

abnormally.
Motor not active

Motor

drive

cable

not

properly connected .
Valve not active

Valve

drive

cable

and 25
not

properly connected.
Pump not active

Pump

drive

cable

Check connectors J22,J23,J24,


Check connectors J30,J31,J32
and J33

not

Check connector J29

not

Check connector J14

properly connected
Temperature
fails.

control

Temperature

sensor

properly connected.

5-31

Hardware System

5.2 Data board


5.2.1 Introduction
The data function of the data board consists of two aspects: analog part and digital part. The
analog part is responsible for obtaining, amplifying, and conditioning sensor signals and
converting the analog signals into digital signals. The digital part processes digital signals and
uploads them to the PC as well as provides the platform for the built-in software and the
access interface.

5.2.2 Board composition


Function
The analog part:

Conditioning and converting power

Monitoring voltage (including power voltage, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage
and FS background voltage, also monitoring laser drive current and AD working status,
etc.)

Collecting and conditioning WBC/RBC volume signals

Detecting and amplifying HGB signals

Conditioning WBC DIFF signals

Driving constant-current supply

Controlling and setting amplification factors for all channels

Zapping apertures

AD conversion

The digital part:

Providing a platform for software operating

Controlling interfaces for the indicator board and the key board

Providing communication interfaces for the autoloader board and the drive board

Providing communication interfaces for PC

Controlling and monitoring interfaces for the volumetric board and the laser board

Processing digital signals and identifying pulse

Block diagram

5-32

Hardware System

Figure 5-6 Data board circuit


A12VAC120V
Power for analog
circuits

Analog power filter module

signal monitoring of laser current driver


Laser driver

Gain control
RBC/PLT
sensor

RBC/PLT amplification

RBCPLT
RBC/PLT aperture
Constant current source
/zapping control

Constant current source/zapping


control module of RBC/PLT hole

Monitoring
module
Gain control
WBC sensor

WBC
WBC aperture

WBC amplification

Constant current source


/burn control

Constant current source/zapping


control module of WBC hole
HGB

Digital
circuits
of data
board

Gain control
HGB sensor

HGB amplification

HGB

Driver control
HGB led constant current driver
A/D module
Gain control
SS preamplification board

SS amplification

FS preamplification board

FS amplification

FS
Gain control

SS preamplification board

SF amplification

Gain control

SS
FS base currrent

SF

Figure 5-7 Functions of analog part on data board

5-33

Hardware System

Figure 5-8 Functions of digital part on data board

Description

The analog part:

Conditioning and converting voltages

The A12V and AC120V analog power sent from the mother board are conditioned or
converted to be the required voltages for the board. The AC120V is used for zapping
apertures.

Monitoring voltage

The voltage of A12V power and VCONST, WBC aperture voltage, RBC aperture voltage, FS
blank voltage, laser drive current and AD working status are all monitored via AD.

Collecting and amplifying WBC/RBC volume signals

WBC/RBC volume signals are collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.

Detecting and amplifying HGB signals

The HGB current signals are converted into voltage signals through colorimetric method, then
after conditioning, they are sent to the AD converter.

Conditioning WBC DIFF signals

The WBC DIFF signals including FS, SS and SF signal; SF signal reserved are first
collected and conditioned, and then sent to the AD converter.

Driving constant-current supply

The data board provides the constant current for the electrodes of the WBC bath and the
RBC/PLT bath and the HGB light.

Controlling setting amplification factors for all channels


5-34

Hardware System
The zapping voltage on-off, constant current supply/zapping switch and HGB light on-off are
controlled by the GPIO interface of CPU. The amplification factors of WBC DIFF, WBC,
RBC/PLT and HGB signal channels are set by the FPGA as required.

Zapping aperture

If the analyzer has been running for a certain period or the WBC/RBC bath aperture clogs, the
zapping function shall be performed to clean up the aperture by high temperature.

AD conversion

The cell signals (WBC, RBC, PLT and WBC DIFF signals), voltage monitoring signals and
HGB signals are converted into digital signals, and then sent to FPGA for further processing.
The digital part:

Providing a platform for operating system and application software

CPU MCF5474, 266MHz


DDR128M, 133MHz
FLASH16Mx16bit

Communicating with the TTL port of the driver board

Sending control command to the driver board and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even

Communicating with the 422 port of the autoloader board

Sending control command to the autoloader board via serial port and receiving its response.
Baud rate: 38400bps
Data bit: 8bit
Stop bit: 1bit
Start bit: 1bit
Parity: even

The IO port for the driver board and autoloader board upgrading

By simulating the JTAG sequence through the CPU IO port, the driver board and the
autoloader board can be upgraded respectively.

Interface for the indicator board

The status indicator and the buzzer on the indicator board are controlled by the CPU IO port.

Interface for the volumetric board

Enabling the volumetric board and receiving its detecting signals

Interface for the laser control board

Enabling the laser control board and detecting laser diode current

Key input interface

Receiving the key events (including the aspiration key and the keypad).
5-35

Hardware System

Status detection interface

Detecting the open/closed status of the side door and laser shielding box

Analog signal input interface

Receiving the analog signals from the pre-amplification board and the aperture electrodes

10M100M network interface

The network interface is introduced by the mother board and connected to PC by the cross
network cable, and capable of program downloading and data transmission, etc.

BDM debug interface

The BDM interface of CPU, which is used for detecting hardware, downloading program and
writing the FLASH, is not available for customers.

JTAG interface of FPGA

It debugs FPGA and downloads FPGA program. It is not available for customers.

Interface definition
The data board is a plug-in board. It provides 9 connectors: the connectors for aperture
electrodes, the connector to connect the digital part to the mother board, the connector to
connect the analog part to the mother board, the connectors for debugging and the reserved
connectors. See Figure 5-9 for the layout of the data board.
See the following table for the function of each connector.
Table 5-46 Interfaces of data board
Connector
J1
J2
J3
J7

Number of

Function
Connects

the

RBC/PLT

Note

pins
aperture

electrode
Connects the WBC aperture electrode
Connects the digital part to the mother
board
Connects the analog part to the
mother board

3
3
96
96

/
/
/
/

J8

JTAG interface of FPGA

10

J9

Reserved

20

J10

Reserved

40

J11

Reserved

14

J13

BDM interface of CPU

26

The layout of interfaces is shown in the figure below:

5-36

Hardware System

Figure 5-9 Interfaces layout of data board

Definition of J1

J1 is the signal interface of RBC/PLT.


Table 5-47 Definition of J1
Pin

Name

Note

SHELL

Shielding ground

RHOLE_A

RBC/PLT signals

RHOLE_B

RBC analog ground

Definition of J2

J2 is the signal interface of WBC.


Table 5-48 Definition of J2
Pin

Name

Note

WHOLE _B

WBC analog ground

WHOLE_A

WBC signals

SHELL

Shielding ground

Definition of J3

J3 is the signal interface for the digital part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin connector.

5-37

Hardware System
Table 5-49 Definition of J3
Pin
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5

Definition
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V
D+5V

Function

Pin

Definition

Function

Power supply

B17

JTAG_TCK_

JTAG clock of autoloader

AS

board

JTAG_TO_A

JTAG

autoloader board

JTAG_FROM

JTAG

_AS

autoloader board

UART1_TO_

Reserved

DAT+

port sending

UART1_TO_

Reserved

DAT-

port sending

Power supply

B18

Power supply

B19

Power supply

B20

Power supply

B21

sending

of

receiving
debug
debug

of
serial
serial

A6

DGND

Signal ground

B22

DGND

Signal ground

A7

DGND

Signal ground

B23

DGND

Signal ground

A8

DGND

Signal ground

B24

DGND

Signal ground

A9

DGND

Signal ground

B25

#VMCTRL

Volumetric board enabling

A10

DGND

Signal ground

B26

#RBC_STAR

Start

metering

#RBC_STOP

Stop

A11

DGND

Signal ground

B27

RBC

volume

RBC

volume

WBC

volume

WBC

volume

metering
A12

TP_TX+

Positive sending
terminal

B28

of

#WBC_STAR

Start

metering

#RBC_STOP

Stop

network
A13

TP_TX-

Negative sending
terminal

B29

of

metering

network
A14

DGND

Signal ground

B30

DGND

Signal ground

A15

DGND

Signal ground

B31

#LASER_CT

Laser board enabling

RL
A16

JTAG_TMS

JTAG

mode

B32

DGND

Signal ground

signal
A17

JTAG_TCK

JTAG clock signal

C1

D+5V

Power supply

A18

JTAG_TO_

JTAG sending of

C2

D+5V

Power supply

DRV

drive board

JTAG_TO_

JTAG receiving of

C3

D+5V

Power supply

DAT

drive board

A20

DGND

Signal ground

C4

D+5V

Power supply

A21

DGND

Signal ground

C5

D+5V

Power supply

A22

UART0_TO

Serial

C6

DGND

Signal ground

A19

port

5-38

Hardware System
_DRV

sending of drive
board

A23

UART0_TO

Serial

port

_DAT

receiving of drive

C7

DGND

Signal ground

board
A24

DGND

Signal ground

C8

DGND

Signal ground

A25

DGND

Signal ground

C9

DGND

Signal ground

A26

DGND

Signal ground

C10

DGND

Signal ground

A27

DGND

Signal ground

C11

DGND

Signal ground

A28

DGND

Signal ground

C12

TP_RX+

Positive

receiving

terminal of network
A29

DGND

Signal ground

C13

TP_RX-

Negative

receiving

terminal of network
A30

DGND

Signal ground

C14

DGND

Signal ground

A31

DGND

Signal ground

C15

DGND

Signal ground

A32

DGND

Signal ground

C16

UART3_TO_

PC communication serial

PC

port sending

UART3_TO_

PC communication serial

DAT

port receiving

B1

D+5V

Power supply

C17

B2

D+5V

Power supply

C18

DGND

Signal ground

B3

D+5V

Power supply

C19

DGND

Signal ground

B4

D+5V

Power supply

C20

UART1_TO_

autoloader board serial

AS+

port sending

UART1_TO_

autoloader board serial

AS-

port receiving

B5

D+5V

Power supply

C21

B6

DGND

Signal ground

C22

DGND

Signal ground

B7

DGND

Signal ground

C23

DGND

Signal ground

B8

DGND

Signal ground

C24

Aspiration

SUCK_KEY

input

key

control

B9

DGND

Signal ground

C25

DGND

Signal ground

B10

DGND

Signal ground

C26

BUZ

Buzzer control output

B11

DGND

Signal ground

C27

#COUNT_KE

Aspirate key control input

Y
B12

PWFBOUT

Network

power

C28

FAULT_J

supply feedback
B13

DGND

Signal ground

Indicator control output


(red)

C29

READY_J

Indicator control output


(green)

B14

DGND

Signal ground

C30

OPTI_DOOR

Laser

shielding

monitoring input

5-39

box

Hardware System
B15
B16

DGND

Signal ground
mode

C31

JTAG_TMS

JTAG

of

_AS

autoloader board

C32

#RIGHT_DO

Right

door

status

OR

monitoring input

#INSERT_KE

Compartment door open

key control input

Definition of J7

J7 is the signal interface for the analog part of data board and mother board, and is European
96 pin plug.
Table 5-50 Definition of J7
Pin

Name

Note

Pin

Name

Note

A1

AGND

Analog ground

B17

HGB_IN

HGB signals input

A2

AGND

Analog ground

B18

AGND

Analog ground

A3

AGND

Analog ground

B19

HGB+

HGB

light

drive

positive

drive

negative

electrode
A4

AGND

Analog ground

B20

HGB-

HGB

light

electrode
A5

AGND

Analog ground

B21

A-12V

-12V power supply

A6

AGND

Analog ground

B22

A-12V

-12V power supply

A7

AGND

Analog ground

B23

A+12V

+12V power supply

A8

AGND

Analog ground

B24

A+12V

+12V power supply

A9

AGND

Analog ground

B25

A+12V

+12V power supply

A10

AGND

Analog ground

B26

NC

A11

AGND

Analog ground

B27

NC

A12

AGND

Analog ground

B28

NC

A13

AGND

Analog ground

B29

NC

A14

AGND

Analog ground

B30

AC120V_

Zapping voltage input

B
A15

AGND

Analog ground

B31

NC

A16

AGND

Analog ground

B32

NC

A17

AGND

Analog ground

C1

AGND

Analog ground

A18

AGND

Analog ground

C2

AGND

Analog ground

A19

AGND

Analog ground

C3

AGND

Analog ground

A20

AGND

Analog ground

C4

AGND

Analog ground

A21

AGND

Analog ground

C5

AGND

Analog ground

A22

AGND

Analog ground

C6

AGND

Analog ground

A23

AGND

Analog ground

C7

AGND

Analog ground

A24

AGND

Analog ground

C8

AGND

Analog ground

A25

AGND

Analog ground

C9

AGND

Analog ground

5-40

Hardware System
A26

NC

C10

AGND

Analog ground

A27

NC

C11

AGND

Analog ground

A28

NC

C12

AGND

Analog ground

A29

NC

C13

AGND

Analog ground

A30

NC

C14

AGND

Analog ground

A31

NC

C15

AGND

Analog ground

A32

AC120V_

Zapping voltage input

C16

AGND

Analog ground

C17

AGND

Analog ground

C18

AGND

Analog ground

A
B1

AGND

Analog ground

B2

LASER_I

Laser

monitoring input

B3

AGND

Analog ground

C19

AGND

Analog ground

B4

AGND

Analog ground

C20

AGND

Analog ground

B5

AGND

Analog ground

C21

A-12V

-12V power supply

B6

AGND

Analog ground

C22

A-12V

-12V power supply

B7

AGND

Analog ground

C23

A+12V

+12V power supply

B8

AGND

Analog ground

C24

A+12V

+12V power supply

B9

AGND

Analog ground

C25

A+12V

+12V power supply

B10

AGND

Analog ground

C26

NC

B11

FS_IN

FS signals input

C27

NC

B12

AGND

Analog ground

C28

NC

B13

SS_IN

SS signals input

C29

NC

B14

AGND

Analog ground

C30

NC

B15

SF_IN

SF signals input

C31

NC

B16

AGND

Analog ground

C32

NC

current

Definition of J8

J8 is the JTAG interface of FPGA.


Table 5-51 Definition of J8
Pin

Name

Note

FPGA_TCK

Clock

GND

Signal ground

FPGA_TDO

Data output

VDD

Power supply

FPGA_TMS

Testing mode selection

VDD

Power supply

NC

NC

5-41

Hardware System

FPGA_TDI

Data input

10

GND

Signal ground

Definition of J9

Reserved. Not available for customers.

Definition of J10

Reserved. Not available for customers..

Definition of J11

Reserved. Not available for customers.

Definition of J13

J11 is the BDM interface of CPU.


Table 5-52 Definition of J13
Pin

Definition

Function

NC

BKPT#

Breakpoint setup

GND

Signal ground

DSCLK

synchronizing clock input

GND

Signal ground

TCK

Clock input of JATG

BDM_RSTI

BDM reset

DSI

Serial input

VDD

Power supply

10

DSO

Serial output

11

GND

Signal ground

12

PSTDATA7

13

PSTDATA6

14

PSTDATA5

15

PSTDATA4

16

PSTDATA3

17

PSTDATA2

18

PSTDATA1

19

PSTDATA0

20

GND

Signal ground

21

NC

22

NC

23

GND

Signal ground

Configuration data

5-42

Hardware System
24

PSTCLK

Processor clock

25

NC

26

MCF_TA#

Transmission response

Assembly drawing

5-43

Hardware System

Figure 5-10 Assembly drawing of data board

5-44

Hardware System

5.2.3 Adjustment and Test Points


All the adjustable parameters of analog part are adjusted as per the command of FPGA. Adjust
the parameters' settings in the software interface if necessary.

LED function definition

Table 5-53 LED function definition


No.

Indicator

Function description

D17

A-12V power indicator

D20

A+12V power indicator

D21

A-5V power indicator

D22

A+5V power indicator

D39

Reserved for software use.

D40

Reserved for software use.

D41

Reserved for software use.

D42

Reserved for software use.

D43

Reserved for software use.

10

D44

Network conflict indicator. It turns on when network


conflicts.

11

D45

100M network communication indicator. It turns on


when enabled.

12

D46

10M network communication indicator. It turns on


when enabled.

13

D47

Network connection indicator. It turns on when


enabled.

14

D48

Network full-duplex communication indicator. It


turns on when enabled.

15

D49

FPGA configuration complete indicator. It turns on


when the configuration is done.

16

D51

D+5V power indicator

Function definition of test points

5-45

Hardware System
Table 5-54 Test points on data board
No.

Test point

Signal

Function description

under test

+12V

AVCC

+12V power supply of analog part

-12V

AVSS

-12V power supply of analog part

+5V

AVDD

+5V power supply of analog part

-5V

AVEE

-5V power supply of analog part

VR_MON

+2.5V

+2.5V power supply of analog part

VR_H

+2.5V

+2.5V power supply of analog part

+56V

VCONST

+12VM

-12VM

10

+56VM

VCONSTM

11

RHOLE

RHOLE

RBC Aperture Voltage monitoring

12

WHOLE

WHOLE

WBC Aperture Voltage monitoring

13

FSBASE

FSBASE

FS background voltage monitoring

14

LASER

LASER

Laser diode drive current monitoring

15

HGB1

HGB1

HGB channel voltage value after I/V

16

NHGB

#HGBLED

HGB light on-off control

17

HGB

HGB

HGB measurement voltage value

18

NBURN

#BURN

Zapping control

19

PULSE

PULSE

20

FS_IN

FS_IN

FS pre-amplification board output signals

21

FS1

FS1

Adjustable amplified FS signals

22

FS

FS

Analog signals outputted by FS channel

23

SS_IN

SS_IN

SS pre-amplification board output signals

24

SS1

SS1

Adjustable amplified SS signals

25

SS

SS

Analog signals outputted by SS channel

26

SF_IN

SF_IN

SF pre-amplification board output signals

27

SF1

SF1

Adjustable amplified SF signals

28

SF

SF

Analog signals outputted by SF channel

29

NCONST

#CONST

Constant current source control

30

NSEL_R

#SELECT_

RBC aperture zapping/constant current

Drive voltage of constant current source


of electrode

A+12V_MO

+12V power supply monitoring

N
A-12V_MO

-12V power supply monitoring

N
Monitor drive voltage of constant current
source of electrode

Pulse

control

signals

that

produce

zapping voltage

5-46

Hardware System
RBC

selection control

#SELECT_

WBC aperture zapping/constant current

WBC

selection control

31

NSEL_W

32

RBC1

RBC1

33

RBC2

RBC2

34

RBC3

RBC3

35

RBC

RBC

36

PLT1

PLT1

37

PLT2

PLT2

38

PLT

PLT

39

WBC1

WBC1

40

WBC2

WBC2

41

WBC3

WBC3

42

WBC

WBC

WBC channel signals of output grade

43

HCLK

HCLK

HGB and clock of monitoring voltage

44

HGND

HGND

Analog ground

45

RBCF

RBCF

Signals inputted into AD from RBC

46

VR_R

VR_R

AD reference voltage of RBC

47

RAGND

RAGND

Analog ground

48

RCLK

RCLK

AD clock signals of RBC

49

WBCF

WBCF

Signals inputted into AD from WBC

50

VR_W

VR_W

AD reference voltage of WBC

51

WAGND

WAGND

Analog ground

52

WCLK

WCLK

AD clock signals of WBC

53

PLTF

PLTF

Signals inputted into AD from PLT

54

VR_P

VR_P

AD reference voltage of PLT

55

PAGND

PAGND

Analog ground

56

PCLK

PCLK

AD clock signals of PLT

57

MCLK

MCLK

AD clock of monitoring voltage

58

FSF

FSF

AD input from FS

59

FSCLK

FSCLK

AD clock signals of FS

RBC channel output signals of adjustable


amplification grade
RBC channel output signals of direct
current restoring grade
RBC channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade
RBC channel signals of output grade
PLT channel output signals of direct
current restoring grade
PLT channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade
PLT channel signals of output grade
RBC channel output signals of adjustable
amplification grade
WBC channel output signals of direct
current restoring grade
WBC channel output signals of low-pass
filter grade

5-47

Hardware System
60

SSF

SSF

AD input from SS

61

SSCLK

SSCLK

AD clock signals of SS

62

SFF

SFF

AD input from SF

63

SFCLK

SFCLK

AD clock signals of SF

64

TP8

MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 1 of CPU

65

TP9

66

TP37

67

TP45

VCC

+5V digital power supply

68

TP46

VDD

+3.3V digital power supply

69

TP47

D_1V5

+1.5V digital power supply

70

TP48

D_1V8

+1.8V digital power supply

71

TP57

D_1V2_FG

+1.2V digital power supply

72

TP71

D_2V5

+2.5V digital power supply

73

TP74

#MCF_CS1

Flexbus CS1 of CPU

74

TP75

MCF_R/#W

Flexbus read/write signals of CPU

75

TP76

MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 6 of CPU

76

TP78

D_1V25VTT

VTT power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V

77

TP79

#MCF_CS0

Flexbus CS0 of CPU

78

TP80

FPGA_DDR

+2.5V DDR power on FPGA

79

TP81

80

TP82

81

TP83

82

TP85

83

TP86

84

TP87

85

TP95

86

TP96

1
MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 2 of CPU

2
FPGA_DDR

VREF power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V

_VRF

PA

_2V5
FPGA_DDR

VTT power of DDR on FPGA, +1.25V

_VTT
MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 5 of CPU

5
D_1V25VR

VREF power of DDR on CPU, +1.25V

F
MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 4 of CPU

5
#MCF_OE

Output enabling of Flexbus of CPU

MCF_TS

Address latch indication of Flexbus of


CPU

MCF_FBAD

Flexbus address data 3 of CPU

3
#MCF_RST

Reset input signals of CPU

5-48

Hardware System
I
87

TP101

88

TP102

89

TP103

90

TP104

91

TP105

92

TP106

#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 1 of CPU

1
#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 2 of CPU

2
#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 3 of CPU

3
#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 5 of CPU

5
#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 6 of CPU

6
#MCF_IRQ

Interrupt input signals 7 of CPU

AGND, TP10-21, TP38, TP44, TP70, TP73, TP77, TP88, TP90, TP92-94 and TP107-116 are
connected to the GND network and usually used as the connecting point of the oscilloscope
probe grounded end.

Data board key definition


Table 5-55 Key definition
No.
S12

Function
Manually reset the main CPU

5.2.4 Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose
Damaged data board needs to be replaced by a new one..

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
Data board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:
5-49

Hardware System

Remove the data board from the main unit:

1. Shut down the analyzer.


2. Remove the left door.
3. Remove the top cover board
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two cross-headed bolts (M3X6) from
the upper cover of the shielding box, and then remove the upper cover.
5. Disconnect the two power cables connected to the data board.
6. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.
7. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the data board, and
then draw the data board out.

Figure 5-11 Disassembly diagram of data board-1

1---Upper cover of the shielding box of

2---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

data board

(with washer)

3---Data board

4---Hand-tightened screws

Further disassembly of the data board

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the data board.
5-50

Hardware System
2. Remove the data board from the bracket.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 panhead screws (M3X8) and 6
socket cap screws (M3X12) from the lower cover of the shielding box.

Figure 5-12 Disassembly diagram of data board-2


1---Cross-recessed

panhead

screw

2---Data board

M3x6 (with washer)


3---Bracket

4---Lower cover of the shielding box of data


board

5---Panhead screw M4X8

6---Socket cap screws M3X12

Assembly
Assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Power indicators D20, D17, D22, D21 and D51 turns on.
2. Indicator D49 turns on after FPGA initialization.
3. Indicator D47 and D48 turn on and D45 flashes after network is enabled.

5.2.5 Troubleshooting
The errors analysis and the corresponding troubleshooting of the analog part on data board
are listed in the following table. Most of the errors can be tested and determined by testing the
corresponding test points with a multimeter. A measurement value within the normal range
indicates the circuit or component is in good working condition. Otherwise, be sure to find out
5-51

Hardware System
the particular error according to the certain symptom and remove it accordingly.
Table 5-56 Troubleshooting of analog part
No.
1

Error
12V

power

supply error

Character

Possible Cause

The voltage of the

Improper

+12V

connection

test

point

cable
with

exceeds the range

the mother board

of 120.6V; or the

or

ripple

caused

noise

is

greater than 50mV.

Recommended action
Reconnect

the

cable

or

change a new cable

disconnection
by

broken cable
Improper

12V

Check whether the proper

power supply sent

power supply is sent by the

by

mother board or the power

the

board

mother
or

the

board

power board
Inductor

L16

capacitor

or

C111,

Re-solder

or

change

the

component

C95 and C88 are


damaged or not
properly soldered.
2

-12V

power

supply error

The voltage of the

Improper

-12V

connection

test

point

cable
with

exceeds the range

the mother board

of -120.6V; or the

or

ripple

caused

noise

is

greater than 50mV.

Reconnect

the

cable

or

change a new cable

disconnection
by

broken cable
Improper

-12V

Check whether the proper

power supply sent

power supply is sent by the

by

mother board or the power

the

board

mother
or

the

board

power board
Inductor
capacitor

L18

or

C112,

C94 and C87 are


damaged or not
properly soldered

5-52

Re-solder
component

or

change

the

Hardware System
3

+5V

power

supply error

The voltage of the

The +5V relating

First ensure the +12V power

+5V

circuit

rosin

supply works normally. Then,

exceeds the range

jointed; the power

check the +5V relating circuit,

of +50.25 V

supplys

re-solder

impedance to the

component.

test

point

is

ground

is

decreased;

or

or

change

the

power chip U14 is


damaged
4

-5V

power

supply error

The voltage of the

The -5V relating

First ensure the -12V power

-5V

circuit

rosin

supply works normally. Then,

exceeds the range

jointed; the power

check the -5V relating circuit,

of -50.25 V

supplys

re-solder

impedance to the

component.

test

point

is

ground

is

decreased;

or

or

change

the

power chip U12 is


damaged
5

+2.5V reference

The voltage of the

If the +5V (AVDD)

Check the relating circuit;

power

VR_MON or VR_H

power

supply

re-solder

test point exceeds

works

normally,

the

then the problem

supply

error

range

of

2.50.125 V

or

change

the

component

occurred probably
because

power

chip U45 or U43,


and its peripheral
components

are

damaged or not
properly soldered.
6

+56
current
power
error

constant

The voltage of the

The boost circuit

Check the chip U72, U70,

drive

VCONST test point

works improperly

U71 and their peripherals for

supply

exceeds the range


of 563V

any rosin joint or damage


The

56V

voltage-regulator
diode is damaged
or

not

soldered.

5-53

properly

Re-solder
component

or

change

the

Hardware System
7

+56V monitoring

The voltage of the

If the +56V power

Check the U39 and relating

voltage error

+56VM test point

supply

components;

exceeds the range

normally, then the

of 1.370.2V

problem occurred

works

re-solder

or

change the component

probably because
something
wrong

is

with

the

monitoring circuit..
8

+12V monitoring

The voltage of the

The relating circuit

If the +12V power supply

voltage error

+12VM test point

is

properly

works normally, check U40

exceeds the range

soldered;

the

and the relating components,

of 1.8V-2.2V

power

not

supplys

impendence to the
ground

re-solder

or

change

the

component.

is

decreased;
Something
wrong

is

with

the

power IC or the
corresponding AD.
9

-12V monitoring

The voltage of the

The relating circuit

Check U40 and the relating

voltage error

-12VM

is

components,

test

point

not

properly

exceeds the range

soldered;

of 2.2V-2.6V

power

re-solder

or

the

change the component under

supplys

the circumstance that the

impendence to the

-12V power supply works

ground

normally

is

decreased;
Something
wrong

is

with

the

power IC or the
corresponding AD.
10

RBC

aperture

The value of the

Constant

current

Check whether the constant

voltage

aperture

source

control

current source control signals

monitoring error

exceeds the range

signals abnormal,

are

of 10V-14V

56V

foregoing troubleshooting to

voltage-regulator

remove the error of 56V

diode abnormal or

circuit.

voltage

normal.

See

the

boost circuit error


Bath not properly

Check

wired; clogging.

perform

the

procedure
5-54

the

bath

wiring;

unclogging

Hardware System
Monitoring

circuit

error

Components
the

of

monitoring

circuit

are

Check whether the relating


circuit or AD works normally.

not

properly soldered,
or

the

corresponding AD
works abnormally.
11

WBC

aperture

Same as point 10

Same as point 10

Same as point 10

HGB

HGB value of the

HGB light error or

Check whether HGB light is

background

test point exceeds

the gain

on, or adjust the gain multiple

voltage

the normal range

abnormal

(4.2V-4.8V)

voltage
monitoring error
12

of HGB channel
The

Check

corresponding AD

corresponding

works abnormally,

normally.

or

the

error

message

is

whether
AD

the
works

accidentally
triggered

by

improper wiring.
13

FS background

The value of the

The flow cell is

Clean the flow cell in time, or

voltage

FSBASE test point

dirty, or something

check whether the U38 and

monitoring error

exceeds the normal

is wrong with the

the corresponding AD chip

range (0-400mv)

corresponding

U44 work normally.

monitoring circuit
error.
14

Laser
drive

diode

The value of the

Something

current

LASER test point

wrong

exceeds the range

current value sent

laser

of 1.0-3.0V.

by

whether the monitoring value

monitoring error

with
the

control board

is

Check whether the cable is

the

properly connected to the

laser

control

and

sent from the laser control


board is normal

5-55

board

Hardware System
Data

board

Check whether the operation

monitoring circuit

amplifier

error,

corresponding AD chip U44

the

corresponding AD
error

U38

and

the

work normally.

or

connection

cable

abnormal
15

RBC

aperture

zapping error

No sound is heard

Something

and no bubbles are

wrong

produced

when

zapping the bath

is

Ensuring the wiring of the

the

bath is correct, then check

zapping

voltage

whether the AC120V zapping

supplied

by

the

power of the power board is

power board, or

proper, or check whether the

with the part of the

zapping control signals are

data

effective.

with

board

that

controls zapping.
16

WBC

aperture

Same as point 15

Same as point 15

Same as point 15

No

No WBC/RBC/PLT

Bath wiring error,

Use a oscilloscope to check

WBC/RBC/PLT

result, or the result

analog

part

whether the analog channel

result

displays ***

channel error, AD

can output correct signals. If

collection error or

no

algorithm

check the amplification stage

identification error

by stage, and check the AD

zapping error
17

signal

is

detected,,

collection and data uploading


as well.
18

WBC/RBC/PLT

WBC/RBC/PLT

Bad

background

background

constant

abnormal

abnormal

shielding,

First ensure the bath and the

current

fluidics work normally, and

source abnormal,

then check the shielding and

analog

grounding,

channel

check

resistor-capacitor

components

components

resistors) of the constant

incorrect
abnormal

or

(such

as

current source, or check the


resistor-capacitor

and

operation amplifier of the


signal conditioning channel.

5-56

Hardware System
Table 5-57 Troubleshooting of digital part
No.
1

Error
System startup failed

Causes and solutions


Possible causes: input power supply error, including
improper power cord connection, abnormal power
supply voltage on each board, flash chip error that
causes

the

operating

system

to

fail

to

be

downloaded into DDR SDRAM; DDR SDRAM error


that causes the system to fail to operate; Or system
clock abnormal.
Solutions: press the S12 key to reset the system,
and then check whether the error still exists; check
whether the power indicator D51 is on; check
whether the fuse F4 is broken; use a multimeter to
check the voltage of each power supply; use an
oscilloscope to check whether the clock crystal
oscillator output X2 is normal.
2

Network communication failed

Possible causes: network connection abnormal;


using non-standard network cable; network chip
damaged, etc.
Solutions: directly connect the analyzer and PC with
the specified shielding-cross network cable. If
nothing is wrong with the network connection and the
settings, then check the crystal oscillator X3 output
by an oscilloscope. If you doubt the network chip
U36 is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Abnormal communication with

Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip

UART of autoloader board

U66 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper; check whether the interface signals are
normal by an oscilloscope.

volumetric board signals, laser

Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip

shielding box status and right

U74 damaged.

door status can not be detected

Solutions: check and make sure the connection is


proper;

check

the

interface

signals

by

an

oscilloscope.
5

Abnormal communication with

Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip

UART of drive board

U67 damaged.
Solutions: check and make sure the connection is
proper;

check

oscilloscope.
5-57

the

interface

signals

by

an

Hardware System
6

Events of Aspirate Key, Count

Possible causes: improper connection; interface chip

Key and Compartment Door

U67 damaged.

Open Key can not be detected,

Solutions: check and make sure the connection is

or the buzzer and indicator on

proper;

the indicator board are out of

oscilloscope.

control.

5-58

check

the

interface

signals

by

an

Hardware System

5.3 Drive board


5.3.1 Introduction
The drive board realizes the following functions: 1) driving motors, pumps, valves and heaters
etc. 2) detecting such signals as the motor position and liquid levels; 3) collecting the signals of
temperature, pressure and voltage etc. for AD conversion.

5.3.2 Board composition


Function

Serial communication

Driving stepping motors

Driving valves and pumps

Temperature control

Pressure control

System status detection

Reagent status detection

Block diagram
2-channel temperature
measurement
2-channel pressure measurement
3-channel power voltage
measurement
Temperature
Pressure
Power
Voltage
(anolog
signal)
Databoard
UART

8-channel Step-motor driver


module

RD
A/D[7:0]
IN

A[15:8]

EN
C8051F020

TDI
CLK
TDO

F_INT

CLK

F_NCONFIG

LATCH

NCSO

BN

HOLD

RXD

MOTOR

A3979

SLEEP

WR

TXD

AN

MS2
STEP
ALE

TMS
Databoard
JTAG

A
MS1

EP1C6Q240C8

DATA

74HC595
+
IRLML2502

SV1~SV40
40

40-channel solenoid valve


control

DCLK
ASDO
M_SEN

Pump
Heater

HOA0880T51

CD74HC14
20-channel motor position sensor
detection

EPCS1S18N
7-channel high power pump & valve
control
2-channel heater control

LSEN/SWITCH

74LVCR2245

Liquid level sensor


or sensitive switch

8-channel liquid level sensor & sensitive switch detection

Figure 5-13 Block diagram of drive board

5-59

Hardware System

Description

Serial communication

The main control unit of the drive board is a MCU, which has two asynchronous serial
communication interfaces (UART). UART0 is used for asynchronous serial communication
with the data board. It receives and analyzes control commands sent by the data board, and
responds accordingly. Communication parameters:
Baud Rate: 38400bps
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1bit
Parity: even
UART1 is reserved.

Stepping motor driving

The drive board controls stepping motors through an FPGA. After output by the FPGA, the
control signal is first sent to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to controller A3979 to drive the
motor. The drive board drives 8 stepping motors: the sample syringe motor, the sample
injection syringe motor, the sheath syringe motor, the diluent syringe motor, the lyse syringe
motor, the horizontal motor and the vertical motor.

Valve and pump driving

The drive board provides the drive control for 40 valves and 7 pumps and actually drives 34
valves, 1 pressure pump and 2 vacuum pumps (also be used as the waste pump). The MCU
writes control information of valve SV1-SV40 into the valve buffer of the FGPA. Based on the
data, the FPGA outputs valve control signals through the serial-parallel conversion chip
74HC595, and drive the valves through the MOS transistor IRLML2502. The MCU first sends
the control information of PUMP1-PUMP3 to isolator 74AHCT245, and then to the drive chip
ULN2068 to control the 3 pumps respectively.

Temperature Control

The temperature control circuit keeps temperature of the reaction bath (DIFF bath) and the
optical system constant. By comparing the temperature measurements and the target values,
the MCU turns on/off the heater to control the temperature of each channel. The MC sends
heater control signals to isolator 74AHCT245, then to driver FDS6670A to control the two
heaters.

Air pressure control

The pressure control circuit controls the pressure of the vacuum chamber and the pressure
chamber. The pressure signals (voltage signals) sent by the volumetric board are measured by
5-60

Hardware System
the drive board. Through voltage follower LM358, the signals are then sent to the ADC pin of
the MCU for AD conversion and corresponding operation. Then, the control signals are output
to turn on/off the pressure pump or the vacuum pump, thus, the pressure of each chamber is
adjusted.

System status detection

The drive board detects the ambient temperature and the voltage of power supply. The mother
board sends the inquiry command to obtain the corresponding system status parameter.
Ambient temperature sensor is located on the interface board. After I/V conversion and
amplification, the signals outputted by the temperature sensor are sent to the MCU for AD
conversion and operation, then the temperature value is obtained.
The voltage detection circuit detects all the power supplies (24V, 12V and 5V) on the drive
board.

Reagent status detection

The reagent status is detected by the passive float switch. There are totally 8 reagent detection
channels on the drive board as designed, and 6 channels of them are in use to detect the
following reagents: LEO1, LEO2, LH, cleanser, diluent and waste.

Interface definition
The drive board connects the motherboard via the 3 DIN41612 plugs and 3 DIN41612
receptacles located on the two boards respectively. All the drive-board-relating peripherals
(including valves, pumps, heaters, motors and sensors etc.) are connected to the motherboard
directly. The connectors layout and the corresponding connections are shown in the figure
below.

5-61

Hardware System

Liquid level sensor


Optical train temperature
Reaction pool temperature
Ambient temperature

Position sensor
JTAG
UART
Pressure

Valve
PUMP
Heater
2-channel step-motor

6-channel step-motor
+24V

+5V

+12V
Base board

PB2 Socket

PB1 Socket

PB3 Socket

J4

J5

Board mounting
bracket & guide
channel

J3

Socket 96Pin
96Pin

Driver board
J9
J1

Support board

J2

J10 J8

Figure 5-14 Interfaces layout of drive board


The functions of the interfaces are listed in the table.
Table 5-58 Interfaces on the driver board
Connector
J1
J2

J3

Number of

Function

Note

pins

FPGA configuration interface


(AS mode)
FPGA Debug Interface

10
10

Interface with the motherboard

96

Used when FPGA first


downloading
Not used on complete
device
Control

interface

of

valves,

pumps

and

detection

and

heaters
J4

Interface with the motherboard

96

J5

Interface with the motherboard

96

J8
J9
J10

Communication

Debug

Interface
MCU Debug Interface
Communication

4
10

Debug

Interface

5-62

Sensor

communication interface
Motor control interface
Not used on complete
device
Used when MCU first
downloading
Not used on complete
device

Hardware System
Definition of J1

J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).


Table 5-59 Definition of the interface for FPGA configuration
Pin

Name

Pin

Name

F_DCLK

AGND

F_CONFDONE

VDD

F_CONFIG

F_NCE

F_DATA

F_NCSC

F_ASDO

10

GND

Definition of J2

J2 is the FPGA debug interface (JTAG mode).


Definition of J3

J3 connects to the PB3 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for valves,
pumps and heaters control.
Table 5-60 Valve/pump interface- Definition of J3
Pin

Definition

Note

1
2
3
4
5
6
PGND

Power ground

12V0

12V power supply

19

SV1

Control signal for Valve 1

20

SV4

Control signal for Valve 4

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

5-63

Hardware System
21

SV7

Control signal for Valve 7

22

SV10

Control signal for Valve 10

23

SV13

Control signal for Valve 13

24

SV16

Control signal for Valve 16

25

SV19

Control signal for Valve 19

26

SV22

Control signal for Valve 22

27

SV25

Control signal for Valve 25

28

SV28

Control signal for Valve 28

29

SV31

Control signal for Valve 31

30

SV34

Control signal for Valve 34

31

SV37

Control signal for Valve 37

32

SV40

Control signal for Valve 40

33

M7-A

34

M7-AN

35

M7-B

36

M7-BN

37

M8-A

38

M8-AN

39

M8-B

40

M8-BN

41

HT1-DRV

Control end of the reaction bath heater

42

HT2-DRV

Control end of the optical system heater

43

PGND

Power ground

44

PUMP7

Control signal for Pump 7 (Reserved. No output)

45

PUMP6

Control signal for Pump 6 (Reserved. No output)

46

PUMP5

Control signal for Pump 5 (Reserved. No output)

47

PUMP4

Control signal for Pump 4 (Reserved. No output)

48

PUMP3

Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)

49

PUMP2

Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)

50

PUMP1

Control signal for pressure pump (P1)

51

Sv2

Control signal for Valve 2

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe


X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)

5-64

Hardware System
52

SV5

Control signal for Valve 5

53

SV8

Control signal for Valve 8

54

SV11

Control signal for Valve 11

55

SV14

Control signal for Valve 14

56

SV17

Control signal for Valve 17

57

SV20

Control signal for Valve 20

58

SV23

Control signal for Valve 23

59

SV26

Control signal for Valve 26

60

SV29

Control signal for Valve 29

61

SV32

Control signal for Valve 32

62

SV35

Control signal for Valve 35

63

SV38

Control signal for Valve 38

64

NC

Empty

65

M7-A

66

M7-AN

67

M7-B

68

M7-BN

69

M8-A

70

M8-AN

71

M8-B

72

M8-BN

73

HT1-DRV

Control end of the reaction bath heater

74

HT2-DRV

Control end of the optical system heater

75

PGND

Power ground

76

PUMP7

Control signal for Pump 7 (Reserved. No output)

77

PUMP6

Control signal for Pump 6 (Reserved. No output)

78

PUMP5

Control signal for Pump 5 (Reserved. No output)

79

PUMP4

Control signal for pinch valve V39

80

PUMP3

Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P3)

81

PUMP2

Control signal for the Vacuum/Waste Pump (P2)

82

PUMP1

Control signal for pressure pump (P1)

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe


X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
X motor (SM 7)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample probe
Y motor (SM 8)

5-65

Hardware System
83

SV3

Control signal for Valve 3

84

SV6

Control signal for Valve 6

85

SV9

Control signal for Valve 9

86

SV12

Control signal for Valve 12

87

SV15

Control signal for Valve 15

88

SV18

Control signal for Valve 18

89

SV21

Control signal for Valve 21

90

SV24

Control signal for Valve 24

91

SV27

Control signal for Valve 27

92

SV30

Control signal for Valve 30

93

SV33

Control signal for Valve 33

94

SV36

Control signal for Valve 36

95

SV39

Control signal for Valve 39

96

NC

Empty

Definition of J4

J4 connects to the PB1 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for sensor
detection and communication.
Table 5-61 Sensors/Communication interfaces-Definition of J4
Pin

Name

Note

PRTO_T1

Temperature sensor signal end of heater 1 (reaction bath)

PRTO_T2

Temperature sensor signal end of heater 2 (optical system)

PRESSURE_1ST_A

Input signal of pressure sensor 1 (Pressure)

GND

GND

VCC

5V power supply

17

GND

GND

18

LIQ_SIN1

Input signal of LEO1 lyse liquid-level sensor

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

5-66

Hardware System
19

LIQ_SIN3

Input signal of LH lyse liquid-level sensor

20

LIQ_SIN5

Input signal of liquid-level sensor5 (reserved)

21

LIQ_SIN7

Input signal of waste liquid-level sensor

22

LS_CTRL

Control signal for liquid-level sampling

23

GND

Digital ground

24

VC_SIN17

Sending end power signal of position sensor 17 (reserved)

25

VC_SIN18

Sending end power signal of position sensor 18 (reserved)

26

VC_SIN19

Sending end power signal of position sensor 19 (reserved)

27

VC_SIN20

Sending end power signal of position sensor 20 (reserved)

28

VC_SIN1

29

M_SIN2

30

VC_SIN4

31

M_SIN5

32

VC_SIN7

Sending end power signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)

33

PRTO_REF

Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal

34

PRTO_REF

Reference end of heater temperature sensor signal

35

PRESSURE_2ST_A

Input signal of pressure sensor 2 (vacuum)

GND

Digital ground

VCC

5V power supply

49

GND

Digital ground

50

LIQ_SIN2

Input signal of LEO2 lyse liquid-level sensor

51

LIQ_SIN4

Input signal of cleanser liquid-level sensor

52

LIQ_SIN6

Input signal of diluent liquid-level sensor

Sending end power signal of sampling syringe initial position


sensor (OP1)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample injection syringe
initial position sensor (OP 2)
Sending end power signal of lyse syringe initial position
sensor (OP 4)
Receiving end feedback signal of diluent syringe initial position
sensor (OP 5)

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

5-67

Hardware System
53
54
55

LIQ_SIN8

Input signal of liquid-level sensor 8 (reserved)

GND

Digital ground
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 17

56

M_SIN17

57

M_SIN18

58

M_SIN19

59

M_SIN20

60

M_SIN1

61

VC_SIN3

62

M_SIN4

63

VC_SIN6

64

M_SIN7

Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 7 (reserved)

65

AMBINET_T_A

Input signal of ambient temperature sensor

GND

Digital ground

VCC

5V power supply

81

GND

Digital ground

82

TMS

TMS signal of JTAG interface

83

TCK

Clock signal of JTAG interface

(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 18
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 19
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 20
(reserved)
Receiving end feedback signal of sampling syringe initial
position sensor (OP 1)
Sending end power signal of sheath syringe initial position
sensor (OP 3)
Receiving end feedback signal of lyse syringe initial position
sensor (OP 4)
Sending end power signal of relieve valve position sensor (OP
6)

66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

5-68

Hardware System
84

TDI

Data input pin of JTAG interface

85

TDO

Data output pin of JTAG interface

GND

Digital ground

88

UP_TX

Serial port sending data signal (UART0)

89

UP_RX

Serial port receiving data signal (UART0)

GND

Digital ground

86
87

90
91
92

VC_SIN2

93

M_SIN3

94

VC_SIN5

95

M_SIN6

96

VC_SIN8

Sending end power signal of sample injection syringe initial


position sensor (OP 2)
Receiving end feedback signal of sheath syringe initial
position sensor (OP 3)
Sending end power signal of diluent syringe initial position
sensor (OP 5)
Receiving end feedback signal of relieve valve position sensor
(OP 6)
Sending end power signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)

Definition of J5

J5 connects to the PB2 connector of the motherboard, and is the interface used for the
stepping motor control and the position sensor signal detection.
Table 5-62 Stepping motor control interface-definition of J5
Pin

Definition

Note

M_SIN8

Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 8 (reserved)

VC_SEN10

Sending end power signal of autoloading position sensor (OP 10)

M_SIN11

Receiving end feedback signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)

VC_SEN13

Sending end power signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP 13)

M_SIN14

VC_SEN16

GND

Digital ground

NC

Empty

24V0

24V power supply

Receiving end feedback signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP


14)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y lower position sensor
(OP 16)

10
11
12
13

5-69

Hardware System
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

PGND

Power ground

33

VC_SEN9

Sending end power signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)

34

M_SIN10

35

VC_SEN12

36

M_SIN13

37

VC_SEN15

38

M_SIN16

39

GND

Digital ground

40

NC

Empty

41

M1_A

42

M1_AN

43

M1_B

44

M1_BN

29
30
31
32

Receiving end feedback signal of autoloading position sensor (OP


10)
Sending end power signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP 12)
Receiving end feedback signal of WBC bath position sensor (OP
13)
Sending end power signal of sample probe Y upper position sensor
(OP 15)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y lower position
sensor (OP 16)

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor


(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
5-70

Hardware System

45

M2_A

46

M2_AN

47

M2_B

48

M2_BN

49

M3_A

50

M3_AN

51

M3_B

52

M3_BN

53

M4_A

54

M4_AN

55

M4_B

56

M4_BN

57

M5_A

58

M5_AN

59

M5_B

60

M5_BN

61

M6_A

62

M6_AN

63

M6_B

64

M6_BN

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection


syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM

5-71

Hardware System
6, reserved)
65

M_SIN9

Receiving end feedback signal of close tube position sensor (OP 9)

66

VC_SEN11

Sending end power signal of position sensor 11 (reserved)

67

M_SIN12

68

VC_SEN14

69

M_SIN15

70

DCM

DC motor control signal (reserved)

71

GND

Digital ground

72

NC

Empty

73

M1_A

74

M1_AN

75

M1_B

76

M1_BN

77

M2_A

78

M2_AN

79

M2_B

80

M2_BN

81

M3_A

82

M3_AN

83

M3_B

84

M3_BN

85

M4_A

86

M4_AN

Receiving end feedback signal of DIFF bath position sensor (OP


12)
Sending end power signal of RBC bath position sensor (OP 14)
Receiving end feedback signal of sample probe Y upper position
sensor (OP 15)

Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample syringe motor


(SM 1)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample syringe motor
(SM 1)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample syringe
motor (SM 1)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sample injection
syringe motor (SM 2)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the sheath syringe motor
(SM 3)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor (SM
4)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
5-72

Hardware System

87

M4_B

88

M4_BN

89

M5_A

90

M5_AN

91

M5_B

92

M5_BN

93

M6_A

94

M6_AN

95

M6_B

96

M6_BN

Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor


(SM 4)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the lyse syringe motor
(SM 4)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the diluent syringe motor
(SM 5)
Connecting end A of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end AN of A-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)
Connecting end B of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM 6,
reserved)
Connecting end BN of B-phase winding of the reserved motor (SM
6, reserved)

Definition of J8

J8 is the interface used for communication debugging.

Definition of J9

J9 is the MCU debug interface (JTAG mode).


Table 5-63 FPGA debug interface-definition of J9
Pin

Name

Pin

Name

VDD

GND

GND

TCK

TMS

TDO

TDI

NC

GND

10

NC

Definition of J10

J10 is the interface used for communication debugging.

5-73

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-15 Assembly drawing of the drive board

5-74

Hardware System

5.3.3 Adjustment and Test Points

LED function definition


Table 5-64 LED definition
Indicator
D1
D2
D49
D50
D51
D52

Note
FPGA configuration status indicator. It turns on during FPGA configuration.
FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when FPGA works
normally.
24V power supply (24V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 24V power
supply is normal.
3.3V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power
supply is normal.
12V power supply (12V0) status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power
supply is normal.
5V power supply (VDD) status indicator. It turns on when the 5V analog
power supply is normal.

D65

MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 1s when MCU works normally.

D66

Working status indicator of optical system heater. It turns on during heating.

D67

Working status indicator of reaction bath (DIFF bath). It turns on during


heating.

Function definition of test points


Table 5-65 Test point definition
No.

Name

Pin

Note

TP1

PIN26 of U2

FPGA configuration signals F_NCONFIG

TP2

PIN28 of U2

TP3

PIN228 of U2

TP4

PIN50 of U2

Read signals of MCU external bus /RD

TP5

PIN20 of U2

FPGA interrupt request signals FPGA_INT

TP6

PIN73 of U2

Write signals of MCU external bus /WR

FPGA 24.5454MHz clock input signals


FPGA_CLK
Address latch enabling signals of MCU
external bus ALE

5-75

Hardware System
7

TP7

PIN11 of U2

TP8

1V5

TP9

SIO_IN

Data input signals of MCU valve control chip

10

TP10

SIO_CLK

Clock signals of MCU valve control chip

11

TP11

SIO_EN

Enabling signals of MCU valve control chip

12

TP12

SIO_LATCH

Data latch signals of MCU valve control chip

13

TP13

PIN17 of U10

14

TP14

PIN15 of U9

15

TP16

PIN15 of U21

16

TP17

PIN13 of U20

17

TP18

PIN17 of U20

18

TP19

PIN17 of U25

19

TP20

PIN16 of U26

20

TP21

PIN11 of U10

21

TP22

VDD

22

TP23

23

TP24

24

TP25

1V5

25

TP26

PIN1 of U32

26

TP27

ADC_VCC

27

TP28

ADC_12V

28

TP29

ADC_24V

29

TP30

PIN1 of U33

GND

FPGA reset signals F_RST


Voltage

of

+1.5VDC

power

supply

(1.50.075V)

Stepping pulse signals of sample probe X


motor STEP7
Stepping pulse signals of sample probe Y
motor STEP8
Stepping pulse signals of sample syringe
motor STEP1
Stepping pulse signals of sample injection
syringe motor STEP2
Stepping pulse signals of sheath syringe
motor STEP3
Stepping pulse signals of lyse syringe motor
STEP4
Stepping pulse signals of diluent syringe
motor STEP5
Stepping pulse signals of reserved motor
STEP6 (not used)
Voltage

of

+3.3VDC

power

supply

+1.5VDC

power

supply

detection

signals

(3.30.15V)
Digital ground
Voltage

of

(1.50.075V)
Ambient

temperature

(voltage) AMBINET_T
Detection signals of VCC+5VDC after
voltage-dividing 2.000.15V
Detection signals of 12V0(+12VDC) after
voltage-dividing 2.130.15V
Detection signals of 24V0(+24VDC) after
voltage-dividing 2.230.15V
Pressure
5-76

chamber

detection

signals

Hardware System
(voltage) PRESSURE_1ST
30

TP31

PIN7 of U33

31

TP34

PIN2 of U37

34

TP35

PIN100 of U35

35

TP36

PIN26 of U35

36

TP37

PIN99 of U35

37

TP38

PIN57 of U35

38

TP39

PIN6 of U45

39

TP40

PRTD_REF

40

TP41

PIN2 of U45

41

TP42

PIN3 of U45

42

TP43

PIN8 of U22

43

TP44

PIN8 of U23

44

TP45

PIN8 of U24

45

TP46

PIN8 of U29

46

TP47

PIN8 of U28

47

TP48

PIN8 of U27

48

TP49

PIN8 of U11

49

TP50

PIN8 of U13

Vacuum

chamber

detection

signals

(voltage) PRESSURE_2ST
Reference voltage of MCU analog-to-digital
module REFIN2.500.006V
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
channel 0
MCU 25.5454MHz clock input signals
CLKIN
Voltage of MCU digital-to-analog output
channel 1
MCU system clock output signals SYSCLK
Amplifier output signals of the temperature
collection module TEMPER_AD
Basic voltage of the amplifier input signals
of the temperature collection module
Reference voltage of temperature collection
module amplifier
Input voltage of temperature collection
module amplifier
Driving reference voltage of sample syringe
motor VREF1
Driving

reference

voltage

of

sample

injection syringe motor VREF2


Driving reference voltage of sheath syringe
motor VREF3
Driving reference voltage of lyse syringe
motor VREF4
Driving reference voltage of diluent syringe
motor VREF5
Driving reference voltage of reserved motor
VREF6 (not used)
Driving reference voltage of sample probe X
motor VREF7
Driving reference voltage of sample probe Y
motor VREF8

Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
5-77

Hardware System
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.

5.3.4 Disassembly and assembly method


Purpose
The drive board is a key component. Please maintain or replace the drive board immediately if
any error or damage occurs. Please follow the procedures to have the drive board replaced.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
Drive board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Remove the drive board from the main unit:

1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;


2. Open the left door;
3. Use your hand or cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two hand-tightened screws
from the bracket.

4. Use both of your hands to flip outward the two latches on both sides of the drive board,
and then draw the drive board out.

5-78

Hardware System

Figure 5-16 Assembly drawing of drive board-1


1---Hand-tightened screws

2---Drive board

Further disassembly of the drive board

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 5 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the drive board.

2. Remove the drive board from the bracket.

Figure 5-17 Assembly drawing of drive board-2


1---Drive board
3---Cross-recessed

2---Bracket
panhead

screw

M3x6 (with washer)


5-79

Hardware System

Assembly
Please assemble the data board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the drive board.
2. First ensure the power supply is cut off, then assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, then power on the analyzer.

3. Check if the indicators on the drive board are in the following status: 1) D49, D50 and D51
turn on; 2) D2 and D65 flash. You can also check the indicators in the self-test screen of
the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the driver board is replaced successfully;
otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.

4. Readjust the sample probe position as per Section 6.10.1 and save the result.

5.3.5 Troubleshooting

Error analysis and solutions


Errors related to the drive board are identified and handled by the host control software in the
form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the dive board can be handled automatically, while some need to be judged with
the help of the users or service engineers. When error is reported, the error No. and error
names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may appear on the
screen as the software help information.
When you check for errors, first ensure the board is well fixed and all the error-related
connections are properly connected. For example, when Sample probe action failed is
reported, you should check: 1) whether the sample probe assembly is properly connected to
the board; 2) whether the connecters are well connected (in case of bad connection, shut
down the analyzer and cut off the power supply, and then re-plug the connecters); 3)whether
the connection inside the sample probe assembly is proper; 4) whether the symbol on the
sensor connecting line corresponds to the sensor position; 5) whether the symbol on the motor
connecting line corresponds to the motor position (See 6.6.1 for how to disassemble the
sample probe assembly if necessary).
5-80

Hardware System
Only when you make sure that nothing is wrong with the connections can you remove the error
according to the recommended action in the following table. If the error still exists after the
error causes are found and new components are replaced, you need to replace the drive
board.
The error codes, error names and recommended solutions are listed in the following table.
Table 5-66 Troubleshooting errors with the drive board
Error code

Error name

Recommended

Error feature

action

FPGA does not allow the MCU write


data

into

the

valve-pump

data

register within 50ms, i.e. the serial


0100

Valve

output

failed

output status indication bit in the


register (which is used to judge the

Replace drive board

status of valves and pumps of


FPGA) is always 1. It might be FPGA
error or MCU read register error.
Valve NO. out
0101

of limit (greater

Download Valve NO. out of limit

than

(greater than 40 or equal to 0)

40

or

equal to 0)

Communication
abnormal. Please try
again.
1. X motor error, action

X motor failed
0201

to

move

to

target position

X motor does not move to the


pre-set target position after action

is interfered.
2.

position

motor

target

photocoupler

error.
X motor failed
to
0202

move

home

to

position

after

1. X motor error, action


X motor is not at the home position
after initialization

initialization

X motor failed to leave home

position

position when initializing

after

initialization

0204

position

motor

initial

photocoupler

1. X motor error, action

to leave home

Adjusting

2.

error.

X motor failed
0203

is interfered.

is interfered.
2.

position

motor

initial

photocoupler

error.
X

X motor does not move to target

motor to target

position after the adjusting command

position failed

is executed.

5-81

1. X motor error, action


is interfered.
2.

position

motor

target

photocoupler

Hardware System
error.
Adjusting
0205

motor back to
home

position

failed
X

motor to leave
home

position

failed
X
0207

motor

adjustment
X

motor

adjusting steps
out of limit
X

0209

is interfered.

position after the adjusting command

2.

is executed

position

motor

initial

photocoupler

1. X motor error, action


X motor does not leave home

is interfered.

position after the adjusting command

2.

is executed

position

motor

initial

photocoupler

error.

error
0208

X motor does not back to home

error.

Adjusting
0206

1. X motor error, action

X motor adjustment is out of limit [1,

Re-send the X motor

9]

adjusting command

X motor adjusting steps at the target

Adjust the X motor

position are out of limit [-20, 20]

again

motor

The position in the X motor adjusting

end

end command disagrees with the

adjusting

position error

pre-send adjusting position

Re-send the X motor


adjusting command
1. Y motor error, action

Y motor failed
0211

to

move

to

target position

Y motor does not move to the


pre-set target position after action

is interfered.
2.

position

motor

target

photocoupler

error.
1. Y motor error, action
Y motor failed
0212

to initialize to
upper position

Y motor is not at the upper position


after initialization

is interfered.
2.

position

motor

upper

photocoupler

error.
1. Y motor error, action
Y motor failed
0213

to initialize to
lower position

Y motor does not move to

lower

position when initializing

is interfered.
2.

position

motor

lower

photocoupler

error.
1. Y motor error, action
Y

Y motor does not move to target

is interfered.

motor to target

position after the adjusting command

2.

position failed

is executed.

position

Adjusting
0214

error.
5-82

motor

target

photocoupler

Hardware System
1. Y motor error, action
Y

Y motor does not back to upper

is interfered.

motor to upper

position after the adjusting command

2.

position failed

is executed

position

Adjusting
0215

motor

upper

photocoupler

error.
Adjusting
0216

motor to leave
upper

position

failed
Y
0217

motor

error
0218

motor

adjusting steps
out of limit
Y

0219

adjusting

0220

is interfered.

position after the adjusting command

2.

is executed

position

Y motor adjusting steps at the target

Adjust the Y motor

position are out of limit [-63,63]

again

end command disagrees with the


pre-send adjusting position

probe
is

adjust

sample probe

0226

sample

probe command after

finished.

the

the

sample

probe

upward/downward/leftward/rightward
by one step before sending the
The action time is longer than the

overtime

download time.

X motor action
forbidden

match

current position
0225

the

X motor or Y motor action is not

X motor action

not

adjusting command

sample

probe

action is finished

X motor does
0224

Re-send the Y motor

Send

adjusting command.

0223

photocoupler

adjusting command

Can not send the command to move

0222

upper

6]

end

assembly

Cannot

motor

Re-send the Y motor

The position in the Y motor adjusting

working

0221

Y motor adjustment is out of limit [1,

motor

position error
Sample

Y motor does not leave upper

error.

adjustment
Y

1. Y motor error, action

You can adjust the


sample
after

probe
the

only

adjusting

command is sent.

X motor is not at the photocoupler

Move the Y motor to

position or Y motor is not at the

upper

upper photocoupler position

position

X motor current position does not


match the photocoupler position

photocoupler

Initialize the X motor

Y motor action

The action time is longer than the

overtime

download time.

X motor action

X motor is not at the photocoupler

Move the X motor to

forbidden

position

the
5-83

photocoupler

Hardware System
position
Y motor does
0227

not

match

current position
Y motor failed
0228

to

pierce

to

lower position
Y motor failed
0229

to

pierce

to

upper position
X
0230

motor

photocoupler
error
Sample

0231

RBC

Y motor current position does not


match the photocoupler position
Y motor is not at the lower position
after piercing
Y motor failed to back to upper
position when piercing

Initialize the Y motor

Pierce again

Pierce again

X motor photocoupler might be

Replace

damaged

photocoupler

RBC bath photocoupler might be

Replace

damaged

photocoupler

WBC bath photocoupler might be

Replace

damaged

photocoupler

DIFF bath photocoupler might be

Replace

damaged

photocoupler

Y motor photocoupler might be

Replace

damaged

photocoupler

motor

probe
bath

photocoupler

RBC

bath

error
Sample
0232

WBC

probe
bath

photocoupler

WBC

bath

error
Sample
0233

DIFF

probe
bath

photocoupler

DIFF

bath

error
Y
0234

motor

photocoupler
error
Sample

0235

motor

probe

upper

Upper

photocoupler

photocoupler

damaged

might

be

Replace

the

upper

photocoupler

error
Sample
0236

probe

lower

Lower

photocoupler

damaged

photocoupler

might

be

Replace

the

lower

photocoupler

error
Sampling syringe does not finish the

Sampling
0300

syringe
working

is

previous action when it is requested


for initializing, resetting, aspirating or
dispensing.
5-84

Command is sent early


while

the

sampling

syringe is still working.

Hardware System
1.

Sampling

syringe

photocoupler error (if


Sampling
0301

The detected photocoupler signals

syringe

are without any change before and

photocoupler

after action.

abnormal

sampling

syringe

motor moves)
2.

Sampling

motor

syringe

error

sampling

(if

syringe

motor dose not move)


1.

Sampling

syringe

photocoupler error (if

0302

Sampling

After aspirating or dispensing, the

syringe

sampling syringe should be at the

aspirating

or

home position, but the position

dispensing

detected

action failed 1

disagrees

by

the

photocoupler

the sampling syringe


motor is at the home
position)
2.

Sampling

motor

error

sampling

syringe
(if

the

syringe

motor is not at the


home position)
1.

Sampling

syringe

photocoupler error (if

0303

Sampling

After aspirating or dispensing, the

syringe

sampling syringe should not be at

aspirating

or

the home position, but the position

dispensing

detected

action failed 2

disagrees

by

the

photocoupler

the

sample

syringe

motor is not at the


home position)
2.

Sampling

motor

error

sampling

syringe
(if

the

syringe

motor is at the home


position)
Sampling
syringe
0304

aspirating

or

dispensing
forbidden
Sampling
syringe

0305

dispensing
action
forbidden 2

Sampling

sampling syringe should be at the

photocoupler error (if

home
position

action

aspirating

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

or

position,

but

detected

syringe

the

actual

the sampling syringe

by

the

motor is at the home

photocoupler disagrees

position)

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

Sampling

sampling syringe should not be at

photocoupler error (if

the home position, but the actual

the sampling syringe

position

motor is not at the

detected

photocoupler disagrees

5-85

by

the

home position)

syringe

Hardware System
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with
Sample syringe
0306

aspirate volume
over range

the sampling syringe


Requested

volume

aspirated

volume > maximum aspirate volume

aspirating

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with
the sampling syringe

Sample syringe
0307

dispense

aspirating
Requested

volume

over

volume

>

aspirated

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming

volume

overflow at the fluidics

range

debugging phase and


note the volume add
up error.
Sampling
0308

syringe

action

overtime

0310

The action time is longer than the


download time.

Sample

Sample injection syringe does not

Command is sent early

injection

finish the previous action when it is

while

requested for initializing, resetting,

injection syringe is still

aspirating or dispensing.

working.

syringe

is

working

1.

Sample

syringe
error

Sample
0311

injection

The detected photocoupler signals

syringe

are without any change before and

photocoupler

after action.

the

sample

injection

photocoupler
(if

sample

injection syringe motor


moves)
2.

Sample

injection

syringe motor error (if

abnormal

sample

injection

syringe motor does not


move)
Sample

After aspirating or dispensing, the

injection
0312

syringe should be at the home

syringe
aspirating
dispensing

or

position, but the position detected by


the photocoupler disagrees

5-86

1.

Sample

syringe
error

injection

photocoupler
(if

sample

injection syringe is at
the home position)

Hardware System
action failed 1

2.

Sample

injection

syringe motor error (if


sample

injection

syringe is not at the


home position)
1.

Sample

syringe
Sample

0313

error

injection

photocoupler
(if

sample

injection

After aspirating or dispensing, the

injection syringe is not

syringe

syringe should not be at the home

at the home position)

position, but the position detected by

2.

the photocoupler disagrees

syringe motor error (if

aspirating

or

dispensing
action failed 2

Sample

sample

injection
injection

syringe is at the home


position)
Sample
injection

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

syringe
0314

aspirating

or

dispensing

syringe should be at the home


position, but the position detected by
the photocoupler disagrees

action

Sample

injection

syringe

photocoupler

error

(if

sample

injection syringe is at
the home position)

forbidden 1
Sample
injection

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

syringe
0315

aspirating

or

dispensing

syringe should not be at the home


position, but the position detected by
the photocoupler disagrees

action

Sample

injection

syringe

photocoupler

error

(if

sample

injection syringe is not


at the home position)

forbidden 2
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with

Sample

the sampling syringe

injection
0316

syringe aspirate
volume

over

Requested

volume

aspirated

volume > maximum aspirate volume

aspirating

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming

range

overflow at the fluidics


debugging phase.

Sample
0317

injection
syringe

Requested

volume

volume

>

aspirated

Check and make sure


nothing is wrong with
the sampling syringe

5-87

Hardware System
dispense

aspirating

volume

over

and

dispensing action; then

range

consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.

Sample
0318

injection
syringe

The action time is longer than the


action

download time.

overtime

0320

sheath

fluid

syringe

is

working

Sheath fluid syringe does not finish


the previous action when it is
requested for initializing, resetting,
aspirating or dispensing.

Command is sent early


while the sheath fluid
syringe is still working.
1. Sheath fluid syringe
photocoupler error (if

Sheath
0321

fluid

syringe

The detected photocoupler signals


are without any change before and

photocoupler

after action.

abnormal

sheath

fluid

syringe

motor moves)
2. Sheath fluid syringe
motor error (if sheath
fluid

syringe

motor

dose not move)


1. Sheath fluid syringe
photocoupler error (if
Sheath

fluid

syringe
0322

aspirating

or

dispensing
action failed 1

sheath

fluid

syringe

After aspirating or dispensing, the

motor is at the home

syringe should be at the home

position)

position, but the position detected by

2. Sheath fluid syringe

the photocoupler disagrees

motor error (if sheath


fluid syringe motor is
not

at

the

home

position)
1. Sheath fluid syringe
Sheath

fluid

syringe
0323

aspirating

or

dispensing
action failed 2

After aspirating or dispensing, the


syringe should not be at the home
position, but the position detected by
the photocoupler disagrees

photocoupler error (if


sheath

fluid

syringe

motor is not at the


home position)
2. Sheath fluid syringe
motor error (if sheath

5-88

Hardware System
fluid syringe motor is
at the home position)
Sheath

fluid
Before aspirating or dispensing, the

Sheath

syringe should be at the home

photocoupler error (if

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

sample syringe motor

action

the photocoupler disagrees

is at the home position)

syringe
0324

aspirating

or

fluid

syringe

forbidden 1
Sheath

fluid
Before aspirating or dispensing, the

syringe
0325

aspirating

or

syringe should not be at the home

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

action

the photocoupler disagrees

Sheath

fluid

syringe

photocoupler error (if


sample syringe motor
is not at the home
position)

forbidden 2

Check and make sure


nothing is wrong with
Sheath
0326

fluid

the sampling syringe

syringe aspirate

Requested

volume

volume > maximum aspirate volume

over

volume

aspirated

range

aspirating

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with

Sheath
syringe
0327

aspirating
Requested

dispense
volume

the sampling syringe

fluid

over

volume

>

aspirated

volume

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming
overflow at the fluidics

range

debugging phase and


note the volume add
up error.

0328

Sheath

fluid

syringe

action

overtime

The action time is longer than the


download time.
Lyse syringe does not finish the

0330

Lyse syringe is

previous action when it is requested

working

for initializing, resetting, aspirating or


dispensing.

0331

Lyse

syringe

The detected photocoupler signals


5-89

Command is sent early


while the lyse syringe
is still working.
1.

Lyse

syringe

Hardware System
photocoupler

are without any change before and

photocoupler error (if

abnormal

after action.

the lyse syringe motor


moves)
2. Lyse syringe motor
error

(if

the

lyse

syringe motor does not


move)
1.

Lyse

syringe

photocoupler error (if


After aspirating or dispensing, the

the lyse syringe motor

syringe should be at the home

is at the home position)

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

2. Lyse syringe motor

action failed 1

the photocoupler disagrees

error

Lyse
0332

syringe

aspirating

or

(if

the

lyse

syringe motor is not at


the home position)
1.

Lyse

syringe

photocoupler error (if


Lyse
0333

syringe

aspirating

or

After aspirating or dispensing, the


syringe should not be at the home

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

action failed 2

the photocoupler disagrees

the lyse syringe motor


is not at the home
position)
2. Lyse syringe motor
error

(if

the

lyse

syringe motor is at the


home position)
Lyse

syringe

aspirating
0334

or

dispensing
action
forbidden 1
Lyse

syringe

aspirating
0335

or

dispensing
action
forbidden 2

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

Lyse

syringe should be at the home

photocoupler error (if

position, but the position detected by

the lyse syringe motor

the photocoupler disagrees

is at the home position)

Before aspirating or dispensing, the


syringe should not be at the home
position, but the position detected by
the photocoupler disagrees

Lyse

syringe

syringe

photocoupler error (if


the lyse syringe motor
is not at the home
position)
Check and make sure

Lyse
0336

syringe

aspirate volume
over range

nothing is wrong with


Requested

volume

aspirated

volume > maximum aspirate volume

the sampling syringe


aspirating

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming
5-90

Hardware System
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with
the sampling syringe
Lyse
0337

syringe

dispense
volume

aspirating
Requested

over

volume

>

aspirated

volume

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming

range

overflow at the fluidics


debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.

0338

Lyse

syringe

action overtime

The action time is longer than the


download time.
Diluent syringe does not finish the

0340

Diluent syringe

previous action when it is requested

is working

for initializing, resetting, aspirating or


dispensing.

Command is sent early


while

the

diluent

syringe is still working.


1.

Diluent

syringe

photocoupler error (if

0341

Diluent syringe

The detected photocoupler signals

photocoupler

are without any change before and

abnormal

after action.

the

diluent

syringe

motor moves)
2.

Diluent

motor

syringe

error

(if

the

diluent syringe motor


dose not move)
1.

Diluent

syringe

photocoupler error (if


the

0342

diluent

syringe

Diluent syringe

After aspirating or dispensing, the

motor is at the home

aspirating

syringe should be at the home

position)

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

2.

action failed 1

the photocoupler disagrees

motor

or

Diluent
error

syringe
(if

the

diluent syringe motor is


not

at

the

home

position)

0343

Diluent syringe

After aspirating or dispensing, the

1.

aspirating

syringe should not be at the home

photocoupler error (if

dispensing

position, but the position detected by

the

action failed 2

the photocoupler disagrees

motor is not at the

or

5-91

Diluent
diluent

syringe
syringe

Hardware System
home position)
2.

Diluent

motor

syringe

error

(if

the

diluent syringe motor is


at the home position)
Diluent syringe
aspirating
0344

or

dispensing

the photocoupler disagrees

forbidden 1
Diluent syringe
0345

syringe should be at the home


position, but the position detected by

action

aspirating

Before aspirating or dispensing, the

or

dispensing

Before aspirating or dispensing, the


syringe should not be at the home
the photocoupler disagrees

forbidden 2

syringe

photocoupler error (if


the

diluent

syringe

motor is at the home


position)

position, but the position detected by

action

Diluent

Diluent

syringe

photocoupler error (if


the

diluent

syringe

motor is not at the


home position)
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with

Diluent syringe
0346

aspirate volume
over range

the sampling syringe


Requested

volume

aspirated

volume > maximum aspirate volume

aspirating

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming
overflow at the fluidics
debugging phase.
Check and make sure
nothing is wrong with
the sampling syringe

Diluent syringe
0347

dispense
volume

aspirating
Requested

over

volume

>

aspirated

volume

and

dispensing action; then


consider programming

range

overflow at the fluidics


debugging phase and
note the volume add
up error.

0348

Diluent syringe

The action time is longer than the

action overtime

download time.

Automatic
0390

Start testing the motors before the

testing

automatic

command
Reaction

command

is

received.

forbidden
0401

testing

bath

First

start

the

automatic

testing

command, and then


test the motors.

The reaction bath temp. setup is out


5-92

Re-set

the

reaction

Hardware System

0402

temp. setup out

of

the

MCU

pre-set

range

of limit

[30,50]

Optical system

The optical system temp. setup is

temp. setup out

out of the MCU pre-set range

of limit

[30,50]

bath temperature

Re-set

the

optical

system temperature
1. Check whether the
heater of the reaction

0403

Reaction

bath

temp. error

Reaction bath temperature is out of


the set range

bath is well connected.


2. Check whether the
temperature collection
channel of the reaction
bath is normal.
1. Check whether the
heater of the optical
system

0404

is

well

Optical system

Optical system temperature is out of

connected.

temp. error

the set range

2. Check whether the


temperature collection
channel of the optical
system is normal.

Reaction
0405

bath

temp.

Compensation

compensation

complement code dont match

value

and

ones

Optical system

0406

Compensation

value

and

compensation

complement code dont match

ones

0407

compensation
error
Reaction

0408

bath

temp.
compensation
out of limit
Optical system

0409

temp.
compensation
out of limit

Compensation

value

and

bath

reaction
temp.

Reset

the

system

optical
temp.

compensation

error
Ambient temp.

the

compensation

error
temp.

Reset

ones

Reset

the

ambient

complement code dont match

temp. compensation

Reaction bath temp. compensation

Reset

out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7

bath

compensation

Optical system temp. compensation

Reset

out of the set range [-12.7, 12.7

system

compensation

5-93

the

reaction
temp.

the

optical
temp.

Hardware System
Ambient temp.

040a

compensation
out of limit

Ambient temp. compensation out of

Reset

the set range [-12.7, 12.7]

temp. compensation

the

ambient

1. The actual ambient


temperature is out of
the working range.
0501

Ambient temp.

Ambient temperature is out of the set

2. Check whether the

abnormal

range

temperature
transducer

and

measurement

the
circuit

work normally.
1. Check whether the
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
whether the pressure

Controlling
0601

pressure

The pressure in the chamber can not

pump works normally.

chamber

reach the target range within the

2. Check whether the

pressure

specified fluidics time.

pressure sensor works


normally and whether

failed

the pressure detection


signals of the MCU are
normal.
1. Check whether the
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
whether the vacuum
Controlling
0602

vacuum
chamber
vacuum failed

The vacuum in the chamber can not


reach the target range within the
specified fluidics time.

pump and valve 30


and 31 works normally.
2. Check whether the
pressure sensor works
normally and whether
the pressure detection
signals of the MCU are
normal.

Adjusting
0603

pressure
chamber
pressure failed

0604

Adjusting

Wait and then send the


The pressure in the chamber is

adjusting

being controlled. Can not send the

again

adjusting command

previous

command
after

the

pressure

controlling is done.
The vacuum in the chamber is being
5-94

Wait and then send the

Hardware System
vacuum

controlled.

chamber

adjusting command

Can

not

send

the

vacuum failed

adjusting
again

command
after

previous

the
vacuum

controlling is done.
1. Check whether the
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
whether the pressure

Pressure
0605

chamber

The pressure in the chamber is out

pressure out of

of the set range

limit

pump works normally.


2. Check whether the
pressure sensor works
normally and whether
the pressure detection
signals of the MCU are
normal.
1. Check whether the
pneumatic connection
is well connected and
whether the vacuum

Vacuum
0606

pump and valve 30

chamber

The vacuum in the chamber is out of

and 31 works normally.

vacuum out of

the set range

2. Check whether the

limit

pressure sensor works


normally and whether
the pressure detection
signals of the MCU are
normal.

Pressure
chamber
0607

The pressure control of the pressure

pressure
control

range

chamber is of negative range.

Re-send

the

control

command of positive
range

error
Vacuum
0608

chamber

The vacuum control of the vacuum

vacuum control

chamber is of positive range

range error
FPGA
0701

download mark
error

0702

FPGA

Wrong download mark. It is not ':'


start
The download command is not
5-95

Re-send

the

control

command of negative
range

Re-download
Re-download

Hardware System
download

defined.

command error
Read
0703

all

configuration
chip

content

Finish reading data

finished
Data write out

The data written for a single time

of limit

exceeds the maximum of 32 digits

Data write and

The

head-address

head-address exceed the maximum

over range

content of one page (256 bytes).

0706

Write forbidden

Failed to write the configuration chip

0707

Write overtime

Write delay exceeds 10ms

0704

0705

data

written

plus

Re-download

the
Re-download
Send

the

enabling

command first
Re-download
1. Check the EEPROM
circuit

for

any

missing-soldered
component; check the
EEPROM pin for short
0731

circuit and missolder,

Write-in
EEPROM error

Failed to write data into EEPROM

etc.
2. If short circuit is not
found

and

components
properly

soldered,

all
are
it

indicates the EEPROM


is damaged.
Functional code
0801

in the control
code error

0802

0803

0804
0805

Data

length

error

The functional code is not defined in


the communication rules.

again.
Communication

corresponding data length of the

abnormal. Please try

current command label

again.

The command label is not defined in

error

the communication rules.


code

abnormal. Please try

The data length mismatches the

Command label

Check

Communication

The check code mismatches the

error

calculated one

End code error

The end code is not the one defined


5-96

Communication
abnormal. Please try
again.
Communication
abnormal. Please try
again.
Communication

Hardware System
in the communication rules. (016)

abnormal. Please try


again.

Identity code in
0806

the control code


error
None-sequence

0817

pack

analysis

error

The identity code is not defined in


the communication rules.
Unable

to

analyze

Communication
abnormal. Please try
again.

the

none-sequence pack command

Re-send

the

correct

command

Troubleshooting special errors


1. Troubleshooting the abnormal pneumatic pressure

If a certain pressure value is abnormal, check the related pumps, valves and airway
for leakage.

If the pneumatic system is normal, then the error should be caused by the damaged
pressure sensor on the drive board. Please replace the sensor or the drive board.

The pressure signals are outputted by the volumetric board. See the following table
for the voltage and pressure.
Table 5-67 Voltage signals and the corresponding pressures

Pressure

Pressure

channel

range

Pressure
chamber

2.54kPa

Test point

Relation

between

sensor

output voltage and pressure

Note
P

TP30

represents

pressure, and
its unit is kPa.

Vacuum

-8

chamber

-40kPa

P = (Vout 1.25) 250


TP31

Volt
represents the
voltage of the
test point, and
its unit is V

2. Troubleshooting the abnormal mechanism action


To observe and troubleshoot the abnormal mechanism actions, the service engineers are
usually needed. When errors of this kind happen, please be sure to troubleshoot them as per
the above-mentioned recommended action and the following procedures.

Check whether the error-related mechanisms (such as motors) can move. If the
mechanisms do not move, then the error should be caused by the abnormal executive
components, such as disconnected or damaged motor. If nothing is wrong with them, then
5-97

Hardware System
the error should be caused by the damaged drive board, so the driver board should be
replaced.

If the mechanisms can move, check whether they move in position and whether they are
jammed by lines or other mechanisms during the movement. For transmissive
photocoupler, if the baffle enters above 2/3 photocoupler, it is baffled and moves is in
position.

If nothing is wrong with the mechanism action, consider the photocoupler error. Replace
the photocoupler.

If errors still remain after the photocoupler is replaced, then it should be caused by the
error components on the driver board. Replace the driver board.

5-98

Hardware System

5.4 Autoloader board


5.4.1 Introduction
The autoloader board is to feed and mix blood samples, as well as scan barcode information
on tubes.

5.4.2 Board Composition


Function

Stepping motor control

Electromagnet control

Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection

Scanner control

Parameter storage

Block diagram
EEPROM

Clock

Scanner

Solenoid

UART1

C8051F020

FPGA
Configuration
Device

Reset

FPGA Reset
Power
Board

D 5V
P 12V
P 24V

Digital 5V

LDO

3.3V

3.3V

LDO

1.5V

SMXM

SMZM

SMRM
Sample Feed

SFXM

SFYM

Sensor
Status

Config

Config

Reset

IRQ

Sample Mix

1
Step Motor Control

BUS

EP1C3T14
4
Interface

JTAG UART0

Mother Board

RS422

Clock

Sensor

Figure 5-18 Block diagram of the autoloader board

Description

Stepping motor drive

The autoloader board provide the drive control to the following five stepping motors:
X-co motor of the mix mechanism
Z-co motor of the mix mechanism
Mix motor
5-99

Hardware System
X-co loading motor
Y-co feeding motor
The stepping motor drive is a type of bipolar consist-current half-step drive, and there are
position sensors corresponding to the stepping motors to detect their positions.

Electromagnet control

The electromagnet is used to control the process of opening the sample compartment door
(manual close).

Built-in scanner control

The built-in scanner control is used to read barcodes on tubes and tube racks. The autoloader
board controls the built-in scanner through MCU, and the UART communication between MCU
and the built-in scanner through Serial port 1.

Position sensor and sensitive switch status detection

There are 13 position sensor and 1 sensitive switch on the autoloader. The status of the
sensors and switch is detected by FPGA, and MCU will check the status value of the FPGA
internal storage when necessary.

Parameter storage

As there may be manufacture or installation errors, it is necessary to adjust the initial positions
for the X-co motor of the mix mechanism and the mix motor. The adjusted position parameters
will be stored on the autoloader board.

Interface definition
The autoloader is configured with 14 external interfaces, shown as follows.
Table 5-68 External ports on the autoloader board
Interface
J1
J2

Number of pins

Function
FPGA

configuration

interface (AS mode)


FPGA debugging interface
(JTAG)

10
6

Description
FPGA
downloading
FPGA
debugging

J3

Electromagnet interface

J4

Reserved

Not applied to

J5

Power interface

the unit

J6
J7

Mix

mechanism

sensor

interface
Feeding

unit

sensor

interface 1

5-100

20
20

Hardware System
Feeding

J8

unit

sensor

20

interface 2

J10

Reserved

MCU

J11

configuration

/
/

10

interface

J12

Communication interface

J14

Feeding motor interface

Control the X-co motor and


J15

/
8

Z-co motor of the mix


mechanism

J16

Mix motor interface

P1

Built-in scanner interface

15

Definition of J1:

J1 is the FPGA configuration interface (AS mode).


Table 5-69 Definition of the FPGA configuration interface
Pin
1
3
5
7
9

Name

Pin

F_DCLK
F_CONFDONE
F_CONFIG
F_DATA
F_ASDO

2
4
6
8
10

Name
AGND
VDD
F_NCE
F_NCSC
GND

Definition of J3:

J3 is the electromagnet interface.


Table 5-70 Definition of the electromagnet interface

Pin

Name

Description

12V0

solenoid

Working power supply for the


electromagnet
Control
signal
for
the
electromagnet

Mark
on
Wire
SOLENOID

Level

Note

12V

Current:1A

Definition of J5:
Table 5-71 Definition of the power interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6

Name
D+5V
P+12V
P+24V
GND
PGND
PGND

Description
5V power supply (digital)
12V power supply (power)
24V power supply (power)
Digital ground
Power ground
Power ground
5-101

Hardware System

Definition of J6:

J6 is the mix mechanism sensor interface.


Table 5-72 Definition of the mix mechanism sensor interface
Pin
1

Name
V_X_START

X_START

3
4
5

GND
GND
V_X_END

X_END

7
8
9

GND
GND
V_Z_START

10

Z_START

11
12
13

GND
GND
V_Z_END

14

Z_END

15
16
17

GND
GND
V_R_START

18

R_START

19
20
21

GND
GND
V_SYRINGE

22

SYRINGE

23
24

GND
GND

Description
Sending end power signal of
X-co initial position
Photocoupler signal of X-co
initial position
Ground
Ground
Sending end power signal of
X-co end position
Photocoupler signal of X-co
end position
Ground
Ground
Sending end power signal of
Z-co initial position
Photocoupler signal of Z-co
initial position
Ground
Ground
Sending end power signal of
Z-co end position
Photocoupler signal of Z-co
end position
Ground
Ground
Sending end power signal of
mix mechanism initial position
Photocoupler signal of mix
mechanism initial position

Sending end power signal of


the sampling position
Photocoupler signal of the
sampling position
Ground
Ground

Definition of J7:

J7 is the feeding sensor interface.

5-102

Mark on Wire

Note

MX_START

Transmissive
sensor

MX_END

Transmissive
sensor

MZ_START

Transmissive
sensor

MZ_END

Transmissive
sensor

MR_START

Transmissive
sensor

Preserved

Transmissive
sensor

Hardware System
Table 5-73 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 1
Pin

Name

Description

V_X_START

Sending end power signal of the


photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
initial position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
initial position
Sending end power signal of the
photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
end position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for X-co feeding motor
end position
Sending end power signal of the
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for Y-co feeding motor
initial position
Sending end power signal of the right
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
Ground
Receiving end power signal of the right
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
Sending end power signal of the left
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
Ground
Receiving end signal of the left
photocoupler for Y-co feeding
Sending end power signal of the
photocoupler for unloading initial
position
Ground
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for unloading initial
position
Ground
Sensitive switch for X-co loading ready
position

3
5

GND
X_START

V_ X_END

4
6

GND
X_END

V_Y_START

9
11

GND
Y_START

V_Y_RIGHT

10
12

GND
Y_RIGHT

13

V_Y_LEFT

15
17

GND
Y_LEFT

14

V_UL_START

16
18

GND
UL_START

19
20

GND
X_READY

Definition of J8:

J8 is the other feeding sensor interface.


5-103

Mark
on
Wire
FX_START

Note

Transmissive
sensor

FX_END
Transmissive
sensor

FY_START

Transmissive
sensor

FY_RIGHT
Transmissive
sensor

FY_LEFT
Transmissive
sensor

F_UL_START
Transmissive
sensor

FX_READY

Sensitive
switch

Hardware System
Table 5-74 Definition of the feeding sensor interface 2
Pin

Name

Description

V_Y_READY

3
5

GND
VCC

Y_READY

V_UL_FULL

4
6

GND
VCC

UL_FULL

V_TUBE

11

GND

Sending end power signal of the Y-co


feeding ready photocoupler
Ground
Receiving end power signal of the Y-co
feeding ready photocoupler
Receiving end signal of the Y-co feeding
ready photocoupler
Sending
end
power
signal
of
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
Ground
Receiving end power signal of
photocoupler detecting full unloading
platform
Signal of photocoupler detecting full
unloading platform
Sending end power signal of tube
detecting photocoupler
Ground

13

VCC

15
10

TUBE
VT_RACK

12
14

GND
VCC

16
17

RACK
VC_DOOR

18

DOOR

19
20

GND
NC

Mark
Wire

Receiving end power signal of tube


detecting photocoupler
Tube detecting photocoupler signal
Sending end power signal of sample
volume sensor
Ground
Receiving end power signal of sample
volume sensor
Sample volume sensor signal
Sending end signal of sample
compartment door detecting sensor
Receiving
end
signal
of
the
photocoupler for initial unloading
position
Ground
Floating

Definition of J11:

J11 is the MCU configuration interface.

5-104

on

Note

Reserved

Reflective
photocoupler

F_UL_FULL

Reflective
photocoupler

F_TUBE

Reflective
photocoupler

Reserved

Reflective
photocoupler

DOOR

Reflective
photocoupler

Hardware System
Table 5-75 Definition of the MCU configuration interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Name
VDD
GND
GND
TCK
TMS
TDO
TDI
NC
GND
NC

Description
Power signal
Ground
Ground
JTAG clock
JTAG mode selection signal
JTAG output data signal
JTAG input data signal
Floating
Ground
Floating

Definition of J12:

J12 is the communication interface.


Table 5-76 Definition of the communication interface
Pin
1
2
3
4

Name
RX+
RXTX+
TX-

Description
Serial data receiving end
Serial data receiving end
Serial data receiving end
Serial data receiving end

Definition of J14:

J14 is the feeding motor interface.


Table 5-77 Definition of the feeding motor interface
Pin

Name

Description

X_BN

Control signal of Phase A, X-co


loading motor
Control signal of Phase AN,
X-co loading motor
Control signal of Phase B, X-co
loading motor
Control signal of Phase BN,
X-co loading motor
Control signal of Phase A, Y-co
feeding motor
Control signal of Phase AN,
Y-co feeding motor
Control signal of Phase B, Y-co
feeding motor
Control signal of Phase BN,
Y-co feeding motor

X_B

X_AN

X_A

Y_BN

Y_B

Y_AN

Y_A

Mark on Wire

5-105

SFXM

SFYM

Hardware System

Definition of J15:

J15 is the control interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix mechanism.
Table 5-78 Definition of the interface of X-co motor and Z-co motor for the mix
mechanism

Pin

Name

Description

Mark on Wire

X_BN

X_B

X_AN

X_A

Z_BN

Z_B

Z_AN

Z_A

Control signal of Phase BN,


manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase B,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase AN,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase A,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase BN,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase B,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase AN,
manipulator motor
Control signal of Phase A,
manipulator motor

X-co
SMXM
X-co
X-co
X-co
Z-co
Z-co

SMZM

Z-co
Z-co

Definition of J16:

J16 is the mix motor interface.


Table 5-79 Definition of the mix motor interface

Pin

Name

Description

R_BN

Control
motor
Control
motor
Control
motor
Control
motor

R_B

R_AN

R_A

Mark on Wire

signal of Phase BN, mix


SMRM
signal of Phase B, mix
signal of Phase AN, mix
signal of Phase A, mix

Definition of P1:

P1 is the built-in scanner interface.

5-106

Hardware System
Table 5-80 Definition of the built-in scanner interface
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Name
VCC
TXD
RXD
GND
NC
CTS
OUTPUT1
\
Trigger
RTS
OUTPUT3
\
Chassis
OUTPUT2
NC

Description
Power signal
Serial data receiving end
Serial data sending end
Signal ground
Floating
Sending ready signal
Scanner out put signal 1
\
Trigger signal
Sending request signal
Scanner out put signal 3
\
Shielding ground
Scanner out put signal 2
Floating

5-107

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-19 Assembly drawing of the autoloader

5-108

Hardware System

5.4.3 Adjustment and Test Points


LED function definition
Table 5-81 LED definition
Indicator
D3
D4
D5
D25
D26

Description
12V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 12V power supply is
normal
5V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 5V power supply is
normal
3.3V power supply status indicator. It turns on when the 3.3V power supply is
normal
MCU working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when MCU works
normally
FPGA working status indicator. It flashes every 0.5s when FPGA works
normally

Function definition of test points


Table 5-82 Test point definition
No.

Name

Pin

Note

TP1

PIN3 of X1

24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output


signal, FPGA working clock

TP2

PIN47 of U2

RD signals of MCU

TP3

PIN62 of U2

WR signals of MCU

TP4

PIN10 of U2

ALE signals of MCU

TP5

PIN28 of U2

FPGA reset signals

TP6

PIN5 of J1

FPGA configuration start signal

TP7

VCC

+5VDC voltage50.25V

TP8

12V0

+12VDC voltage (121.2V)

TP9

24V0

+24VDC voltage241.2V

10

TP10

VDD

+3.3VDC voltage3.30.15V

11

TP11

GND

12

TP12

GND

13

TP13

1V5

+1.5VDC voltage1.50.05V

14

TP15

TUBE

Tube detection photocoupler output signal


(0.4V when blocked, and 0.2V unblocked)

15

TP18

PIN3 of X2

24.4545M crystal oscillator clock output


signal, MCU working clock

5-109

Hardware System
16

TP21

PIN12 of U16

Stepping pulse signals of Y-co feeding


motor

17

TP23

PIN12 of U18

Stepping pulse signals of X-co feeding


motor

18

TP24

PIN12 of U22

Stepping pulse signals of Z-co mix motor

19

TP25

PIN12 of U23

Stepping pulse signals of X-co mix motor

20

TP26

PIN12 of U24

Stepping pulse signals of the mix motor

Key definition
The reset switch S1 on the drive board is used to reset the drive board manually. Press the
reset switch to reset the MCU and FPGA.

5.4.4 Disassembly and assembly method


Purpose
The autoloader board is a key component. You should maintain or replace the board
immediately if any error or damage occurs. Follow the procedures to have the autoloader
board replaced.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;
2. Open the left door;
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 panhead screws fixing the
shielding box, and then remove the box;
4. Unplug all the cords and connectors connected to the autoloader control board;
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the five M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the autoloader control board, and then remove the board.

5-110

Hardware System

Figure 5-20 Removing the autoloader control board


1 ---Shielding box

2 --- Panhead screw M4X8

3 --- Autoloader control board

4 ---Cross-headed panhead screw M3X6

Assembly
Assemble the autoloader control board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification
1. Check and make sure that all the components are properly connected to the autoloader
control board.

2. After ensuring the power supply is cut off, assemble the drive board and motherboard
properly, and then power on the analyzer.

3. Check if the indicators on the autoloader control board are in the following status: 1) D3,
D4 and D5 turned on; 2) D25 and D26 flashing. You can also check the indicators in the
self-test screen of the analyzer. If the self-test is passed, it means the autoloader control
board is replaced successfully; otherwise, you should troubleshoot the board.
5-111

Hardware System

4. Readjust the pincher position as per Section 6.10.2

5.4.5 Troubleshooting
Error analysis and solutions
Errors related to the autoloader board are identified and handled by the host control software
in the form of error codes. Note that only some of the error codes reported to the host control
software from the autoloader board can be handled automatically, while some need to be
judged with the help of users or service engineers. When an error is reported, the error No.
and error names are provided by host control software. The recommended solutions may
appear on the screen as the software help information.
Most errors of the autoloader board are identified by checking the photocoupler information, so
check the photocouplers first in case of errors. To check the photocouplers: first make sure that
the photocouplers are not blocked, and check if the status information of the photocouplers
from the software matches the actual status; hide the photocouplers with lighttight material,
and check if the status information matches the actual status. Inconsistency found in either one
of the two checks indicates invalidation of the photocouplers; otherwise, the error comes from
the board itself.
Typical errors and solutions:

1. Y-co left or right photocoupler error


The cause of such an error: there two photocouplers mounted on the Y-co feeding direction of
the autoloader, which are called the left photocoupler and right photocoupler. In the
autoloading mode, the current tube feeding status is identified based on the number of times
when the level of the photocouplers jumped and the status of the photocouplers. Therefore,
the left and right photocouplers should be related with each other based on certain logical
requirements. If the requirements are not met, the Y-co left photocoupler or right photocoupler
error will be reported.
Troubleshooting measures: 1) check the photocouplers for errors (according to the steps
mentioned above); 2) Check if there is any tube rack blocked along the Y-co feeding line which
occurs when the Y-co feeding motor is not able to push the tube rack due to the tube rack out
of shape or assembly error of the sample transport unit. In such a case, shut down the
analyzer and switch off all the power supplies, and then pull the tube rack along the Y-co
feeding line to identify if the tube rack is out of shape and if the unit is mis-assembled. Replace
with a qualified tube rack if the former one is out of shape; disassemble and repair the sample
transport unit in case of mis-assembly; 3) check if there is any tube rack blocked because
there are tube racks slanting at the unloading area or the unloading platform is not qualified.
Check if the length of the tube rack meets the corresponding requirement and if the metallic
plate of the unloading unit is properly manufactured. 4) Check if the autoloader assembly
(including the buffer plates for the left and right photocouplers, Y-co pallet and Y-co tube rack
backboard) is properly assembled. If there is any mis-assembly, re-adjust the installation
5-112

Hardware System
according to the part related to mechanical structure of the analyzer in this manual, and make
sure the mechanism is out of error.

2. The compartment door cannot be opened


Possible causes for this error: a) compartment door photocoupler error; b) compartment spring
error or door structure error.
Troubleshooting measures: a) check if there is any error with the photocouplers; b) press the
[OPEN] key and check if the electromagnet moves. If the electromagnet acts properly, then
there may be errors with the spring or the mechanical structure of the door and replacement or
adjustment may be necessary.

Error codes and troubleshooting measures


Table 5-83 Troubleshooting errors with the autoloader board
ERR

Error name

Error feature

Recommended action
1. Check if there are EEPROM elements not
welded, EEPROM pin short or mis-welded
2. If there are no such errors, then it is
identified as an EEPROM error and board
replacement is needed

5A00

EEPROM write
error

Failed to write data to


EEPROM

5201

SMXM action
failed

Current action forbidden


while the mix mechanism is
in motion

5202

SMXM action
failed

5203

SMXM action
failed

5204

SMXM action
failed

SMZM or SMRM not at


home position

Check the Z-co and R-co photocouplers


replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed to be
a photocoupler error

5205

SMXM action
failed

SMXM not initialized, action


forbidden

Initialize the X-co motor

5206

SMXM action
failed

SMXM action overtime

Check if the predefined action time is


reasonable and the actual action speed of the
motor meets the requirement of the design

5207

SMXM action
failed

5208

SMXM action
failed

5209

SMXM
photocoupler
error

Confirm the action status of the mix


mechanism and resend the command

SMXM should not at the


home position, but the
home position photocoupler
is blocked
SMXM should at the home
position, but the home
position photocoupler is not
blocked

SMXM should not at the


end position, but the end
position photocoupler is
blocked
SMXM should at the end
position, but the end
position photocoupler is not
blocked
Both the home position and
end position photocouplers
are blocked, then at least
one of them has an error
5-113

1. SMXM
home
position
photocoupler
error:
replace
the
photocoupler if it is confirmed to be a
photocoupler error

1.

SMXM end position photocoupler error:


replace the photocoupler when it is
confirmed to be an photocoupler error

1.

Check the SMXM home position and end


position photocoupler, and replace the
photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error

Hardware System
Current action forbidden
while the mix mechanism is
in motion
SMZM should not at the
home position, but the
home position photocoupler
is hide
SMZM should at the home
position, but the home
position photocoupler is not
blocked

5401

SMZM action
failed

5402

SMZM action
failed

5403

SMZM action
failed

5404

SMZM action
failed

SMXM not at the end


position or SMRM not at the
home position

5405

SMZM action
failed

SMZM not initialized, action


forbidden

5406

SMZM action
failed

SMZM action overtime

5407

SMZM action
failed

SMZM should not at the


end position, but the end
position photocoupler is
blocked

5408

SMZM action
failed

5409

SMZM
photocoupler
error

5501

SMRM action
failed

5502

SMRM action
failed

5503

SMRM action
failed

5504

SMRM action
failed

SMXM or SMZM not at the


end position

5505

SMRM action
failed

SMRM not initialized, action


forbidden

Initialize the R-co motor

5506

SMRM action
failed

SMRM action overtime

Check if the predefined action time is


reasonable and the actual action speed of the
motor meets the requirement of the design

SMRM action
failed
Mix mechanism

Not reach the target


position after finish moving
Action forbidden while the

5508
5601

SMZM should at the end


position, but the end
position photocoupler is not
blocked
Both the home position and
end position photocouplers
are blocked, then at least
one of them has an error
Current action forbidden
while the mix mechanism is
in motion
SMRM should not at the
home position, but the
home position photocoupler
is blocked
SMRM should at the home
position, but the home
position photocoupler is not
blocked

5-114

1.

Confirm the action status of the mix


mechanism and resend the command

1.

Home position photocoupler error:


replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
to be a photocoupler error

1.

Check
the
SMXM
and
SMRM
photocouplers,
and
replace
the
photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error
Initialize the Z-co motor

Check if the predefined action time is


reasonable and the actual action speed of the
motor meets the requirement of the design
1. SMZM end position photocoupler error:
replace the photocoupler when it is
confirmed to be an photocoupler error

1.

Check the SMZM home position and end


position photocoupler, and replace the
photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error

1.

Confirm the action status of the mix


mechanism and resend the command

1.

SMRM home position photocoupler error:


replace the photocoupler if it is confirmed
to be a photocoupler error

2.

Check
the
SMXM
and
SMZM
photocouplers,
and
replace
the
photocoupler when it is confirmed to be
an photocoupler error

Check the SMRM motor and photocouplers


Confirm the action status of the mix

Hardware System
action failed
Mix mechanism
action failed
Mix mechanism
action failed

current mechanism is in
motion
Number of mixing times out
of predefined range
Mix mechanism not
initialized

5606

Mix mechanism
action failed

At least one of the 3 motors


is not at the home position

5700

SFXM action
failed

SFXM motor in motion

5701

SFXM action
failed

SFXM home position


photocoupler status does
not match the position of
the current motor

5702

SFXM action
failed

Tube rack along Y-co; X-co


motor forbidden to move to
the end position

5703

SFXM action
failed

SFXM end position


photocoupler status does
not match the position of
the current motor

5704

SFXM
photocoupler
error

Both the SFXM end position


and home position
photocouplers are blocked

5604
5605

5705

SFXM loading
error

Both the SFXM end position


photocoupler signal and the
X-co ready sensitive switch
invalid after finish loading

5706

SFXM action
failed

SFXM motor action


overtime

5708

SFXM action
failed

5801

Functional
control code
error

5802

Data length error

5803

Command label
error

5804

Check code error

FX_READY sensitive
switch error: should be
switched off, but is detected
to be switched on
Functional code not defined
in the communication
protocol
Data length differs from that
of the current command
label
Command label not defined
in the communication
protocol
The check code differs from
the calculated check code
5-115

mechanism and resend the command


Confirm the number of mixing times and
resend the correct command
Initialize the mix mechanism
Check the home position photocouplers of the
mix motors. and replace the photocoupler
when it is confirmed to be an photocoupler
error
Confirm the SFXM action status and resend
the command
1. Self-test if the SFXM home position
photocoupler is broken
2. When the photocoupler is working
properly, send a SFXM action command to
check if the SFXM motor is normal
1.

Remove the tube rack long Y-co, and


then resend the command

1.

Self-test if the SFXM end position


photocoupler is broken;
2. When the photocoupler is working
properly, send a action command to check
if the SFXM motor is normal
1. Check if both the SFXM end position and
home position photocouplers are blocked. If
not, it is the photocoupler at fault.
1 When there is a ready tube rack, if it is
determined that the X-co ready sensitive
switch does not function properly, then
replace the switch
2 When there is no tube racks, SFXM at
end position indicates a SFXM end
position photocoupler error. Replace the
photocoupler.
Check if the defined action time is reasonable
and the actual action speed of the motor meet
the requirement of the design
Sensitive switch error: replace the sensitive
switch after confirming the switch is broken

Communication error. Please resend

Communication error. Please resend

Communication error. Please resend


Communication error. Please resend

Hardware System

5805
5806
5817

End code error


Identity control
code error
Non-sequence
pack analysis
error

Not the end code defined in


the communication protocol
(016)
Identity code not defined in
the communication protocol
Unable to analyze the
non-sequence pack

5-116

Communication error. Please resend


Communication error. Please resend
Resend the correct command

Hardware System

5.5 Power board


5.5.1 Introduction
The power board provides six stable power supplies, including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V,
P12V and P24V.

5.5.2 Board Composition


Function
The power board provides the following six stable power supplies for each functional board
and module of the BC-5380: D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.

Block diagram

Figure 5-21 Block diagram of the power board

Description

The power board works with the 90V-264V AC input voltage (50-60Hz).
5-117

Hardware System
Once

the

AC

power

switch

is

turned

on,

all

the

circuits

work

and

the

D5V,A+12V,A-12V,AC130V,P12V and P24V voltage are outputted.


Circuit loads of the power board are described in the table below:
Table 5-84 Output voltage features
Voltage

Minimum

Nominal

Output voltage

Voltage

Load

current

current

range

adjustment

adjustment

rate

rate

Noise

D5V

2A

5A

4.85/5.25V

5%

100mV

+A12V

0mA

1A

11. 5/12. 5V

5%

100mV

-A12V

0mA

650mA

-11.5/-12.5V

5%

100mV

P12V

0.3A

5.5A

11.5/12.5V

5%

150mV

P24V

0A

4A

22/27V

10%

150mV

AC120V

0mA

60mA

115/145V(RMS)

10%

For the P24V, the 7.8A maximum current with the approximate lasting time of 2S and the
period of 60S may occur when working.

Interface definition

The power board is configured with 7 external interfaces. The J1 and J2 interfaces are
connectors of the socket; the rest of the interfaces are connectors of the plug terminal leading
from the board edges. The No. of the PCB board is TP1-TP20.The location of the interfaces on
the power board is shown below.

5-118

Hardware System

Figure 5-22 Interface layout of the power board

See the following table for the function of each interface.


Table 5-85 Interfaces on the power board
Interface
J1

Function
AC input

Number of pins

Number of lands

Note

Power supply output


J2

of the fans

PCB
Power supply output
A-J12

of the analog part

soldering
6

output
PCB
soldering

A-J13

AC output

5-119

output

Hardware System
PCB
soldering

Power supply output


A-J35

of the power part

10

10

output
PCB
soldering

Power supply output


A-J37

of the digital part

output

Definition of J1:
Table 5-86 Definition of AC input interface
Pin

Definition

L, Live wire

PG, Earth wire

N, Neutral wire

Definition of J2:
Table 5-87 Definition of the fan interface
Pin

Definition
P12V,connects the positive end of the P12V output
voltage

1/3/5

PGND, connects the negative end of the P12V


2/4/6

output voltage

Definition of AJ12:
Table 5-88 Definition of analog board output
Land

Definition

Pin

AGND, connects the reference


ground of the analog board output
TP16AGND\TP17AGND
TP15A12V

voltage

6,7

+A12V,connects the positive end of

the +A12V output voltage


-A12V,connects the negative end of

TP18A-12V

the -A12V output voltage

NC

8
1/2/3/4

Definition of AJ13:

5-120

Hardware System
Table 5-89 Definition of AC output
Land

Definition
Two

output

TP19\TP20

AC120

NC

ends

Pin
of

1/3
2

Definition of AJ35:
Table 5-90 Definition of power supply output
Land

Definition
positive end of the P12V

TP1P12V/TP2P12V

Pin

output voltage

TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3P

negative end of the P12V

GND\TP4PGND\TP14PGND

output voltage

TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24

Positive end of the P24V

output voltage

4/5
6/7/8/9/10
1/2/3

Definition of AJ37:
Table 5-91 Definition of D5V output
Land
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
TP7DGND/TP8DGND

Definition

Pin

Positive end of the 5V output


voltage

1/2

DGND, negative end of the

3/4

5V output voltage

Assembly drawing

5-121

Hardware System

Figure 5-23 Assembly drawing of the power board

5.5.3 Adjustment and Test Points


The important test points when maintaining the power board are listed below:

5-122

Hardware System
Table 5-92 Test points on the power board
No.

Pin

Function

Reference
value

Q101.2

Q101 switching waveform

Q101.1

Q101 drive waveform

C114.+

PFC output voltage

39020V

U101.9

Reference output voltage of the chip

7.5V

U101.14

U101 oscillating waveform

C206.+

VCC voltage

17V~22.5V

C204

VDD voltage

121V

C223

supply voltage of U201

121V

Q201.1

Q201 drive waveform

10

Q201.2

Q201 switching waveform

11

U201.8

U201 reference voltage

5V

12

U201.4

U201 oscillating waveform

13

Q201.3

R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current

waveform
14

C232.+

D5V output voltage and ripple voltage

50.5V

15

C311.+

U301 supply voltage

121V

16

U301.4

U301 oscillating waveform

17

U301.8

U301 reference voltage

8V

18

Q303.1

Q303 drive waveform

19

Q303.2

Q303 switching waveform

20

Q303.3

Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage

waveform
21

C326.+

12VB voltage

120.5V

22

C328.+

130V DC output

115V150V

23

C332.+

A+12V output

120.5V

24

C338.-

A-12V output

-120.5V

25

U351.15

U351 supply voltage

120.5V

26

U351.5

U351 oscillating waveform

27

U351.11

Q351 drive waveform

28

U351.14

Q351 drive waveform

29

U351.16

U351 reference voltage

5V

30

Q361.1

Q361 drive waveform

31

Q362.1

Q362 drive waveform

32

Q363.1

Q363 drive waveform

33

Q364.1

Q364 drive waveform

34

C409.

U401 supply voltage

121V

5-123

Hardware System
35

U401.5

U401 oscillating waveform

36

U401.14

U401 reference voltage

5V

37

U401.9

Q401 drive waveform

38

Q406.1

Q406 drive waveform

39

Q406.2

Q406 switching waveform

40

C423.+

P24V output voltage, ripple

22~27V

41

C442.+

P12V output voltage, ripple

120.5V

5.5.4 Replacement and Connection

Purpose
Damaged power assembly or power board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
Sharp-nose pliers
Multimeter

Disassembly
Disassembly of the power board consists of the following two main procedures (removing the
whole power assembly and further disassembly of the inner components):

Remove the whole power assembly from the main unit:

1. Shutdown the analyzer and cut off the power supply;


2. Open the left door;
3. Remove the data boardsee section 5.2.4 for details

4. Remove the drive boardsee section 5.3.4 for details

5. Unplug the 3 cables connecting the power assembly from the mother board; loose the
cable fixer and remove the cables.
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the earth wire from the ground pole.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 6 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the power assembly.
8. Draw out the power assembly for 50-100mm and unplug the 2 cable connectors
connecting the power switch.
5-124

Hardware System
9. Draw out and remove the power assembly.

Figure 5-24 Removing the power assembly 1


1 ---Mother board

2 --- Power switch

3 --- Ground pole

4 --- Power assembly

5 --- Panhead screw M4X8

Further disassembly of the power assembly

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the power cover, and then remove the cover together with the power socket
from the power assembly.
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the power socket, and then disassembly the power socket.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Use the shape-nose pliers to loose the 6 M3 nuts fixing the fan and unplug the cable plug
from the power board, and then remove the fan.
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 9 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the power board, and then remove the power board.

5-125

Hardware System

Figure 5-25 removing the power assembly 2


1---Panhead screw M3X8

2 --- Power socket

3---Panhead screw M4X8

4 ---Fan

5---M3 Nut

6---Power board

7 ---fixing board for power board

8---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3x6

9---Power board shielding cover

10 ---Power cover

Assembly
Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Wear antistatic gloves before maintaining or removing the board.

Be sure to shut down the analyzer and cut off the power supply before
disassembling/assembling the board.

Verification
1. Check and make sure the earth wire of the AC input socket is properly connected to the
conductive cover of the main unit.
2. Connect the power cord and turn on the AC switch, then the fan works.

5-126

Hardware System

When assembling, before fixing the upper cover of the power assembly, be
sure the AC plug and the plug of the fan are connected with the power
board.

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the
main unit.

5.5.5 Troubleshooting

Causes and recommended action


Refer to the flow chart below to troubleshoot the power board.

5-127

Hardware System

Figure 5-26 Power board troubleshooting flow chart

Be sure the screws are tightened to firmly fix the power assembly with the main unit.

5-128

Hardware System

5.6 Volumetric and pressure detecting board


5.6.1 Introduction
The volumetric board provides the metric time signals for the RBC/PLT and WBC count.
Principles for the volumetric time signals: the detected volumetric start and end signals are
processed by the volumetric sensor, through current-voltage transferring, level-transforming
and de-bouncing, the drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted. Principles for
the vacuum and pressure detecting: the detected vacuum and pressure signals are transferred
to the current signals by the vacuum and pressure sensor, and then through the signal
transferring, the AD-required the voltage signals are outputted to the drive board.

5.6.2 Board Composition


Function

Provides the time signals of RBC/PLT and WBC count, i.e. the start and end time of
running.

Provides the vacuum and pressure intensity signals of the vacuum chamber and pressure
chamber, sends the signals to the drive board.

Block diagram

Figure 5-27 Block diagram of the volumetric and pressure detecting board

5-129

Hardware System

Description

WBC count start/end signals

The WBC count start/end signals detected by the WBC volumetric sensor are I-V transferred,
level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the drive board.

RBC/PLT count start/end signals

The RBC/PLT count start/end signals detected by the RBC/PLT volumetric sensor are I-V
transferred, level-transformed and de-bounced by the volumetric board, and then sent to the
drive board.

Drive control the volumetric sensor

The working status of the volumetric sensor is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the volumetric sensor doesn't work;
when the level is low, the volumetric sensor works.

Vacuum/pressure voltage signals

The vacuum/pressure intensity signals of the vacuum/pressure chamber are transferred to the
voltage signals by the vacuum/pressure sensor on the volumetric board. Then, they are further
transferred to the A/D-required voltage signals and then sent to the drive board through the J1
connector.

Interface definition
The volumetric board has only one 12PIN connector connecting the drive board. The location
of the connector is shown below.

5-130

Hardware System

Figure 5-28 Interface layout of the volumetric board

Table 5-93 Pin definition


No.

Pin

Signal description

Signal Type

P+12V

+12V power supply

+12 power supply

PGND

Power ground

DGND

Digital ground

POSI_PRESS

Pressure voltage signals output

Analog

NEGA_PRESS

Vacuum voltage signals output

Analog

DGND

Digital ground

#VM_CTRL

Volumetric sensor control signals

TTL level

RBC_START

RBC count start signals

TTL level

RBC_STOP

RBC count stop signals

TTL level

10

WBC_START

WBC count start signals

TTL level

11

WBC_STOP

WBC count stop signals

TTL level

12

D+5V

Digital +5V power supply

+5V power supply

5-131

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-29 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Top

Figure 5-30 Assembly drawing of the volumetric board-Bottom

5.6.3 Disassembly and assembly method


Purpose
The volumetric board is the front component of the whole device. Damaged volumetric board
needs to be replaced by a new one. Please follow the procedures to have the volumetric board
replaced.
5-132

Hardware System

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver
Sharp-nosed pliers

Disassembly
1. Shut down the analyzer;
2. Open the right door;
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.
4. Disconnect the 4 pipes connecting the volumetric tube.
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X8), and use the sharp-nosed pliers to remove the 2 socket cap screws (M3X16) fixing
the volumetric board.
6. Pull out the volumetric board for 30-50mm; unplug the cable connectors on its back and
disconnect the 2 pipes, and then remove the board.

Figure 5-31 Disassembly of the volumetric board


1---volumetric tube bracket

2---Panhead screw M3X8

3---Volumetric tube

4---Rubber ring

5---Socket cap screws (M3X16)

6---Shielding box of volumetric board

7---Volumetric board

5-133

Hardware System

Assembly
Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification
1.

The volumetric board is assembled properly.

2.

Start up the analyzer properly.

3.

Running samples in the whole blood mode. If the RBC/WBC clogging, bubbles and
abnormal pressure/vacuum are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.

5.6.4 Troubleshooting
Table 5-94 Troubleshooting the volumetric board
No.

Error

Error name

type

Error feature

Causes

Probability

Improper

with

the mother board


or disconnection

power

supply error

System
error

The voltage of

caused

the P+12V test

broken cable

point

Improper

is

equal

not
to

12V0.6V.

by

supply
main

Reconnect the
Medium

cable

or

change a new
cable

power
of

the

unit

or

Improper
power
sent

action

cable

connection

+12V

Recommended

+12V

See
troubleshooting
Low

supply
by

of

the

board

the

drive
and

power board

mother board
The voltage of
2

+5V

power

supply error

Board
error

the P+5V test


point

is

equal
5V0.25V.

not
to

L2 is damaged
(or rosin jointed)
or something is
wrong

(rosin

jointed) with the


C20 and C13.

5-134

Low

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

Hardware System
Improper

cable

connection

with

the mother board


or disconnection
caused

by

Reconnect the
Medium

cable

or

change a new
cable

broken cable
Something

is

wrong with the


Comparator
3

reference power
supply wrong

Board
error

The

TP6

output voltage
2.5V0.25V

+5V

power

Low

Something

is

wrong with the

Low

Improper

with

the mother board


or disconnection
4

error

error

Voltage of the

VM_CTRL

signal 0.8V

caused

by

Medium

Control

signals
through

Control

signal

error
Control

volumetric
sensor error

the

Board
error

change a new

Low

troubleshooting
of

the

drive

board
Medium

See No.4 in the


table

circuit

error (Q1 or U2 is

Standard
voltage (TP5)
2.5V0.25V

or

See

is wrong

of

cable
cable

the mother board

source

the

broken cable

board

re-solder

Reconnect the

sent by the drive

Constant current

or

cable

connection

System

Replace
U8

rosin jointed.

signal

table

supply.

U8 chip or it is

Control

See No.2 in the

wrong

or

rosin

jointed; resistors
R10, R11, R18,
R23,

R25

and

R24 is wrong or
rosin jointed)

5-135

Medium

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

Hardware System
Adjust VWST,
VWSP,

VRST

and VRSP to
VWST,

VWSP,

VRST or VRSP
are not adjusted

make
Medium

well.

the

voltage of the
point WT, WP,
RT

and

RP

equals
Voltage
6

of

the

2.7V0.1V

Voltage of the

point WT, WP, RT

Board

point WT, WP,

and RP is not the

error

RT and RP

expected value

2.7V0.1V

to

respectively.
Volumetric
sensor U15, U21,
U16 or U17 is

Low

wrong (or rosin

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

jointed).
Constant current
source

of

the

volumetric

Medium

See No.5 in the


table

sensor error
+5V

power

supply error

Low

Indicators D1,
D2, D3 and D4
are off when
7

Indicator

Board

abnormal

error

fluid flows or
are

still

on

when no fluid
flows

through

Low

rosin jointed)
+5V

supply error

the

Low

See No.2 in the


table

is

wrong with the


TP6

change

or

component

power

Something

table
Re-solder

D1, D2, D3 or D4
is damaged (or

See No.2 in the

standard

Low

See No.3 in the


table

power supply

the volumetric

Voltage

tube

point WT, WP, RT


and

of
RP

the

Medium

See No.6 in the


table

2.7V0.1V
8

Constant current

Board

Standard

+12V

source error of

error

voltage TP10

supply error

5-136

power

Low

See No.1 in the


table

Hardware System
the

vacuum

2.5V0.25V

C14, R37, U11,

sensor

R47

or

U4

is

damaged

(or

Re-solder
Medium

or

change

the

component

rosin jointed).
+12V
Constant current
9

source error of

Board

the

error

pressure

sensor

power

supply error

Standard
voltage TP7
2.5V0.25V

Low

C21, R36, R35,


U3

or

U10

is

damaged

(or

See No.1 in the


table
Re-solder

Medium

or

change

the

component

rosin jointed).
+12V
Pressure/vacuum
10

unit

+2.5V

reference power

Board
error

supply error

power

supply error

Standard
voltage TP9
2.5V0.25V

Low

R39, C11, R38,


R48, VR9, U9 or
U6 is damaged

See No.1 in the


table
Re-solder

Medium

change

Adjust
is

not

adjusted well.
Pressure/vacuum
11

1.25V

voltage

error

The

the

component

(or rosin jointed)

VR9

or

VR9,

making
Medium

the

relative voltage
of the TP9 to
TP8

relative

1.2500.002V

Board

voltage of the

error

TP9 to the TP8

Pressure/vacuum

1.2500.002V

2.5V
power

reference
supply

Medium

See No.10 in
the table

error
U6 is damaged
or rosin jointed
12

Pressure

output

voltage abnormal

Board

When the input

+12V

error

pressure

is

supply error

0HPa

or

Constant current

the

source error of

450HPa,

output voltage

the

of the point PP

sensor

is not equal to

1.25V

1.2500.002V

error

5-137

power

pressure
voltage

Medium

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components
Low

Medium

Medium

See No.1 in the


table
See No.9 in the
table
See No.11 in
the table

Hardware System
or

Adjust PPZ to

2.2500.002V.

make

the

voltage of the
PP

is

1.2500.002V
when the input
PPZ or PPG is
not adjusted well

pressure is 0.
Medium

Then,

adjust

PPG to make
the voltage of
the

PP

is

1.2500.002V
when the input
pressure

is

450HPa.
U12, U14, R34,
R44, R45, R46,
R50, R52, C10 or

Re-solder
Medium

C23 is damaged

change

or
the

component

(or rosin jointed)


13

Vacuum

output

voltage abnormal

Board

When the input

+12V

error

pressure

is

supply error

0HPa

or

Constant current

the

source error of

-450HPa,

output voltage

the

of the point NP

sensor

is not equal to

1.25V

1.2500.002V

error

5-138

power

vacuum
voltage

Low

Medium

Medium

See No.1 in the


table
See No.8 in the
table
See No.11 in
the table

Hardware System
or

Adjust NPZ to

0.2500.002V.

make

the

voltage of the
NP

is

1.2500.002V
when the input
NPZ or NPG is
not adjusted well

pressure is 0.
Medium

Then,

adjust

NPG to make
the voltage of
the

NP

is

0.2500.002V
when the input
pressure

is

-450HPa.
U12, U13, R33,
R40, R41, R42,
R43, R51, C7 or
C22 is damaged
(or rosin jointed)

5-139

Re-solder
Medium

change
component

or
the

Hardware System

5.7 Liquid-level detecting board


5.7.1 Introduction
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH
and cleanser and sends the detected results to the drive board. Principles for the liquid level
detecting: the sufficient or insufficient signals detected by the liquid sensor are processed by
current-voltage

transferring,

level-transforming

and

de-bouncing.

Finally,

the

drive-board-required TTL level is obtained and outputted.

5.7.2 Board composition


Function
The liquid level board detects the status (sufficient or insufficient) of the LEO(I),LEO(II), LH and
cleanser, transfers the signals and sends them to the drive board.

Block diagram

LEO
I
tube

LEO(I) Sensor

I-V
transform

Level transform

LEO
II
tube

LEO(II) Sensor

I-V
transform

Level transform

J1
LH tube

LH Sensor

I-V
transform

Level transform

CL tube

CL Sensor

I-V
transform

Level transform

Liquid Level Board


Figure 5-32 Block diagram of the liquid-level detecting board

5-140

Mother
Board

Hardware System

Description
For the liquid level of the LEO(I), LEO(II), LH and cleanser are detected by the same principle,
so the liquid level detection of LEO(I) is used just to be the example.

Detecting the status (sufficient/insufficient) of LEO(I)

The status (sufficient/insufficient) signals of the LEO(I) detected by the sensor is conducted the
I-V converting, level-transforming and de-bouncing by the liquid-level detecting board and then
sent to the drive board.

Drive control of the detecting sensors of the four reagents

The working status of the detecting sensors is controlled by the drive board through J1
connector. When the level of the control signal is high, the detecting sensors do not work;
when the level is low, the detecting sensors work.

Interface definition
The liquid level detecting board has only one connector of 8PIN connecting the drive board.
The location of the connector is shown below.

J1

Figure 5-33 Interface definition of the liquid-level detecting board

The definition of pins is shown in the table below.

5-141

Hardware System
Table 5-95 Pin definition of the liquid-level detecting board
No.

Pin

Signal description

Signal Type

D+5V

Digital +5V power supply

+5V power supply

LIQ1

LEO(I) status output signals

TTL level

LIQ2

LEO(II) status output signals

TTL level

LIQ3

LH status output signals

TTL level

LIQ4

Cleanser status output signals

TTL level

#D_CTRL

Drive control signals of detecting sensor

TTL level

DGND

Digital ground

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-34 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Top

Figure 5-35 Assembly drawing of the liquid-level detecting board-Bottom

5-142

Hardware System

5.7.3 Replacement and Connection

Purpose
Damaged liquid-level detecting board needs to be replaced by a new one to ensure the
operation of the analyzer. Please follow the procedures to have the board replaced.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
Liquid-level detecting board disassembly consists of the following two main procedures:

Remove the board from the main unit:

1.

Shut down the analyzer.

2.

Open the left door.

3.

Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 cross-headed panhead screws
(M4X8) fixing the shielding box, and then remove the shielding cover.

4.

Pull the 4 pipes out from the pipe clamp of the liquid-level detecting board.

5.

Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
(M3X6) from the liquid-level detecting board.

6.

Pull out the liquid-level detecting board for 30-50mm, unplug the cable connectors on its
back, and then remove the board.

5-143

Hardware System

Figure 5-36 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-1


1---Cross-recessed

panhead

screw

2---Liquid-level

detecting

board

M3x6 (with washer)

cover

3---Panhead screw M3X8

4---Liquid-level detecting board

shielding

Further disassembly of the drive board

1.

Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 cross-headed panhead screws
M3X8 fixing the pipe clamp.

2.

Remove the 2 pipe clamps.

Figure 5-37 Disassemble the liquid-level detecting board-2


1---Cross-recessed panhead screw M3X8

2---Liquid-level detecting board

3---Pipe clamp
5-144

Hardware System

Assembly
Assemble the power board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification
1.

The liquid-level detecting board is assembled properly.

2.

The tubing is connected properly.

3.

Start up the analyzer properly. Running samples in the whole blood mode. If No LEO(I)
(/LEO(II)/LH /cleanser) or bubbles are not reported by the analyzer, the replacement is
succeeded. If one or more above-mentioned error(s) is reported, you should remove the
error accordingly.

5.7.4 Troubleshooting
Table 5-96 Troubleshooting the liquid-level detecting board
No.

Error name

Error

Error

type

features

Causes

Probability

Improper

with

the mother board


disconnection

caused

action

cable

connection
or

Recommended

by

Reconnect
Medium

the

cable or change a
new cable

broken cable
The voltage
1

+5V power

System

supply error

error

of the +5V
test point is
not equal to
5V0.25V.

Improper

power

supply of the main


unit or Improper
+5V power supply
sent

by

See
Low

troubleshooting of
the

drive

board

and power board

the

mother board
L2 is damaged (or
rosin jointed) or
something
wrong

is
(rosin

Low

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

jointed) with the


C7 and C11.
Comparator
2

reference
power

Board
error

The

TP1

output
voltage

Something
wrong

with

is
the

+5V power supply.


5-145

Low

See No.1 in the


table

Hardware System
supply

2.5V0.25V

wrong

Something
wrong

is

with

the

chip U9 or R10 or
they

are

Low

rosin

Replace

or

re-solder the U9

jointed.
Improper

cable

connection

with

the mother board

Control

System

signal error

error

Voltage

of

or

the

caused

disconnection
by

Reconnect
Medium

the

cable or change a
new cable

broken cable

D_CTRL
signal

Control

signals
See

sent by the drive

0.8V

board through the

Low

troubleshooting of
the drive board

mother board is
wrong
Control

signal

error
Abnormal
driving
4

of

the
detecting

Board
error

sensor

Voltage

to

Control

ground

of

error (Q1, U1, U2,

See No.3 in the


table

circuit

collector

U3

electrode of

wrong

Q1 is not

jointed;

between

R1, R2, R9, R40,

4.4V-5.25V.

R41, R42 or R43

or

Medium

U4
or

are
rosin

resistors

Medium

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

are wrong or rosin


jointed).
Adjust VL1, VL2,

The voltage
of

voltage

point

point VLL1,

VLL1,
5

of

Board

VVL2,

error

VVL3

and

VVL4 is not

VVL4

the

2.2V0.1V

VVL2,
VVL3

and

VL3 and VL4 to


VLL1,

make the voltage

VVL2,

VVL3 or VVL4 are

Medium

not adjusted well.

VVL2, VVL3 and


VVL4 equals to
2.2V0.1V
respectively.

expected
value.

of the point VVL1,

Detecting sensors
U1, U2, U3 or U4
are

wrong

rosin jointed).

5-146

(or

Low

Replace

or

re-solder

the

components

Hardware System
Abnormal driving
of the detecting

Medium

sensor
+5V power supply
error
LED1,

Low

LED2,

LED3 or LED4 are


damaged (or rosin

Indicator

Board

abnormal

error

Indicators

error

LED1,

Something

LED2,

wrong

with

and

TP1

LED4

are

power supply

the

standard

still

on

voltage of point

when

the

VLL1,

is

filled

with

See No.2 in the


table

Low

change

or
the

component
Low

See No.1 in the


table

is

LED3

tube

table

Re-solder

jointed)
+5V power supply

See No.4 in the

VVL2,

VVL3 and VVL4

Low

Medium

See No.2 in the


table

See No.5 in the


table

2.2V0.1V

fluid or are

U7,

off when no

R32, R17, R13,

fluid exists

R14, R18, R21,

in the tube.

R5,

R15,

R11,

R19,

R30,

R22, R12, R31,


R4,

R23,

R25,

R26, R27 or R28


are damaged (or
rosin jointed).

5-147

Re-solder
Medium

change
component

or
the

Hardware System

5.8 Laser Control Board


5.8.1 Introduction
The laser control board controls the laser to ensure it is stable and moderate.

5.8.2 Board Composition


Function

Power conditioning

Laser drive current monitoring

Constant-laser power controlling

Block diagram

Figure 5-38 Block diagram of the laser control board

Description

Power conditioning

The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 100mV.

Laser drive current monitoring

The working current of the laser is measured and sent to the data board for monitoring.

Constant-laser power controlling

The laser control board controls the laser by constant-power method. I.e. the laser output
5-148

Hardware System
power is monitored by the inner photoelectrical detector, and the results obtained forms a
closed loop system through negative feedback to ensure the constant-power output. The
power is controlled (3mW-5mW) by adjusting the potentiometer VR1 on the board.

Interface definition
The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser, as the figure shows.

Figure 5-39 Interface layout of the laser control board

Table 5-97 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN
1

Definition
AVSS

Note
-12V

Direction I/O

Analog

power

Level

-12V

No greater than 5V

supply
2

AGND

Analog ground

LASER

Monitoring

voltage

of

laser drive current


4

AVCC

12V Analog power supply

12V

#CONTROL

Control signals produced

I/O

Low level: 0.8V

by standard voltage

High level: OC door


of 5V

VCC

5V digital power supply

5-149

5V

Hardware System
Table 5-98 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)
No.

Name

Note

Direction

Level

I/O
1

LDA

Anode of semi-conductor laser diode

LDC

Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode

PDA

Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-40 Assembly drawing of the laser control board

5.8.3 Adjustment and Test Points


Adjust the slide rheostat VR1 clockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the
voltage of the test point TP2VREF and the laser intensity increases. Adjust the slide rheostat
VR1 anticlockwise, then the resistance of the VR1 connecting circuit, the voltage of the test
point TP2VREF and the laser intensity decreases.
Adjust the voltage of TP2VREF to 3.9-4.1V (adjustable as per the situation; it is the voltage
difference relative to A-12V), then the voltage of TPILD is 0.8-2.0V (it is also the voltage
difference relative to A-12V; note: the laser works normally).
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.

5-150

Hardware System

Never try to plug or unplug the semi-conductor laser before the power
supply is cut off.

Do adjust the slide rheostat gradually increased.

See the test points in the table below and their locations on the board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-99Test points of the laser control board
No.

Test

Signal under

point

test

Function

A+12V

AVCC

The +12V power from the data board

A-12V

AVSS

The -12V power from the data board

D5V

VCC

The 5V power from the data board. It enables the


upper photocoupler.

Digital
4

AGND

ground

\
on

board
5

TPVREF

VREF

The 2.5V standard voltage produced by the U1 chip


(relative to A-12V).
Double

TP2VREF

2VREF

voltage

to

ground

of

the

rheostat

sliding-end. It controls the intensity of the laser in


direct ratio.
The step-down voltage on R1, R21 or R1/R21

TPIPD

PDA

caused by the feedback current signals from the


photoelectrical receiving part of the laser.
The working current signals of the diode part of the
laser. It reflexes the working current of the diode

TPILD

LASER

part through the voltage of TPILD, detecting


whether the laser is working under the expected
status.

5.8.4 Assembly and disassembly


See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.

5.8.5 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting information of the laser control board is listed in the table below.

5-151

Hardware System
Table 5-100 Troubleshooting the laser control board
No.

Error

Error
Features

Recommended action

Possible Causes
Improperly connected

Reconnect the cable or

or disconnected with

change a new cable

the mother board


Improper power sent

+12V

power

supply error

The voltage of

to the laser control

the A+12V test

board

point exceeds
the range of
12V0.6V

Check and make sure the


power sent by the mother
board and the data board
is proper.

Something is wrong

Check the circuit on the

with

board.

the

power

control circuit on the


board.

Grounding

short-circuits.

The

power is lower or
higher.
Something is wrong

-12V

power

supply error

The voltage of

with

the A-12V test

control circuit on the

point exceeds

board.

the range of

short-circuits.

-12V0.6V

power is lower or

the

power

Grounding
The

Check the circuit on the


board.

higher.

The voltage of
3

5V

power

supply error

the D5V test


point exceeds
the range of
5V0.25V

Improperly connected

Reconnect the cable or

or disconnected with

change a new cable

the mother board


Improper

power

is

Check and make sure the

sent

the

laser

power sent by the mother

control board by the

board and the data board

data board or mother

is proper.

to

board.

The voltage of
4

Control signal

the

error

#CONTROL
0.8V

signal

Improperly connected

Reconnect the cable or

or disconnected with

change a new cable

the mother board


Improper

control

Check and make sure the

signals sent by the

signals sent by the mother

data board or mother

board and the data board

board

are proper.

5-152

Hardware System

Reference
voltage error

The voltage of

First ensure the -12V

Re-solder or change the

TPVREF

power

U1

works

2.5V0.1V

normally. Then, the

(regards -12V

chip

as reference)

jointed or damaged.

U1

First

is

rosin

ensure

the

TPVREF is normal.
Then,

the

slide

is

rosin

Laser

The voltage of

rheostat

intensity

TP2VREF

jointed or damaged.

control

abnormal

reference

(should

voltage error

3.9V-4.1V)

is

Or,
be

something

wrong

components

is

with

the

soldering

of

the

operation

amplifier

U2

Re-solder or change the

and

its

peripherals.
Laser

diode

damaged

or

Re-connect or change the


connection

cable,

connected improperly

change the laser diode

or

Laser

The voltage of

5V voltage error

See No.3 in the table

intensity

TPILD

Control signals error

See No.4 in the table and

monitoring

exceeds

or succeeding control

check

signals TPILD

range

circuit error

circuit.

output error

0.8-2V

the
of

The

operation

amplifier U3 and its

the

succeeding

Re-solder or change the


components

peripherals are rosin


jointed or damaged
The voltage defined in the laser control board testing process should be used as the latest
standard voltage of TP2VREF and TPILD.

5-153

Hardware System

5.9 Pre-amplification board


5.9.1 Introduction
The pre-amplification board conducts the optical-electrical conversion to the two scattered
lights (FS-low-angle scattered light; SS-high-angle scattered light) come from the flow cell and
amplifies the signals. The amplifying boards of the low-angle signal and the high-angle signal
share one PCB. The amplification factor is obtained by soldering the resistors.

5.9.2 Board Composition


Function

Power conditioning

Optical-electrical converting

Signal conditioning

Block diagram

Figure 5-41 Block diagram of the pre-amplification board

Description

Power conditioning

The power conditioning module filters the 12V power sent by the data board. After filtering,
the ripple is less than 50mV.

Optical-electrical converting

The optical-electrical converting module converts the optical signals into the electrical signals
by the photodiode.
5-154

Hardware System

Signal conditioning

The current signals are transferred into the voltage signals through I/V and then sent to the
succeeding amplifying-conditioning module for further processing. Then, the data board input
required signals are obtained.

Interface definition
The FS/SS pre-amplification board is configured with one external connector respectively, i.e.
the J1 connector connecting the mother board (connecting data board through the mother
board). The layout of the board is shown below.

Figure 5-42 Interface layout of the pre-amplification board

Table 5-101 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN

Definition

Note

Direction

Level

I/O
1

AGND

Analog ground

FS/SS

Pre-amplification board output voltage signals

SHELL

Shielding ground

AVSS

A-12V analog power supply

-12V5%

AGND

Analog ground

AVCC

A+12V analog power supply

12V5%

1V

The laser control board is configured with 2 external connectors. One is the J1 connecting the
5-155

Hardware System
mother board (connecting data board through the mother board), the other one is the J2
connecting the laser.

Figure 5-43 Interface layout of the laser control board

Table 5-102 Definition of J1 (connecting the mother board)


PIN

Definition

Note

Direction I/O

Level

AVSS

-12V Analog power supply

-12V

AGND

Analog ground

LASER

Monitoring

5V

voltage

of

laser drive current


4

AVCC

12V Analog power supply

12V

#CONTRO

Control signals produced

I/O

Low level: 0.8V

by standard voltage

High level: OC
door of 5V

VCC

5V digital power supply

5V

Table 5-103 Definition of J2 (connecting the laser)


No.

Name

Note

Direction I/O

Level

LDA

Anode of semi-conductor laser diode

LDC

Cathode of semi-conductor laser diode

PDA

Anode of semi-conductor laser receiver

5-156

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

(a) Top

(b) Bottom
Figure 5-44 Assembly drawing of the FS/SS pre-amplification board

5-157

Hardware System

5.9.3 Adjustment and Test Points


No adjustment components. See the test points in the table below and their location on the
board in the assembly drawing.
Table 5-104 Test points definition of the pre-amplification board
No.

Test

Signal under

point

test
Digital

AGND

Function
\

ground

on

board
2

+12V

AVCC

The +12V power from the data board

-12V

AVSS

The -12V power from the data board

OUT

OUT

FS/SS pre-amplification board output signals

D5V

VCC

The 5V power from the data board. It enables the


upper photocoupler.

5.9.4 Disassembly and assembly


See Chapter 7 Optical System for details.

5.9.5 Troubleshooting
Table 5-105 Troubleshooting the pre-amplification board
No.

Error

Error Features

Possible Causes
Improper

The voltage of the

test

cable

connection

with the mother board or the

Reconnect the cable or

data board, or disconnection

change a new cable

caused by a broken cable

12V

+12V

point

Improper 12V power sent by

power

exceeds the range of

the data board or mother

supply

120.6V;

board

error

ripple

or

the

noise

greater than 50mV.

is

Recommended action

Rosin

Check whether the proper


power supply is sent by
the mother board or the
data board

joint

or

damage

happens to the +12V test


point relating inductor L1 or
the capacitors C24, C27, C20
and C23.

5-158

Re-solder or change the


component

Hardware System
Improper

The voltage of the

cable

connection

with the mother board or the

Reconnect the cable or

data board, or disconnection

change a new cable

caused by a broken cable

-12V

-12V

point

Improper -12V power sent by

power

exceeds the range of

the data board or mother

supply

-120.6V;

board

error

ripple

test
or

the

noise

is

greater than 50mV.

Rosin

Check whether the proper


power supply is sent by
the mother board or the
data board

joint

or

damage

happens to the -12V test point


relating inductor L2 or the
capacitors C22, C26, C25 and

Re-solder or change the


component

C21.
SS

output

signals

too weak (supposing


it is caused only by
the circuit problems)

output
value
error

the location of the SS board

R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,

Re-solder or change the

rosin jointed or damaged

component

The SS board is installed in

too

strong

the location of the FS board

(supposing

it

by mistake.

output

is

Change the board

by mistake.

signals

FS

Channel

The FS board is installed in

Change the board

caused only by the

R4, R5 or R6 resistance error,

Re-solder or change the

circuit problems)

rosin jointed or damaged

component

The

The photodiode D1 or R1 is

Re-solder or change the

rosin jointed or damaged.

component

output signals are

The U2 or U3 is rosin jointed

Re-solder or change the

too

or damaged.

component

pre-amplification
board

(FF/SS)
weak

to

be

detected.
Something is wrong
with the band width
of
pre-amplification
board (FF/SS).

the

Check whether the relating


resistors and capacitors R4,

Re-solder or change the

R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4 are

component

rosin jointed or damaged.

5-159

Hardware System

5.10 Indicator Board


5.10.1

Introduction

The indicator board realizes the functions of analyzer status indicating and buzzer alarming.

5.10.2

Board Composition

Function

Analyzer working status indicating

Buzzer alarming

Description

Analyzer working status indicating

The indicator board indicates the working status of the analyzer by a two-color indicator. When
the system works normally, the indicator displays green. When error happens, the indicator
turns red.

Buzzer alarming

The alarming function is realized by the buzzing of the buzzer.

Interface definition
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-106 Interface definition of the indicator board
PIN

Name

Note

Direction

Level

I/O

VCC

Power supply

+5V

FAULT

Error indicator (red)

TTL

WORK

TTL

BUZ

Buzzer

TTL

GND

Ground

Working

indicator

(green)

5-160

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-45 Assembly drawing of the indicator board

5.10.3

Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose
Damaged indicator board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
1. Shut down the analyzer.
2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 2 tapping screws (PT3X6) fixing the
indicator board, and then remove the board.

5-161

Hardware System

Figure 5-46 Disassemble the indicator board and the key board
1---Key board

2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)

3---Front cover

4--- Indicator board

5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)

Assembly
Assemble the indicator board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the indicator board. During the
process from startup self-test to ready, closely observe the indicator and the buzzer, if they
work normally, the replacement is successful.

5.10.4

Troubleshooting
Table 5-107 Troubleshooting the indicator board

No.
1

Error
Indicator doesn't work

Causes and recommended action


If the indicator could work off and on when you shaking
the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused
by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection and the system works normally, then, the
diode of the indicator might be damaged.

The buzzer is mute when

If the buzzer could buzz off and on when you shaking

system alarming.

the wiring on the J1 connector, then, it might be caused


by the improper connection. If nothing is wrong with the
connection or the buzzer buzzes abnormally (e.g. a
hoarse buzzing), then, the buzzer might be damaged.

5-162

Hardware System

5.11 Key Board


5.11.1

Introduction

The key board enables the operator to interact with the main unit through the [RUN] and
[OPEN] keys during the autoloading/manual loading process.

5.11.2

Board Composition

Function

[RUN] key

[OPEN] key

Description

Use the [RUN] key

The operator can press the [RUN] key to start autoloading.

Use the [OPEN] key

The operator can press the [OPEN] key to open the sample compartment door.

Interface definition
The indicator board is configured with one external connector J1.
Table 5-108 Interface definition of the key board
PIN

Name

Note

Direction

Level

I/O

COUNT_KEY

[RUN] key

TTL

INSERT_KEY

[OPEN] key

TTL

GND

Ground

5-163

Hardware System

Assembly drawing

Figure 5-47 Assembly drawing of the key board

5.11.3

Disassembly and assembly method

Purpose
Damaged key board needs to be replaced by a new one.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Disassembly
1. Shut down the analyzer.
2. Open the front cover assembly.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 4 tapping screws (PT3X8) fixing the
key board, and then remove the board.

5-164

Hardware System

Figure 5-48 Disassemble the key board and the indicator board
1---Key board

2--- Tapping screw (PT3X8)

3---Front cover

4--- Indicator board

5--- Tapping screw (PT3X6)

Assembly
Assemble the key board as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

Verification
Turn on the analyzer and start up the PC when finish replacing the key board. Wait for the PC
interface to show ready, and then press the [OPEN] key in the front cover. If the sample
compartment door opens, then the key board is successfully replaced.

5.11.4

Troubleshooting

As the structure of the key board is quite simple, it seldom has errors. If there is no response
after pressing the keys, connect the 2 and 4 pins, as well as the 3 and 4 pins of the J1 interface.
If the circuit is closed after pressing one of the keys, the key board is out of error and you
should check other components for errors; if the circuit is open, the key is not working properly.

5-165

Maintenance

6.1 Maintenance Modules and the Corresponding


Settings
No.

Type

Settings to be reset
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
by software

Replace the drive board

1
2

Maintenance

Replace the autoloader board


Boards

Replace the data board


Replace the power board

4
5

Replace the volumetric board


Mechanism

Remove the sample feeding


assembly from the analyzer and
then re-assemble it

6
Remove the sample compartment
assembly from the analyzer and
then re-assemble it
7
8

Disassemble and assemble the


sample feeding assembly
Disassemble and assemble the
DIFF bath assembly or have it
upgraded

9
10

11

Remove the DIFF bath assembly


from the analyzer and then
re-assemble it
Remove the mix assembly from
the
analyzer
and
then
re-assemble it
Disassemble and assemble the
clipper or have it upgraded

12
13

14

Disassemble and assemble the


mix assembly
Replace
and
disassemble/assemble the front
cover

6-1

Re-adjust the position of the clipper by software


Re-adjust the gains, calibration factors and
count-related settings
Re-conduct the safety test
Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
sample feeding assembly
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
to the sample compartment and the autoloading
position by software.
1. Manually adjust the position of the sample
compartment on the sample feeding assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
assembly to the sample compartment by
software.
Re-assemble the sample feeding assembly as
per the steps specified in Section 6.8
1. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
assembly to the DIFF bath.
2. If the temperature and the mixing are greatly
changed, then re-adjusting the optical gain is
necessary.
Re-adjust the position of the sampling assembly
to the DIFF bath by software
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
mix assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
software.
1. Locate the clipper to the right position by
clamp.
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
software.
Re-assemble the mix assembly as per the
specified process.
1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the
mix assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the clipper by
software.

Maintenance

Replace
disassemble/assemble
bottom cover

and
the

15
Replace the aperture

16
17

Replace the bath


Baths
Replace the volumetric tube

18
19
20
21

Sequence

Replace HGB
The vacuum created in the
sequence is changed
Sample results are changed
greatly

6-2

1. Manually adjust the horizontal position of the


sample feeding assembly.
2. Re-adjust the position of the sampling
assembly to the sample compartment and the
autoloading position by software.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-adjust the gains and the calibration factors.
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
1. Re-enter the volume of the volumetric tube at
the setting screen.
2. Reset the count time and the start signal delay.
Re-adjust the gain and calibration of HGB.
Reset the count time and the start signal delay
Re-adjust the gain and the calibration.

Maintenance

6.2 General
You can service the analyzer as per Section 6.3 6.7 . After repairing, follow the verification
procedures to verify the analyzers status.

6-3

Maintenance

6.3 Disassembling the Panels


6.3.1 Removing the left door
Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the left side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the left door.

Tools
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord
2. Insert 107 the flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock
tongue 90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Figure 6-1 Removing the left door

Installation
Install the left door as per the above-mentioned steps in the reverse order.

6-4

Maintenance

6.3.2 Removing the right door


Purpose
To disassemble the electric and fluidic parts inside the right side of the analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the right door.

Tools
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Insert 107 flat-headed screwdriver into the slot of the door lock, and turn the lock tongue
90 counterclockwise.
3. Pull the side door outward from the bottom.

Make sure that the power supply is shut off when you remove the right door;
otherwise, the analyzer will alarm and stop running.

Figure 6-2 Removing the right door

6-5

Maintenance

Installation
Install the right door as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.3 Removing the top cover


Purpose
To disassemble the optical components, boards, cables and connectors, follow this procedure
to remove the top cover.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X8 small panhead screws.
3. Pull out the top cover from back upward.

6-6

Maintenance

Figure 6-3 Removing top cover


1 M4X8 small panhead screw

2 top cover

Installation
Install the top cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.4 Removing the back panel


Purpose
To maintain the fluidic connectors and electric circuits at the center of analyzer, follow this
procedure to remove the back panel.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver

6-7

Maintenance

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws
used for fixing the back panel of power supply
3. Pull the back panel outward.

Figure 6-4 Removing the back panel of power supply


1 M4X8 small panhead screw

2 back panel of power supply

Installation
Install the back panel as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6.3.5 Removing the front door


Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system inside the front cover, follow this procedure to remove the front
door.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
6-8

Maintenance
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.3 .
3. Turn the handspike handle 90 (clockwise and counterclockwise) to make it slide into the
slot in the front board, and the front door will be pushed open by the handspike.
4. Lift the front door upwards.

Figure 6-5 Removing the front door


1 Handspike handle

2 Handspike

3 Back panel

4 Mix mechanism

5 Front panel

6 Front door

6.3.6 Removing the front cover assembly


Purpose
To maintain the fluidic system, syringes and sample transport unit inside the front cover, follow
this procedure to remove the front cover.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

6-9

Maintenance

Removal
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the left door as per section 6.3.1 .
3. Remove the right door as per section 6.3.2 .
4. Remove the top cover board as per section 6.3.3 .
5. Make sure there are no tubes or tube racks left at the sample transport area (if there are,
remove them).
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M4X8 countersunk head screws
on the left, right and top side of the front cover.
7. Pull the front cover outward by 50 - 80 mm, and disconnect the indicator connector from
the indicator board.
8. Remove the front cover forward.

Figure 6-6 Removing the front cover assembly


1 M4X8 small panhead screw

2 top cover

3 Key board

4 indicator light board

5 right door

6 M4X8 countersunk head screw

7 front cover assembly

8 left door

Installation
Install the front cover as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

6-10

Maintenance

6.4 Replacing the Valves, Pumps and Syringes


(Reagent container and reagent inlet, waste bump, fluidic valve, pinch valve, syringe)

Figure 6-7 Removing fluidic system inside the left door


1 valve assembly I

2 M4X12 small panhead screws

3 plain washer 3

4 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw


(with lock washer)

5 diluent syringe

6 lyse syringe

7 M4X8 small panhead screws

8 pressure chamber

9 air pump

10valve assembly II

6-11

Maintenance

Figure 6-8 Removing fluidic system inside the right door


1 valve

2 M3X8 small panhead screw

3 M4X12 small panhead screw

4 vacuum chamber

5 waste pump assembly

6 valve assembly III

7 pinch valve

6-12

Maintenance

Figure 6-9 Removing fluidic system inside the front door


1 valve

2 pressure-leakage valve

3 M3X8 small panhead screw

4 sheath syringe

5 injection syringe

6 sampling syringe

7 plain washer 3

8 M3X12 cross-headed panhead screw


(with lock washer)

6.4.1 Replacing valves


Purpose
In case of malfunction of a valve(s), replace the valve.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the valve assemblies.

To remove the valve assembly (valve assembly I, valve assembly II, or valve assembly III)
6-13

Maintenance

1. To remove valve assembly I and II, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
valve assembly III, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).

2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the valve(s) as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9.

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.

4. Pull the valve assembly, outward and disconnect all lines from the assembly..
5. Take out valve assembly.

To remove a single valve (including pinch valve, or single valve on the valve assemblies)

1. To remove the valve on the left side, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ); to remove
the valve on the right side, remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ); to remove the
valve on the front side, remove the front cover assembly. (as per section 6.3.2 )

2. Disconnect all pipes connected to the valves as shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and
Figure 6-9 (if a pinch valve needs to be removed, remember to pinch the corresponding
tube).

3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws
fastening the valve assembly.

4. Pull the valve outward, and disconnect the lines connected to the valve. Then take the
valve out.

Figure 6-10 Valve assembly I

6-14

Maintenance

Figure 6-11 Valve assembly II

Figure 6-12 Valve assembly III


1 valve

2 M3X8 small panhead screw

3 valve bracket

Installation
Install the valve assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check the fluidic connections.
2. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.2 Replacing the Pressure Chamber


Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the pressure chamber.
6-15

Maintenance

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the pressure chamber.

To remove the pressure chamber:

1. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).


2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-7.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 small panhead screws.
4. Pull the pressure chamber out.

To disassemble the pressure chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate;
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the airproof screw fixed on the end cap,
then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

Figure 6-13 Removing pressure chamber


1M3X12 cross-headed panhead

2 end cap

screw (with lock washer)


3 O ring 48.7x1.8

4 O ring 9.5 x 1.8

5 airproof screw

6 mounting plate

7 air pressure chamber

6-16

Maintenance

Installation
Install the pressure chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.
2. Check the fluidic connections..
3. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.3 Replacing the Vacuum Chamber


Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the vacuum chamber.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the vacuum chamber.

To remove the vacuum chamber:

1. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 )


2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws.
4. Pull vacuum chamber outward.

To disassemble the vacuum chamber:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws,
then take out the end cap and mounting plate.
2. Use the 107 flat-headed screwdriver to remove the air tightening screw fixed on the end
cap, then take out the small O ring (9.5x1.8).
3. Take out the big O ring (48.7x1.8).

6-17

Maintenance

Figure 6-14 Removing vacuum chamber


1M3X12

cross-headed

panhead

2 end cap

screw (with lock washer)


3 O ring (48.7x1.8)

4 O ring (9.5x1.8)

5 airproof screw

6 mounting plate

7 air pressure chamber

Installation
Install the vacuum chamber as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.
2. Check the reagent connections.
3. Power on and verify the installation.

6.4.4 Replacing the Syringe Assembly


Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the syringe assembly.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver
2 mm hexagon wrench
6-18

Maintenance
2.5 mm hexagon wrench
150 mm monkey wrench

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the syringe.

To remove the syringe assembly

1. To the remove lyse syringe or diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 );
to the remove sheath syringe, injection syringe or sampling syringe, remove the front
cover assembly (as per section 6.3.5 ).
2. Disconnect all tubes connected to the syringe as shown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-9.
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X12 panhead washer screws
fixing syringe and 3 plain washer. .
4. Incline the assembly outward, and pull it out by 30 - 50mm. Disconnect the wire of the
motor and the photocoupler, and then take the assembly out. (* Note that the four rubber
washers of the syringe should be kept well for reassembly.)

To disassemble the syringe:

1. Remove the lyse syringe, injection syringe, and sample syringe

a. To remove the glass syringe unit on the lyse syringe (three 2.5ml syringes on the
assembly), remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).

b. To remove the glass syringe unit on the injection syringe or on the sample syringe (250ul
and 100ul respectively), remove the front cover (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 ).

c. The syringe assembly needs not to be disassembled wholly. Use the 107 flat-headed
screwdriver to remove the M4X8 special screw fixing the syringe. Rotate the left glass
syringe unit with hand, and then take out the washer of syringe (as per Figure 6-15).

Apply some glue to the threads. Do not proceed to the next step until the
glue is dry.

6-19

Maintenance

Figure 6-15 Removing glass syringe unit


1 M4X8 special screw

2 glass syringe unit

3 washer

d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 socket head screws on
the electric switch and remove the switch. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to
remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead screws, and then remove the electric switch
(Figure 6-16).

6-20

Maintenance

Figure 6-16 Removing syringe assembly


1MGN9-C1-R95-Z0CM

Linear

2 syringe slider

rolling guide
3 M3X8 socket head screw

4 43F4J-05-010 linear stepping motor

5 M3X6 cross-headed panhead

6 PHOTOELEC Optical Sensor

screw
7 syringe photocoupler bracket

8 M3X8 cross-headed panhead screw

9 Syringe protection shield

10 M4X8 retaining screw

e. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the syringe protection shield. Use
2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head screws on syringe slider.
Use 2 mm hexagon wrench to remove M4X8 retaining screw on syringe slider and remove
the syringe slider. Use 2.5 mm hexagon wrench to remove the four M3X8 socket head
screws fastening the linear stepping motor , then remove the linear stepping motor (Figure
6-21

Maintenance
6-16);

Make sure to insert the retaining screw into the corresponding hole, and
apply some glue to the threads.

f. Use 2.5mm hexagon wrench to remove the three M3X8 socket head screws on linear
rolling guide, and then remove the linear rolling guide. (*Note: The slider should not be off
its guide way.)
2. Remove diluent syringe and sheath syringe (*Note: Two syringes are the same, both being
the 10ml Mindray syringe.)

a. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the diluent syringe, remove the left door (as per
section 6.3.1 )

b. To remove the Mindray syringe unit on the sheath syringe, remove the front cover
assembly (as per section 6.3.5 or 6.3.6 )

c. The syringe assembly should not be removed wholly. Use the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver and flat-headed screwdriver to remove the 10ml syringe presser the two
tailor-made M3X12 socket head screws, and remove the Mindray syringe unit. (Figure
6-17)

Figure 6-17 Removing Mindray syringe unit


1 10ml syringe presser

2 M3X12 socket head screw

3 Mindray syringe unit

4 M4X8 tailor-made screws

6-22

Maintenance

d. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X10 panhead screws. The
ceramic plug, flange, lock ring and O ring can be disassembled in the axis direction.
(Figure 6-18)

Figure 6-18 Removing Mindray syringe unit


1 10ml ceramic plug

PT3X10

cross-headed

panhead

screw
3 10ml syringe flange

4 10ml syringe lock ring

5 O ring 15X3

6 10ml syringe body

Before replacing the lock ring, make sure relative parts (especially the
operation surface of the ceramic plug) are clean, and then insert the plug
into the flange, lock ring and O ring in turn and make it fixed to the syringe
body.

Installation
Install the Mindray syringe unit as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.
2. Check wire connections.
3. Check reagent connections.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-23

Maintenance

6.4.5 Replacing the Waste Pump


Purpose
In case of malfunction, replace the waste pump.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver
100 mm monkey wrench

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the waste pump:

1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
3. Disconnect the four tubes connected to the pump;
4. Disconnect the two wires connected to the pump;
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X12 small panhead screws
on fastening assembly as shown in Figure 6-8.
6. Move the assembly left, make the fastening hole out of the bolt, and then remove it.

To disassemble the waste pump:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the pump.
2. Remove the waste pump
3. Use the 100 mm monkey wrench to remove the three nuts and take out the three washers.
4. Remove the pump mounting plate.
5. Remove three shock pads via hand.

6-24

Maintenance

Figure 6-19 Removing waste pump


1 M3X8 small panhead screws

2 rotary pump

3 pump mounting plate

4 8-32UNC-2B nut

5 GB93 4 washer

6 shock pad

7 bracket

Installation
Install the waste pump as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check if all parts are correctly assembled and tightened.
2. Check the electrical connection of the rotatory pump.
3. Check the reagent connections.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-25

Maintenance

6.5 Replacing the Bath/Aperture Assembly


Purpose
In case of malfunction of the WBC or RBC reaction bath assembly, replace the corresponding
assembly.

Tools
107 cross-headed screwdriver
107 flat-headed screwdriver

Removal
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic system. Power off the analyzer and unplug the
power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the left door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.1 ).
4. Remove the top cover (as per section 6.3.1 ).
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed washer
screws on the top cover of data board shielding box, and then remove the top cover.
6. Disconnect the bath signal lines of the WBC reaction bath or RBC reaction bath that needs
to be removed, and then loosen all buckles fastening the lines in the direction of wiring,
until the wire is drawn to the bath.
7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove M3X8 small panhead screw on bath
shield and take it out, then remove the shield. (Figure 6-21)
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws on
bath presser and take it out, then remove the bath presser. (Figure 6-21)
9. Pull the bath out with a distance of about 50-80 mm. Disconnect all tubes connected to the
bath. Get the signal wire from wire-protective ring and then remove the WBC bath
assembly or the RBC bath assembly.

6-26

Maintenance

Figure 6-20 Removing signal lines of bath


1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead

2 top cover of data board shielding box

washer screw
3 data board

Figure 6-21 Removing bath assembly


1 shielding plate

2 WBC bath

3 bath presser

4 M3X8 small panhead screw

5 RBC bath

6 shield cover

7 isolation chamber clamp

8 isolation chamber
6-27

Maintenance

Installation
Install the bath assembly as per the above-mentioned procedures in the reverse order.

Verification
1. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
2. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
3. Check if the connection of power line and reagent pipe is correct or not.
4. Power on and verify the installation.

6-28

Maintenance

6.6 Replacing the Sampling Module and Adjusting


Position
6.6.1 Replacing the Sample Probe and Wipe
Purpose
To remove or replace the sample probe and probe wipe, follow the steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

Replace parts according to requirements:

Probe wipe
open vial sample probe / piercing needle
metal wipe clip
sample probe presser

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer if it is running.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).
4. Move the sampling module to the back of analyzer.

Removal
1. Remove the probe wipe from the sampling module (Figure 6-22)

a. Disconnect the two tubes from the probe wipe.


b. Pull the wipe downward to remove the probe wipe, as indicated by the arrow in the
figure below, and remove the wipe clip.

c. Separate the wipe from sampling module in the direction of arrow


d. Get out the inlet and outlet pipe from the wipe.

6-29

Maintenance

Figure 6-22 Removing wipe


1 pipe clamp

2 presser under the guiding rod

3 probe wipe

4 wipe clip

2. Remove the sample probe from the sampling module. (Figure 6-23)

a. Pull out the sample aspiration tube from the above of sample probe.
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the retaining screw (M3X8 small
panhead screw) on probe presser, and take out the fixing flake.

c. Get out the probe from sideward.

6-30

Maintenance

Figure 6-23 Removing sample probe


1 slider

2 sample probe

3 presser

4 M3X8 small panhead screw

When remove the sample probe, get probe wipe out of the presser under
guiding rod. The probe tip may contain biohazardous materials. Exercise
caution when handling it and keep it to the right position.

Installation
To install a new sample probe and wipe, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse
order.

6.6.2 Replacing the Optical Sensor


Purpose
To remove or replace the optical sensor, follow the steps in this section.

6-31

Maintenance

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver107X75

Replace parts according to requirements:

Sensor module on motor position3003-21-34925


Photocoupler fixer

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right door (as per section 6.3.2 ).

Removal
1. Remove the vertical optical sensor module (Figure 6-24)

a. Disconnect the connector of the sensor to be replaced ( not shown in the figure).
b. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the sensor.
c. Remove the sensor module from the bracket.

Figure 6-24 Removing vertical optical sensor


1 M3x6 cross-headed screw

2 sensor module on motor position

3 bracket
2. Remove the horizontal optical sensor module (Figure 6-25)

a. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw on the photocoupler
6-32

Maintenance
presser to be replaced

b. Gently pull out the photocoupler presser (with the sensor module on motor position)
from the sample mother board and get out the plug of sensor module from the
corresponding hole.

c. Disconnect the sensor connector (not shown in figure). Take out the photocoupler
presser and the sensor module on motor position.

d. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M3x6 screw fixing the sensor module.
Separate the photocoupler presser from the sensor module on the motor position.

Figure 6-25 Removing optical sensor on horizontal position

Installation
To install a new optical sensor, repeat the above removal step 1 or 2 in the reverse order.

6.6.3 Removing the Sampling Module


Purpose
To remove the sampling module, follow steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

wire cutter

Replace parts according to requirements:

Sampling module
6-33

Maintenance

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Move the analyzer to turn its right side outward, and expose the back side as much as
possible.
4. Open the back cover of the analyzer (as per section 6.3.2 )
5. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )
6. Move the sampling module to the back of the analyzer.

Removal
1. Disconnect all tubes from on the sampling module, and cut the binding belt with the wire
cutter. Remove the tubes from the whole sampling module.
2. Disconnect all the connectors of the vertical part of sampling module, and unplug the
connector from the motor directly.
3. Disconnect all the connectors of the horizontal part of sampling module from the space left
by opened back cover at the back of the analyzer. (BC-5380 has four connectors, and
BC-5380 has five connectors). Unplug the connectors from the motor directly.
4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws fixing
the joint.
5. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X12 cross panhead screws fixing
the sampling module.
6. Hold the sampling module and move it gently outward. Pull out the optical sensor module
from corresponding hole with caution. Be careful not to damage or break the line.
7. Check if all connectors of optical sensor module are drawn out from the corresponding
holes, then hold out the sampling module.

6-34

Maintenance

Figure 6-26 Removing the sampling module


1 M3X8 small panhead screw

2 link

3 spacer

4 sampling module

5 M4X12 panhead screw

Watch for the sampling probe when removing sampling module. If


necessary, remove sampling probe first as introduced in section 6.6.1 to
avoid potential biologic pollution.

6-35

Maintenance

Installation
To replace new sampling module, repeat the above step 1 to 7 in the reverse order.

6-36

Maintenance

6.7 Maintaining and Replacing the DIFF Reaction


Bath
Purpose
To remove DIFF reaction bath, follow steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

wire cutter

Replace parts according to requirements:

DIFF reaction bath

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per section 6.3.2 )

Removal
1. Use the wire cutter to cut off the binding belts fixing the tubes and remove them from the
DIFF bath assembly.
2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M4X8 small panhead screws fixing
the DIFF bath assembly.
3. Hold the DIFF bath assembly and move it gently outward. Expose the connectors and pipe
connectors at the back side, and then disconnect them.
4. Take out the DIFF bath assembly.

6-37

Maintenance

Figure 6-27 Removing DIFF bath assembly


1 DIFF bath assembly

2 M4X8 small panhead screw

Installation
To replace new DIFF bath assembly, repeat the above removal step 1 to 4 in the reverse order.
Remember to readjust the position of the sample probe over the DIFF bath as per Step 11 to
14 in Section 6.10.1 .

6-38

Maintenance

6.8 Autoloader Assembly (Closed-Tube)


6.8.1 Removing

and

replacing

the

closed-tube

sample

compartment assembly
Purpose
To remove or replace the closed-tube sample compartment, follow steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

1.5mm hexagonal wrench

sharp-nose pliers or small flat-headed screwdriver

Replace parts according to requirements:

Damp gear
PHOTOELEC switch
Gear
Electromagnet

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )

Removal
Follow these two procedures to disassemble the waste pump.

To remove the sample compartment assembly:

1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )


2. Unplug the connector of the photoelectric switch on the sample compartment assembly
and the cable connector of the electromagnet.
3. Mark the position of the sample compartment assembly on the autoloader board (make
sure the sample compartment assembly can be installed back to the right position).
4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the 3 M4X8 small panhead screws, and
then move out the closed-tube sample compartment assembly in the direction as indicated
by the arrowhead in Figure 6-28.

6-39

Maintenance

Figure 6-28 Removing the sample compartment assembly


1 Autoloader

2 Sample compartment assembly

3 M4X8 small panhead screw

To disassembly the closed-tube sample compartment assembly:

1. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws, and then remove the electromagnet assembly; remove the two M3X6
cross-headed panhead screws in the electromagnet assembly, and then remove the
electromagnet body; remove the E ring to take out the spring, as shown in Figure 6-29

6-40

Maintenance

Figure 6-29 Removing the electromagnet assembly


1 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

2 Electromagnet assembly

3 E ring

4 Spring

5 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

6 Electromagnet body

2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screw fixing the photocouplers, and then remove the photocouplers, as shown in Figure
6-30

Figure 6-30 Removing the photocouplers


1 PHOTOELEC switch

2 M4X12 cross-headed panhead screw

6-41

Maintenance
3. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X5 set screws, and then remove
the gear; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed
panhead screws fixing the damp gear, and then remove the damp gear, as shown in
Figure 6-31.

Figure 6-31 Removing the gear and the damp gear


1 M3X5 set screw

2 Gear

3 Damp gear

4 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

4. Use the sharp-nose pliers to remove the spring from either of the two fixing ends, as
shown in Figure 6-32.
5. Use the sharp-nose pliers or the small flat-headed screwdriver to remove either of the two
D2 E rings on the shaft, and loosen the two M3X5 set screws in the tube holder
compartment fixing the shaft. Then take out the shaft and remove the tube holder
compartment body and the helical torsion springs.

During installation, make sure the M3X5 set screws are fixed in the same
level of the notches in the shaft, and one of the screws should be plunged
into the cone-shaped hole.

6-42

Maintenance

Figure 6-32 Removing the helical torsion springs


1 D2 E ring

2 Shaft

3 M3X5 set screw

4 Tube holder compartment

5 Pulling spring

6 Helical torsion springs

6. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X5 set screw fixing the shaft, and then
you can take out the shaft, deep groove ball bearing, wheel, bush and gasket in turn, as
shown in Figure 6-33.

During installation, the two bearings should be put into the wheel (the
bearings are supposed to be cling to the inner of the wheel) until their ends
reaches those of the wheel; the set screws should be fixed in the level of the
notches in the shaft.

6-43

Maintenance

Figure 6-33 Disassembling the shaft assembly


1 Shaft

2 3x6x2.5 deep groove ball bearing

3 Wheel

4 Bush

5 Gasket

6 M3X5 set screw

Installation

To replace the sample compartment assembly with a new one, repeat the first removal
procedure (step 1 to 4) in the reverse order. During installation, take into account the
following items:

1. One side of the sample compartment assembly should be set close to the positioning step
raised on the bottom board (autoloader bottom board)
2. Be sure to install the assembly back to the position marked in disassembly.

To replace components like the photocouplers, electromagnet, damp gear or springs,


repeat the second procedure above in the reverse order. During installation, take into
account the following items:

1. The tube holder compartment body should be put right in the center
2. Always install the damp gear after the gear is installed
3. Turn the core of the electromagnet 360 and make sure there is no interference
4. Move the guiding axis of the electromagnet with you hand and make sure the sample
compartment can turn properly. Push the compartment body back to the initial position and
make sure it can be locked up.

6-44

Maintenance

6.8.2 Removing and replacing the detection switches of the


sample transport unit
Purpose
To remove or replace the detection switches (detecting the sample transport unit for proper
loading of tube rack and empty/full status of the unloader), follow the steps in this section.

Tools

101 cross-headed screwdriver

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

Replace parts according to requirements:

Sensitive switch
PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )

Removal
1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )
2. Unplug the cable connector corresponding to the switch to be replaced
3. Use the 101 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M2X8 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sensitive switch detecting the proper loading of tube racks, and then
remove the sensitive switch.

During installation, remember to check the orientation of the sensitive


switch and make necessary adjustment. To make adjustment, move the tube
rack manually to where the switch locates until it cannot be moved any
more; the clicking sound made by the sensitive switch indicates proper
installation (move the tube rack repeatedly to identify).

4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the M2X8 small panhead screws fixing
the switches detecting the empty/full status of the unloader, and then remove the switch,
as shown in Figure 6-34.
6-45

Maintenance

Install the switch as level as possible.

Figure 6-34 Disassembling the switches of the sample transport assembly


1 M3X8 small panhead screw

2 PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

3 M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw

4 Sensitive switch

Installation
To replace the switch with a new one, repeat Step 1 to 4 above in the reverse order.

6.8.3 Replacing the sample transport unit


Purpose
As there may be errors with the sample transport unit (especially the switches and driving
units) during operation, you need to replace these components according to the steps in this
section.

Tools

101 cross-headed screwdriver


6-46

Maintenance

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

1.5mm hexagonal wrench

2.5mm hexagonal wrench

3mm hexagonal wrench

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )

Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the sample transport unit.

Remove the sample transport unit:

1. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )


2. Remove the shielding box from the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the sample transport assembly and the autoloader control board
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M4X12 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sample transport unit, and then remove the sample transport unit, as
shown in Figure 6-35.
Note: You should readjust the position of the sample transport unit during installation. See
Chapter 3 for how to make adjustment.

6-47

Maintenance

Figure 6-35 Disassembling the sample transport unit (1)


1 Sample transport unit

2 M4X12 panhead screw

Disassemble the sample transport assembly:

1. See Figure 6-36 for components of the sample transport compartment

6-48

Maintenance

Figure 6-36 Disassembling the sample transport unit (2)


1 Loading unit (forth-and-back)

2 Sample transport frame

3 Closed-tube sample compartment assembly

4 Riser unit

5 Unloader unit

6 Platform unit

7 Loading unit (left-and-right)

8 Backboard

2. Unplug the connector of the stationary barcode scanner; use the 107 screwdriver to
unscrew the four M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the stationary barcode scanner and
its bracket on the backboard unit, and then remove the stationary barcode scanner and its
bracket, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove other units on the backboard like the
tube detecting photocouplers and the tube rack locating plate as per Figure 6-37

During installation, make sure the back of the tube locating block and that of
the tube rack locating plate are at the same plane; adjust the distance
between the tube rack block and the tube rack to be around 0.2mm.

6-49

Maintenance

Figure 6-37 Disassembling the sample transport unit (3)


1 Stationary barcode scanner

2 Barcode scanner bracket

3 Backboard bracket

4 Sensor fixing board

5 M3X8 small panhead screw

6 Tube rack locating plate

7 Rubber baffle plate

8 Rubber baffle plate presser

9 M2X4 cross-headed panhead screw

10PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective)

11Tube locating block


4. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the unloader unit and remove the connector of the photoelectric sensor on the
unloader unit, and then remove the unloader unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the unloader unit as per Figure 6-38

6-50

Maintenance

Figure 6-38 Disassembling the sample transport unit (4)


1 M3X8 small panhead screw

2 M4X10 cross-headed panhead screw

3 GP1A05A photoelectric sensor

4 Unloader pulling spring

5 Sensory plate

6 Top cover of the gear holder

7 Gear shaft

8 Short rack

9 Gear holder

10Long rack

11Bottom cover of the gear holder

12M3X8 cross-headed countersunk screw

13Unloader bracket
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the spring presser, and then remove the spring presser, as shown in Figure 6-36 and
Figure 6-39

6-51

Maintenance

Figure 6-39 Disassembling the sample transport unit (5)


1 Riser unit

2 Large plain washer GB96 3

3 Spring presser

4 M3X8 small panhead screw

5 Shaft sleeve

6 Sensory plate 3

7. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two M3X8 small panhead screws
fixing the front supporting board, and then remove the front supporting board, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40
8. Unplug the connectors of the sensitive switch and the PHOTOCOUPLER (reflective) on
the platform unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the six M3X8 small
panhead screws fixing the platform unit, and then remove the platform unit, as shown in
Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-40

6-52

Maintenance

Figure 6-40 Disassembling the sample transport unit (6)


1 M3X8 small panhead screw

2 Sample transport platform

3 M4X8 panhead screw

4 Front supporting board

9. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the three photoelectric sensor in the
left-and-right loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
left-and-right loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-41
10. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench and the 107 cross-headed
screwdriver to remove the left-and-right loading unit as per Figure 6-41

6-53

Maintenance

Figure 6-41 Disassembling the sample transport unit (7)


1 Stepping motor PK244M-01B

2 M3X5 hexagon set screw

3 Washer

4 Driven belt shaft

5 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4

6 E ring GB/T896-86.4

7 Guiding rail supporting block

8 Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A

9 Guiding rail MGN9C1R95ZOCM

10M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

11Belt presser

12Left-and-right loading slid plate

13M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

14Shaft sleeve

15M3X12

16Pallet

cross-headed

panhead

screw (with washer)


17Plain washer GB97.1 3

18M4X10 cross-head panhead screw

19Synchronous belt

20M3X8 small panhead screw

21Left-and-right loader bracket

22Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4

11. Unplug the connectors of the stepping motor and the two photoelectric sensor in the
forth-and-back loading unit; use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four
M3X8 small panhead screws fixing the left-and-right loading unit, and then remove the
forth-and-back loading unit, as shown in Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-42
12. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench, 2.5mm hexagonal wrench, 101 cross-headed
screwdriver and the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the forth-and-back loading
unit as per Figure 6-42
6-54

Maintenance

Figure 6-42 Disassembling the sample transport unit (8)


1 Driven belt shaft

2 Washer

3 Synchronous belt TBN160MXL025

4 Synchronous pulley, P16MXL6.4

5 Stepping motor PK244M-01B

6 M2X8 cross-headed panhead screw

7 Large plain washer GB96 3

8 Right pusher

9 M3X5 hexagon countersunk head

10Belt presser

set screw
11M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

12Pulling spring

13M3X12 cross-headed panhead

14Shaft sleeve 2

screw (with washer)


15Left pusher

16Forth-and-back loading pusher board

17Photoelectric sensor GP1A05A

18M3X8 small panhead screw

19M4X10 cross-headed panhead

20Guiding rail MGN9C1R155ZOCM

screw
21M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

22Forth-and-back loader bracket

23E ring GB/T896-86.4

24Synchronous belt TBN160MXL02


(two positioning plate)

6-55

Maintenance

Installation
Repeat the removal steps in the reverse order to install.
Take into account the following items during installation and adjustment:

Requirements for installing the forth-and-back loading unit:

Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.

Requirements for installing the left-and-right loading unit:

Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before installation
Before installing the synchronous pulley of the driven belt shaft, apply some lubricator on the
surface of the shaft.
Make sure the shaft end of the stepping motor and the end of the synchronous pulley are at
the same plane.
While installing the stepping motor, adjust the tensility of the synchronous belt before locking
up screws.

Requirements for installing the unloader unit:

Make sure the two racks can move freely with little resistance after installation. If the resistance
is large, repair is necessary; otherwise, the unit may not be able to restore the initial position.
See the initial positions of the short rack in Figure 6-43 with one tooth hanging over the end.

Figure 6-43 Initial position of the short rack

Requirements for installing the sample transport unit:

While installing the assembled sample transport unit to the main unit, readjust tbe sample
proble position as per Step 1 to 10 in Section 6.10.1

6-56

Maintenance

Verification
1. Readjust the position of the sample probe as per Step 10 to 14 in Section 6.10.1 .
2. Check if all parts are mounted to the former position and are fastened.
3. Check if the connection of signal lines of WBC or RBC is correct or not.
4.

Power on and verify the installation.

6-57

Maintenance

6.9 Mix mechanism


Purpose
As there may be errors with the mix mechanism during operation, you need to replace the
mix mechanism according to the steps in this section.

Tools

107 cross-headed screwdriver (107X75)

1.5mm hexagonal wrench

2.5mm hexagonal wrench

3mm hexagonal wrench

Replace parts according to requirements:

BC-5380 mix mechanism

Preparation
1. Power off the analyzer.
2. Turn off the main power switch on the right side of the analyzer and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the right side door (as per Section 6.3.2 )
4. Remove the left side door (as per Section 6.3.1 )
5. Remove the top cover (as per Section 6.3.3 )

Removal
Follow the two procedures to remove and disassemble the mix mechanism.

Remove the mix mechanism:

1. Remove the shielding box on the autoloader board, and unplug the cable connectors
between the mix mechanism and the autoloader control board
2. Remove the front cover assembly (as per Section 6.3.6 )
3. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the four M4X8 panhead screws, and
then remove the mix mechanism, as shown in Figure 6-44.

6-58

Maintenance

Figure 6-44 Removing the mix mechanism


1 Mix mechanism

2 M4X8 small panhead screw

Disassemble the mix mechanism:

1. Unfasten the plastic cable tie fixing the components and pull out the plugs from the five
photocouplers and three motors to the cable, and then remove the cable
2. Use the 107 cross-headed screwdriver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the small motor protection cover, and then remove the cover, as shown in
Figure 6-45
3. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the three M3X8 cheese head hexagon
screws connecting the rotation and X-co motion unit and the Z-co motion unit, and then
remove the two units, as shown in Figure 6-45

6-59

Maintenance

Figure 6-45 Disassembling the mix mechanism


1 Rotation and X-co motion unit

2 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

3 Small motor protection cover

4M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

5 Z-co motion unit


4. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the protection cover, and then remove the protection cover, as shown in
6-60

Maintenance
Figure 6-46
5. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the two photocouplers on the 43 motor installation board, and then remove
the motor installation board and the elements on the board (draw out the motor shaft from
the motor nut), as shown in Figure 6-46
6. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the motor nut, and then remove the nut, as shown in Figure 6-46
7. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the connection block, and then remove the block, as shown in Figure 6-46
8. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the Z-co sensory plate, and then remove the two Z-co photocoupler sensory
plates, as shown in Figure 6-46
9. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the five M3X5 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail, as
shown in Figure 6-46
10. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling

Figure 6-46 Disassembling the mix mechanism

6-61

Maintenance
1 Protection cover

2 Photocouplers

3 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

4Connecting block

5 Motor nut

6 Z-co sensory plate

7 Linear guiding rail MGN9C1R175Z0CM

8 Bracket

9 M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

10 M3X8 small panhead screw

11 43 motor installation board

12 Sensor installation bracket

11. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the sensor installation bracket, as shown in Figure 6-47
12. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X8 cheese head hexagon screws
fixing the linear stepping motor E43H4Q, and then remove the linear stepping motor
E43H4Q, four M3 large washer and 8 O rings, as shown in Figure 6-47

Figure 6-47 Disassembling the mix mechanism


1 Linear stepping motor E43H4Q

2 O ring

3 43 motor installation board

4M3X6 cross-headed panhead


screw

5 Sensor installation bracket

6 M3 large washer

7 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

8 Sleeve

13. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the six M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, and
then remove the photocouplers, X-co sensory plate, X-co sensor installation board, as
shown in Figure 6-48
14. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the four M2.5X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor, and then remove the stepping motor E28H41, as
shown in Figure 6-48
15. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 cheese head hexagon fixing
the 28 motor installation board, and then remove the installation board, as shown in Figure
6-48
6-62

Maintenance
16. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the connecting board, and then remove the connecting board
17. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw
fixing the linear guiding rail MGN9C1R75Z0CM, and then remove the guiding rail
18. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixed in the slider connecting board for baffling

Figure 6-48 Disassembling the mix mechanism


1 Linear motor E28H41

2 M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

3 28 motor installation board

4M2.5X6

cross-headed

panhead

screw
5 Slider connecting board

linear

guiding

rail

MGN9C1R75Z0CM
7 Connecting board

8 M3X5 cheese head hexagon screw

9 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

10 X-co sensory plate

11 Photocouplers

12 X-co sensor installation board

19. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the presser,

6-63

Maintenance
and then remove the presser, as shown in Figure 6-49
20. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the rotation
photocoupler plate, and then remove the rotation photocoupler plate, as shown in Figure
6-49
21. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M3X8 hexagon screw fixing the swing
arm and use the 2mm hexagonal wrench to remove the M4X8 set screw fixing the swing
arm, and then remove the swing arm
22. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the two M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the spring tube pincher, and them remove the M3 large washer and the
spring tube pincher, as shown in Figure 6-49
23. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four M3X10 cheese head hexagon
screws fixing the rotation stepping motor, and then remove the four M3 large washer, the
rotation stepping motor and the synchronous belt, as shown in Figure 6-49
24. Use the 1.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the four set screws fixing the two small
pulleys, and then remove the pulleys, as shown in Figure 6-49
25. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal wrench to remove the two M3X8 screws fixing the bearing
holder, and then remove the bearing holder, pulley shaft and the two deep groove ball
bearings, as shown in Figure 6-49
26. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the three M3X6 cross-headed panhead
screws fixing the linear stepping motor E28H41 nut, and then remove the linear stepping
motor E28H41 nut, as shown in Figure 6-49
27. Use the 107 cross-headed screw driver to remove the M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw
fixing the rotation sensor bracket, and then remove the rotation sensor bracket and the
photocouplers

Figure 6-49 Disassembling the mix mechanism

6-64

Maintenance
1 Presser

2 Spring tube pincher

3 Rubber washer

4M3X8 cheese head hexagon screw

5 Swing arm

6 M4X8 set screw

7 M3X5 set screw

8 Small pulley

9 Pulley shaft

10 Rotation motor installation board

11

Rotation

sensor

bracket

and

12 Bearing holder

photocouplers
13 Deep groove ball bearing

14 Rotation sensory plate

15 Rotation stepping motor

16 Linear stepping motor E28H41 nut

17 M3X6 cross-headed panhead screw

18 M3 large washer

19 M3X10 cheese head hexagon screw

20 Synchronous belt

Installation
Perform the steps above in the reverse order to install.
During installation or position adjustment, take into consideration the following items:
1. Install the guiding rail close to one side, and put in the positioning screws before
installation
2. Make sure the motion parts can move properly
3. Keep the synchronous belt fully tightened
4. Adjust the initial position of the pincher (for forth-and-back movement, left-and-right
movement, and rotation) while installing the assembled unit to the main unit. See Section
6.10.2 for how to make adjustment.

6-65

Maintenance

6.10 Adjustment
6.10.1

Adjusting Sample Probe Position

1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and open the sample compartment manually. Put the
sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample compartment and close the
compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-50. Loosen the three screws on the sample
transport unit shown in Figure 6-51, Figure 6-52 and Figure 6-53. Move the sample probe
assembly and sample transport unit horizontally and enable the sample probe to aim at the
central hole in the locating fixture, and then fix the three screws.

Figure 6-50 Sample transport unit

Figure 6-51 Left screw

Figure 6-52 middle screw

Figure 6-53 Right screw

2. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the PC software on the main unit and on the PC. Then, enter the user name
service and the password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the
pop-up box, and then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message
box will pop up asking you whether to Ignore fluidic initialization?. Click Yes to skip
the initialization.
3. Press the [OPEN] key on the front cover, and the sample compartment will be opened
automatically. Put the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture in the sample
compartment, as shown in Figure 6-54.

6-66

Maintenance

Figure 6-54 Placing the sample probe in-compartment locating fixture


4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen, as shown in Figure
6-55.

Figure 6-55 Clicking Debug


5. Click CT Piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move to the
position above the sample compartment automatically, as shown in Figure 6-56.

6-67

Maintenance

Click Start

Figure 6-56 Starting CT piercing position adjustment


6. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the position of the sample probe,
making the probe inserted into the slot, and then click Up to move out the probe, as
shown in Figure 6-57.

6-68

Maintenance

Click Stop

Click Forward,
Backward,
Up and Down

Figure 6-57 Adjusting the CT piercing position using the software


7. Put a piece of paper on the locating fixture and click Down to make the sample probe
touch the paper. Then click Stop to save the position of the probe over the sample
compartment. Open the sample compartment manually to remove the sample
in-compartment locating fixture and close the compartment door, as shown in Figure 6-58.

Figure 6-58 Placing a piece of paper on the fixture


8. Put the sample probe autoloading locating fixture at the autoloading position of the sample
6-69

Maintenance
transport assembly, as shown in Figure 6-59

Figure 6-59 Placing the locating fixture at the piercing position


9. Click AL piercing Position and Start in turn, and the sample probe will move onto the
autoloading position, as shown in Figure 6-60

Click Start

Figure 6-60 Starting AL piercing position adjustment


10. Click Forward, Backward, Down and Up to adjust the position of the sample probe,
6-70

Maintenance
making the probe inserted into the slot of the locating fixture. Click Up and put a paper on
the AL positioning fixture, and then click Down until the sample probe reaches the paper,
as shown in Figure 6-61. Click Stop to save the autoloading position of the sample probe,
and then remove the sample probe AL positioning fixture, as shown in Figure 6-62.

Click Stop

Click Forward,
Backward,
Down and Up

Figure 6-61 Adjusting the sample probe AL piercing position using the software

Figure 6-62 Sample probe reaching the paper


11. Put the sample probe DIFF bath up position locating fixture in the aperture of the DIFF
6-71

Maintenance
bath, as shown in Figure 6-63.

Figure 6-63 Placing the DIFF bath up position locating fixture


12. Click DIFF Bath Up Position, and then click Start to move the sample probe onto the
DIFF bath, as shown in Figure 6-64.
Click Start

Figure 6-64 Starting DIFF bath position adjustment


13. Click Forward, Backward, Up and Down to adjust the sample probe, making it
inserts in the position in front of the round slot. Click Stop to save the position of the
sample probe, and then remove the fixture, as shown in Figure 6-65.
6-72

Maintenance

Click Forward,
Backward, Up
and Down

Click Stop

Click Ok

Figure 6-65 Adjusting the sample probe DIFF bath up position using the software
14. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen.

6.10.2

Adjusting Pincher Position

1. Switch off the power of the analyzer and put the tube rack at the piercing position of the
sample transport unit, making the recess of the tube rack lap over the presser, as shown in
Figure 6-66, Figure 6-67 and Figure 6-68.

Recess
Figure 6-66 The recess of the tube rack

6-73

Maintenance

Presser

Figure 6-67 The presser of the sample transport unit

The presser laps over the


recess of the tube rack

Figure 6-68 Placing the tube rack


2. Move the pincher to the tube grabbing position and push upwards. Then put the tube
locating fixture into the pincher and make the pincher upright. Move the pincher
downwards slowly, and check if the tube locating fixture can be inserted to the tube rack
properly. If not, remove the four set screws and the left-and-right mixing assembly to insert
the tube locating fixture to the tube rack. Secure the screws after adjustment, as shown in
Figure 6-69.

Four screws

Tube locating
fixture

Figure 6-69 Adjusting the manipulator position manually


3. Connect the reagents properly and connect the main unit and the PC with a network cable.
Start up the main unit and the PC software. Then, enter the user name service and the
6-74

Maintenance
password Se s700 (note: there is a space between e and s) into the pop-up box, and
then click Ok to initialize the analyzer. During initialization, a message box will pop up
asking you whether to skip the initialization. Click Yes to skip the initialization
4. Click Menu Service Debug to enter the Debug screen
5. Click Manipulator and Start in turn, and the pincher will move onto the tube grabbing
position, as shown in Figure 6-70.

Click Start

Figure 6-70 Starting manipulator position adjustment


6. Put the tube rack at the piercing position of the sample transport unit, and then put the
tube locating fixture into the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-71

Figure 6-71 Placing the pincher locating fixture


7. Click Left and Right to adjust the pincher to be upright, and then click Forward,
6-75

Maintenance
Backward, Up and Down to make the tube locating fixture able to insert in the hole of
the AL piercing position locating fixture. Click Up and remove the two fixtures, as shown
in Figure 6-72 and Figure 6-73.

Click
Left,
Right Forward,
Backward, Up
and Down
Click Stop

Click Ok
Figure 6-72 Adjusting the pincher position using the software

Figure 6-73 The hole in the piercing position locating fixture


8. Click Stop to save the position of the pincher, as shown in Figure 6-72.
9. Click Ok to exit the Debug screen, as shown in Figure 6-72.

6-76

Optical System

7.1 Optical System Adjustment and Troubleshooting


Purpose
To replace and repair the optical system component in case of malfunction.

Tools
Antistatic gloves
Hexagon wrench
Cross-headed screwdriver
Flat-headed screwdriver
Horologic driver
Duke (4K-07) 7m standard particles
Oscilloscope or oscillometer

Removal and installation


Before removing the optical system component, remove the right side door and the top cover
of the analyzer first (refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance), then remove all the screws on them, as
Figure 7-1 shows. Remove the protective cover of the optical system. After component
installation, reinstall the protective cover and secure it. The above-mentioned steps will not be
repeated in the following procedures.

7-1

Optical System

Screws

Figure 7-1 Remove the protective cover of the optical system

7-2

Optical System

7.2 Removing

and

Installing

Optical

System

Assemblies
The optical system consists of the following assemblies: the front light assembly, flow cell
assembly, rear light collimator assembly, beam splitter assembly, rear light collector assembly,
and rear light detector assembly.

Wear antistatic gloves when removing boards.

Be sure to turn off the analyzer and disconnect the power cord before
removing boards.

Do not plug/unplug the laser generator unless the power cord is


disconnected. Otherwise, the laser generator will be damaged.

7.2.1 Laser driver board


The laser driver board supplies power to the laser generator and controls the output power of
the laser.
1. Turn off the analyzer, open the laser cover and remove the connecting line from the driver
board.
2. Remove the fixing screws, and remove the laser driver board support.
3. Replace the laser driver board and reinstall it in the reverse order, then secure the fixing
screws.

7-3

Optical System

Figure 7-2 Laser driver board installation


1fixing screws of laser driver board

2fixing screws of laser driver board

support

7.2.2 Front light assembly


The front light assembly generates the laser beam that enters the flow cell. Remove and install
the assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-3 for the assembly drawing.
1. Turn off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Disconnect the laser power connector from the laser control board. Disconnect the heater,
temperature sensor and over temperature protection switch connectors.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at the two sides of the front light
assembly and remove the assembly.
4. Use the hexagon wrench and the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the screws fixing
the laser generator assembly and the cylindrical mirror assembly separately, and then
remove the assemblies from the front light guide assembly.

7-4

Optical System

Figure 7-3 Front light assembly


1Laser assembly

3Cylindrical mirror assembly

2Front guide assembly


5. According to the malfunction of the front light assembly, replace the whole laser assembly
or the whole cylindrical mirror assembly, install the new one on the front light assembly and
secure the assembly to the optical support.
6. Reconnect the laser power connector, heater, temperature sensor and the connector of
the over temperature protection switch.

7.2.3 Flow cell assembly


The flow cell assembly is used to create a stable sheath fluid flow, which enables the particle
tested to pass through the flow cell in a certain speed and to interact with the incident laser to
create scattered light. Remove and install the flow cell assembly strictly as instructed below.
1. Power on the analyzer to empty the fluidic pipes, then power off the analyzer and
disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the sheath charging tube, sample charging tube and waste outlet tube (at the
outlet of the flow cell). Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws and take
out the flow cell assembly carefully, as Figure 7-4 shows.

7-5

Optical System

Figure 7-4 Flow cell fluidic connecting tube


1Sample charging tube

2Sheath charing tube

3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two connecting screws and divide the flow cell
assembly into two parts: rectifier assembly and detecting assembly, as Figure 7-5 shows.
4. Clean or replace the detecting assembly and liquid transporting assembly as needed.

Figure 7-5 Flow cell structure


1Rectifier assembly

3Detecting assembly

2O ring

4Hexagon screw

5. Install the flow cell assembly as stated above in the reverse order.

7-6

Optical System

7.2.4 Rear light collimator assembly


The rear light collimator assembly collects the scattered light created by the particle tested and
allows the light to be tested by the rear light detector assembly. Remove the rear light
collimator assembly strictly as instructed below. See Figure 7-6 for the assembly drawing of
the rear light collimator assembly.
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the rear light
assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm lens assembly to
remove the lens assembly.

Figure 7-6 Rear light collimator assembly


1Diaphragm lens assembly

2Rear light guide assembly

4. Install the new rear light diaphragm lens assembly on the rear light guide assembly to form
a new rear light collimator assembly. Ensure that the superface edge of the diaphragm
lens assembly parallels the end face edge of backward oriented assembly. Install and
secure the assembly to the optical support.

7.2.5 Beam splitter assembly


The beam splitter assembly splits the scattered light into two paths: one for the forward low
angle PD assembly and the other for the forward high angle PD assembly. See Figure 7-7 for
the assembly drawing of the beam splitter assembly.
1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.
2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the fixing screws at two sides of the beam splitter
assembly and remove the assembly.
3. Use the flat-headed screwdriver to remove the two clamping rings. Use the cross-headed
7-7

Optical System
screwdriver to remove the screws at the top board and the side boards to remove the
boards.
4. Remove the two protective washers to remove the beam-splitting prism.
5. When replacing or installing a new beam-splitting prism, pay attention to the direction of
the prism (see Figure 7-7 ). Install the prism following steps above in the reverse order.

Figure 7-7 Beam splitter assembly


1Base of spectroscope

4Clamping ring

2Side board

5Washer

3Top board

6Beam-splitting prism

7.2.6 Rear light collector assembly


The rear light collector assembly enhances the collection efficiency by focusing the scattered
light, which has passed the beam splitter assembly, on the PD detecting target. It consists of a
LAS assembly and a MAS assembly.

LAS assembly

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two fixing screws on the LAS assembly and
remove the LAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the low angle
diaphragm and remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the
two screws fixing the rear light focus lens assembly and remove the assembly.

7-8

Optical System

Figure 7-8 LAS assembly


1Low angle diaphragm

2Rear light focus lens assembly

4. Install and secure the low angle diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as
needed.
5. Install the LAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

MAS assembly

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the two screws fixing the MAS assembly and then
remove the MAS assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the diaphragm and
then remove the diaphragm. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws
on the rear light focus lens assembly and then remove the assembly.

Figure 7-9 MAS assembly


1High angle diaphragm

2Rear light focus lens assembly

7-9

Optical System
4. Install and secure the diaphragm and the rear light focus lens assembly as needed.
5. Install the MAS assembly to the optical support and screw it with the hexagon wrench.
During securing, ensure that the diaphragm assembly is close to the M4 hexagon screws.

7.2.7 Rear light detector assembly


The rear light detector assembly detects the scattered light signal and converts it into electrical
signals for further processing. It consists of two parts: a forward low angle PD assembly and a
forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Forward low angle PD assembly

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward low angle PD assembly
and then remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and
remove the shielding box from the forward low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-10 Forward low angle PD assembly


1Shielding box

3PD

2Low angle pre-amplification board

4PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and reinstall them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward low angle PD assembly and then install the
forward low angle PD assembly to the optical support.

Forward middle low angle PD assembly

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the hexagon wrench to remove the screws fixing the forward middle low angle PD
7-10

Optical System
assembly and remove the assembly from the optical support.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the two screws fixing the PD board and then
remove the shielding box from the forward middle low angle PD assembly.

Figure 7-11 Forward middle low angle PD assembly


1Shielding box

3PD

2High angle pre-amplification board

4PD cover

4. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the low angle pre-amplification board, remove
the PD cover and the PD board, replace the corresponding parts and install them orderly.
5. Assemble the shielding box to the forward middle low angle PD assembly and then install
the forward middle low angle PD assembly to the optical support.

Pre-amplification board

1. Power off the analyzer and disconnect its power cord.


2. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the PD board, and
remove the shielding box from the PD assembly.
3. Use the cross-headed screwdriver to remove the pre-amplification board from the PD
assembly and replace it with a new pre-amplification board, then reinstall it orderly.
Note: The rear light PD assembly needs not to be removed from the optical system during the
replacement of the pre-amplification board assembly.

7-11

Optical System

7.3 Adjustment
Any assembly in the optical system should be adjusted after the installation once it has been
disassembled. The adjustment procedure can be simplified according to how the assembly
has been disassembled.
The adjustment to the optical system consists of coarse adjustment and fine tuning. Coarse
adjustment roughly aligns every optical assembly and makes them approximately on the same
optical axis, so that the signal can be created rapidly when standard particles are run. Fine
tuning ensures the best position of the optical system. An oscilloscope is used to observe the
signal waveform and the corresponding optical assembly position is finely tuned so that the
signal generated meets the adjustment standard.

7.3.1 Coarse adjustment


According to each optical assembly, the coarse adjustment can be divided into: front light
assembly adjustment, flow cell adjustment, rear light collimator assembly adjustment, rear light
collector assembly diaphragm adjustment and backward detecting PD assembly adjustment.

Front light assembly adjustment

Purpose:

Horizontally, the beam is upright to the rear light collimator lens. The collimator emergent far
field spot is in the vertical direction.

Principle:

The laser beam distributes symmetrically along the optical axis; the reflex fully covers the
incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:

Install the rear light assembly first, and cling the rear light assembly closely to the pin stop at
the rear light position, as Figure 7-12 shows. Aim the pin stop of the front light assembly at the
optical support, secure the fixing screw (make sure the forward optical system attaches the
optical support and is still movable). Turn on the power of the laser, and turn the laser
assembly to make the far field spot of the emitting laser vertical. Attach the rear light collimator
assembly to the pin stop, use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the
surface of the rear light collimator lens is on the same axis with the incident light and slowly
turn the front light assembly to make them on the same axis, and then secure the assembly, as
Figure 7-13 shows.

7-12

Optical System

Figure 7-12 Rear light assembly installation

Figure 7-13 Front light assembly adjustment

7-13

Optical System

Flow cell adjustment

Purpose:

Adjusting the flow cell to irradiate the incident light to the surface of the flow cell vertically.

Principle:

That the flow cell is vertical to the incident laser uses the principle of that the reflex fully covers
the incident light when the light enters vertically.

Procedure:

Turn the flow cell into the optical path (do not position the square aperture detection area in the
optical path). Use a hexagon wrench to check whether the light reflected from the flow cell
surface is on the same axis with that of the incident light and adjust the flow cell slowly to
harmonize them and then secure the flow cell.

Figure 7-14 Flow cell coarse adjustment

Rear light collimator assembly adjustment


Rear light horizontal position adjustment

Purpose:

To make sure the front and the rear light is on the same axis approximately.

Principle:

The beam that goes through the main point of the lens will not change the transmitting
direction.

Procedure:

1. Remove the rear light collimator assembly; check whether the beam spot that passes
through the beam-splitting prism and the diaphragm on the MAS assembly is symmetrical.
Adjust the MAS assembly to make the beam spot symmetrical, as shown in Figure 7-15.

7-14

Optical System

Figure 7-15 Adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly
2. Move horizontally the rear light collimator assembly along the pin stop and observe the
beam spot position on the diaphragm of the MAS assembly. When the spot is in the center
of the diaphragm (as shown in Figure 7-16), secure the fixing screw of the rear light
collimator assembly.

Figure 7-16 The adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator
assembly is finished

The rear light assembly must cling to the pin stop when it is moved.

Rear light collection assembly adjustment


LAS assembly diaphragm adjustment
7-15

Optical System

Purpose:

To obtain the effect of selecting low angle scattered light by positioning the LAS assembly
diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.

Procedure:

1. Place a piece of white paper with rough surface at the back of the LAS assembly
diaphragm, and adjust the horizontal adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical
horizontally (as shown in Figure 7-17).
2. Adjust the vertical adjusting screw cap until the spot is symmetrical vertically (as shown in
Figure 7-17).

Figure 7-17 Adjustment of the LAS assembly diaphragm


MAS assembly diaphragm adjustment

Purpose:

To obtain the effect of selecting middle low angle scattered light by positioning the MAS
assembly diaphragm symmetrically along the light axis.
Note: After the adjustment of the horizontal position of the rear light collimator assembly is
finished, the position adjustment of the MAS assembly diaphragm is finished. You can secure
the fixing screw.

Rear light detector assembly adjustment


Forward low angle PD assembly adjustment

Purpose:

To ensure the scattered light from the forward low angle is completely collected by the PD.

Procedure:
7-16

Optical System
Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the forward low angle PD assembly until the
center of the spot emitted from the LAS assembly diaphragm is completely received by the
aperture (as shown in Figure 7-18).

Figure 7-18 Adjustment of the forward low angle PD assembly


1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating

2Low angle beam spot

veiling glare
Forward middle low angle PD assembly adjustment
Adjust the forward middle low angle PD assembly in the same way as adjusting the forward
low angle PD assembly. Ensure that the center of the emitted spot is completely received by
the aperture (as shown in Figure 7-19).

Figure 7-19 Spot from the forward middle low angle PD assembly
1Aperture diaphragm of eliminating
veiling glare
The above description is a complete procedure of coarse adjustment. By the adjustment above,
each assembly is roughly positioned symmetrically along the light axis. The following
describes the fine tuning of the optical system.
7-17

Optical System

7.3.2 Preparation before fine tuning

Adjustment of the horizontal position of the flow cell


Before fine tuning, the detecting square aperture of the flow cell should be turned into the
optical path. Check the MAS assembly diaphragm. When the sideline shades of the square
aperture distribute symmetrically on the diaphragm, the flow cell is turned into the optical path,
as shown in Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Flow cell position adjustment


1Flow cell horizontal adjusting knob

Adjustment of diaphragm against direct light


After the flow cell horizontal position adjustment is finished, turn the diaphragm against direct
light into the center of the optical path, so that the light intensity shielded by the diaphragm is
the largest and brightest. The following two methods show how to judge whether the
diaphragm is right in this position.

Visual check method:

Place a card (with a drawing line on it) on the MAS assembly diaphragm so that the two
sideline shades of the flow cell distribute symmetrically along the drawing line, as shown in
Figure 7-21. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light. When the shielded spot
distributes symmetrically along the drawing line, the adjustment is finished.

7-18

Optical System

Figure 7-21 Visual check method

1Beam spot

3Drawing line

2Inner aperture of the flow cell

4High angle diaphragm

DC background method:

Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD assembly (or
the TP43 LASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the oscilloscope and
select DC gear. Adjust the position of the diaphragm against direct light until minimum LAS DC
background is obtained, and then the adjustment is finished.
After the adjustment, secure the two screws of the diaphragm against direct light (as shown in
Figure 7-22).

Figure 7-22 Diaphragm against direct light


1Lock screw of the diaphragm
against direct light

7.3.3 Fine tuning


The purpose of fine tuning is to ensure the optical system is in the optimal position when it
detects the scattered light signal from the designed angle. The fine tuning purpose mainly
consists of the following three parts: (1) to focus the laser on the cell flow; (2) To ensure that
the center of the sample flow basically covers the spot center; and (3) To adjust the scattered
7-19

Optical System
light of the rear light assembly from the designed angle. Therefore, the tuning is mainly on the
forward optical system axial position, the flow cell horizontal position and the position of the
rear light collimator assembly.
Before the particle adjustment, at the Main Menu Setup Gain screen, set the
values of SS and FS to be 100.

Adjustment of front light assembly axial position

Purpose:

Ensure that the laser beam focus is on the cell flow.

Procedure:

1. Test the voltage of the tp2vref test point of the laser control board to see whether the
voltage reaches 4V. If not, adjust the variable resistance of the laser control board until the
voltage is 4V.
2. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward low angle PD
assembly to the oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1), set the oscilloscope to be: voltage 50mv/div,
time 500ns/div and AC coupling.
3. Adopt standard particles as sample for test. Add 3 drops of Duke (4K-07) 7m standard
particles into a 1.5mL centrifugal tube, and then add diluent or deionized water into the
centrifugal tube to 1mL. Use the diluted standard particle solution within 3 hours.
4. Run the standard particles in the open-vial mode normally, check the signal in the
oscilloscope channel 1 and adjust the adjusting knob of the front light assembly (as shown
in Figure 7-23) in the axial position. When the maximum signal amplitude and stability is
obtained and distributes normally, the pulse width is the narrowest and about 1.3us, as
shown in Figure 7-24, secure the fixing screws of the front light guide assembly.

7-20

Optical System

Figure 7-23 Fine tuning of the front light axial position


1Front light axial adjustment knob

2laser axial adjustment lock screws

Figure 7-24 Standard particle signal graph output by forward optical system
Note: The sampling time of the DIFF channel is about 20s. To simplify the adjustment and
generate signals quickly, you can adjust the forward optical axis adjusting knob in advance
until the distance between the front end surface of the front light guide assembly and that of
the guide assembly support is about 4mm.

Fine tuning of the rear light collimator assembly

Purpose:

To ensure that what the PD assembly detects is the scattered light signals of the designed
collection angles.

7-21

Optical System

Procedure:

1. Output the pre-amplification board TPOUT test point of the forward middle low angle PD
assembly (or the TP44 MASIN test point connected to the signal processing board) to the
oscilloscope channel 2 (CH2), set the oscilloscope to: voltage 100mv/div, time 500ns/div
and AC coupling.
2. Run standard particles in the open vial mode normally, adjust the adjusting knob of the
rear light collimator assembly and check the signal pulses of the oscilloscope channel 2.
Secure the set screws of the rear light collimator assembly when the pulse peaks reach
the maximum value, the signal are stable and the shake is little.
3. Switch to the channel 1 (CH1) and check whether the signal peaks are 190mv10mv. If not,
adjust the adjustable resistance on the laser control board until the signal peaks of the
CH1 are 190mv10mv.
4. Check whether the signal peaks of the channel 2 (CH2) are about 800mv. If not, adjust the
adjusting knob of the rear light collimator assembly and confirm whether the pulse signal
peaks of the CH2 are at the maximum.

Fine tuning of the flow cell horizontal position

Purpose:

To ensure that the center of the sample flow is positioned in the center of the beam spot.

Procedure:

1. Run standard particles in the open vial mode, and check whether the signal peaks of the
oscilloscope channel 1 (CH1) are stable and shake little.
2. Adjust the flow cell horizontal position until the particle signal peaks displayed on the
oscilloscope are at the maximum and uniform.

7-22

Optical System

Figure 7-25 Adjustment of the flow cell horizontal position


1Horizontal adjusting knob of the
flow cell
3. Step 3: After the test, standard particles scattergrams will be obtained, as shown in Figure
7-26:

Figure 7-26 Standard particles scattergrams


Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the default screen is
the DIFF channel calculation screen), then click Calculate to obtain the particle scattergram
parameters of the DIFF channel and then check whether the parameters meet the following
standards:
MAS 0.1max width < 15.21
LAS 0.1max width < 6.5
4. Step 4: When all the standard particle parameters meet the standards above, secure the
flow cell lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-27) and secure the protective cover of the
optical system.
7-23

Optical System

Figure 7-27 the secured flow cell


1Lock screws of the flow cell
Now, the adjustment of the optical system is finished.

7.3.4 Gain setup


After the optical system adjustment, you need to reset the DIFF channel gains. The gain setup
consists of two steps:

Calibration using calibrators


At the count screen, ensure that the WBC background is under 0.1, and then run the calibrator
in the CT-WB-CBC+DIFF mode normally. (If the WBC background exceeds the limit, please
clean the flow cell or do a background check).
After the test, Click the Optical in the Review menu to enter the Optical screen (the
default screen is the DIFF channel calculation screen), and then click Calculate to obtain the
calibrator scattergram parameters of the DIFF channel.

7-24

Optical System

Figure 7-28 Optical system output calibrator signal


Enter into the Peak target boxes:
LAS low angle gravity center target
MAS high angle gravity center target
Calculate

the

gains,

enter

the

gains

into

the

corresponding

boxes

of

the

MainSetupGain screen and save the results according to the prompt on the screen.
After the gain setup, retest the calibrator and 7m standard particles to verify the gain and
check if the following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of
the calibrator should be within 0.57 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 0.63
from the target. For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be 18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92);
low angel width 6.50; high angel width 15.21. Otherwise, continue calibrating until the
following requirements are met. For the calibrator: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator
should be within 1.51 from the target; the high angel gravity center within 2.4 from the target.
For the 7um standard particles: the low angel gravity center of the calibrator should be
18.051.37 (16.68, 19.42); high angel gravity center 104.243.68 (100.56, 107.92); low angel
width 6.50; high angel width 15.21.

Sample verification
After the above standard particle gain setup is finished, get several normal fresh blood
samples for test. The scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample should be like the images
shown in Figure 7-29:
7-25

Optical System

Figure 7-29 Scattergram of a normal fresh blood sample


If the WBC scattergram results of the normal fresh blood samples are significantly different
from the figure above, please check whether the reagents, reaction system and the fluidic
system work normally.

7-26

Optical System

7.4 Troubleshooting
7.4.1 Laser spot-deviation
The SS and FS gain setup is not changed during the use of the analyzer. Yet the scattergram
is compressed to the left down side, namely, the two signals collecting angle direction turn
smaller, as shown in Figure 7-30. This is mainly because the focusing spot at the flow cell
position move forward or backward, causing the diminishment of laser intensity.

Figure 7-30 Compressed scattergram

Settlement:
Make standard particle fist, and record the peak value position of standard particle. Loose the
laser axial adjustment lock screws (as shown in Figure 7-20). Turn the adjustment screw of
front light assembly counterclockwise for a quarter turn. Make standard particle and see the
peak value position. If the peak value position becomes greater, keep turning the adjustment
screw counterclockwise with 1/8 circle each time till the peak value position becomes smaller,
then turn back with 1/8 circle. If the peak value position becomes smaller, turn the adjustment
screw in the reverse order with the same method. After finding the maximum position of
standard particle, lock the laser axial adjustment fixing screws.

7.4.2 Flow cell clog


This is because a big blood clot or impurity blocks the flow cell or sampler inlet, which makes
the sheath flow unable to form. The scattergram is accordingly abnormal and scattered, as
Figure 7-31 shows.

7-27

Optical System

Figure 7-31 Scattered scattergram


Settlement:
Soak with dilute probe cleanser. If it does not work, replace the flow cell assembly.

7.4.3 Dirty flow cell


It can be classified into: dirty inner wall and dirty outer surface. Dirty outer surface might due to
the pollution from waste, and dirty inner wall is caused by the pollution of blood clot on the
inner wall of flow cell.
Settlement:
Dirty outer surface: wipe the outer surface gently with dustless cloth soaked in alcohol, and in
the same direction
Dirty inner wall: refer to the cleaning method for the inner wall of liquid flow cell.

7-28

Troubleshooting

8.1 Error code and information


Table 8-1 Error code and information
Error Code

Error Name

Error Code

Error Name

0x01000100

Valve output failed

0x01003011

High pressure

0x01000101

Valve No. out of range

0x01003020

WBC volumetric tube filter


clog

0x01000201

Sampling assembly horizontal

0x01003021

motor failed to move to target

RBC volumetric tube filter


clog

position
0x01000202

Sampling assembly horizontal

0x01003030

motor failed to return to home

DIFF reaction bath temp.


error

position after initialization


0x01000203

Sampling assembly horizontal

0x01003031

motor failed to leave home

Temperature out of working


range

position after initialization


0x01000204

Adjusting sampling assembly


horizontal

motor

to

0x01003032

target

Temperature out of operating


range

position failed
0x01000205

Adjusting sampling assembly


horizontal

motor

to

0x01003033

Optical system temp. error

0x01003050

FS blank voltage abnormal

0x01003060

HGB blank voltage abnormal

0x01003061

Laser diode current abnormal

0x01003062

HGB channel error

0x01003070

Diluent expired

home

position failed
0x01000206

Adjusting sampling assembly


horizontal

motor

to

leave

home position failed


0x01000207

Sampling assembly horizontal


motor adjustment error

0x01000208

Sampling assembly horizontal


motor adjusting steps out of
limit

0x01000209

Sampling assembly horizontal


motor adjusting end position
error

0x01000211

Sampling assembly vertical

8-1

Troubleshooting
motor failed to move to target
position
0x01000212

Sampling assembly vertical

0x01003071

HGB Lyse expired

0x01003072

LEO(I) Lyse expired

0x01003073

LEO(II) Lyse expired

0x01003074

Cleanser expired

0x01003080

No Diluent

0x01003081

No LH lyse

0x01003082

No LEO(I) lyse

0x01003083

No LEO(II) lyse

motor failed to initialize to


upper position
0x01000213

Sampling assembly vertical


motor failed to initialize to
lower position

0x01000214

Adjusting sampling assembly


vertical

motor

to

target

position failed
0x01000215

Adjusting sampling assembly


vertical

motor

to

upper

position failed
0x01000216

Adjusting sampling assembly


vertical motor to leave upper
position failed

0x01000217

Sampling assembly vertical


motor adjustment error

0x01000218

Sampling assembly vertical


motor adjusting steps out of
limit

0x01000219

Sampling assembly vertical


motor adjusting end position
error

0x01000220

Sampling assembly is working

0x01003084

No Cleanser

0x01000221

Cannot

sampling

0x01003085

Waste is full

Sampling assembly horizontal

0x01003090

Emptying WBC bath failed

0x01003091

Emptying RBC bath failed

0x010030A0

Constant current source 55V

adjust

assembly
0x01000222

motor action overtime


0x01000223

Sampling assembly horizontal


motor action forbidden

0x01000224

Sampling assembly horizontal


motor does not match current

voltage abnormal

position
0x01000225

Sampling assembly vertical

0x010030A1

motor action overtime


0x01000226

+12V

analogue

voltage

abnormal

Sampling assembly vertical

0x010030A2

motor action forbidden

-12V

analogue

abnormal

8-2

voltage

Troubleshooting
0x01000227

Sampling assembly vertical


motor

mismatch

0x010030A3

current

Drive

board

24V

voltage

12V

voltage

5V

voltage

abnormal

position
0x01000228

Sampling assembly vertical

0x010030A4

motor failed to pierce to lower

Drive

board

abnormal

position
0x01000229

Sampling assembly vertical

0x010030A5

motor failed to pierce to upper

Drive

board

abnormal

position
0x01000230

Sampling assembly horizontal

0x010030B0

Data board DDR abnormal

0x010030B1

Data

motor photocoupler error


0x01000231

Sampling assembly RBC bath


photocoupler error

0x01000232

Sampling

board

FLEXBUS

abnormal

assembly

WBC

0x010030B2

Data board FLASH abnormal

Sampling assembly DIFF bath

0x010030B3

Data

bath photocoupler error


0x01000233

photocoupler error.
0x01000234

Sample

assembly

Sampling

vertical

0x010030B4

assembly

Sampling

Data

board

AD7928

abnormal

upper

0x010030C0

photocoupler error
0x01000236

AD7908

abnormal

motor photocoupler error


0x01000235

board

Drive board communication


error

assembly

lower

0x010030D0

Side door open

0x010030D1

Optical assembly cover open

0x010030D2

Sample compartment door

photocoupler error
0x01000300

Sampling syringe busy

0x01000301

Sampling

syringe

photocoupler abnormal
0x01000302

open

Sampling syringe failed to

0x01004200

Software protocol resolution

0x01004201

Response overtime

0x01004202

Heartbeat disconnected

0x01004401

DIFF data FIFO overflow

0x01004402

DIFF data RAM overflow

return to home position after


action
0x01000303

Sampling syringe failed to


leave

home

position

after

action
0x01000304

Sampling syringe failed to


return to home position before
action

0x01000305

Sampling syringe failed to


leave home position before
action

0x01000306

Sample

syringe

aspirate

8-3

Troubleshooting
volume over range
0x01000307

Sample

syringe

dispense

0x01004403

WBC data FIFO overflow

action

0x01004404

WBC data RAM overflow

0x01000310

Sample injection syringe busy

0x01004405

RBC data FIFO overflow

0x01000311

Sample

0x01004406

RBC data RAM overflow

0x01004407

PLT data FIFO overflow

0x01004408

PLT data RAM overflow

0x01004409

HGB data FIFO overflow

0x0100440a

HGB data RAM overflow

0x01004600

Analyzer

volume over range


0x01000308

Sample

syringe

overtime
injection

syringe

photocoupler abnormal
0x01000312

Sample
failed

injection
to

return

syringe
to

home

position after action


0x01000313

Sample

injection

syringe

failed to leave home position


after action
0x01000314

Sample
failed

injection
to

return

syringe
to

home

position before action


0x01000315

Sample

injection

syringe

failed to leave home position


before action
0x01000316

Sample

injection

syringe

aspirate volume over range


0x01000317

Sample

injection

disconnected

syringe

0x01004601

dispense volume over range


0x01000318

Sample

injection

communication

Analyzer

network

configuration fail

syringe

0x01005200

Loading motor busy

action overtime
0x01000320

Sheath fluid syringe busy

0x01005201

Manipulator pinch motor busy

0x01000321

Sheath

0x01005202

Manipulator

fluid

syringe

photocoupler abnormal
0x01000322

0x01000323

pinch

motor

failed to leave home position

Sheath fluid syringe failed to

0x01005203

Manipulator

pinch

motor

return to home position after

failed to return to home

action

position

Sheath fluid syringe failed to


leave

home

position

0x01005204

after

Manipulator

pinch

motor

action forbidden

action
0x01000324

Sheath fluid syringe failed to

0x01005205

return to home position before

Manipulator

pinch

motor

initialization failed

action
0x01000325

Sheath fluid syringe failed to

0x01005206

8-4

Manipulator

pinch

motor

Troubleshooting
leave home position before

action overtime

action
0x01000326

Sheath fluid syringe aspirate

0x01005207

volume out of range


0x01000327

Sheath fluid syringe dispense

0x01005208

motor

Manipulator

pinch

motor

failed to return to end position

Sheath fluid syringe action

0x01005400

overtime
0x01000330

pinch

failed to leave end position

volume out of range


0x01000328

Manipulator

Manipulator

pinch

motor

initialization forbidden

Lyse syringe busy

0x01005401

Manipulator elevation motor


busy

0x01000331

Lyse

syringe

photocoupler

0x01005402

abnormal
0x01000332

Manipulator elevation motor


failed to leave home position

Lyse syringe failed to return to

0x01005403

home position after action

Manipulator elevation motor


failed to return to home
position

0x01000333

Lyse syringe failed to leave

0x01005404

home position after action


0x01000334

action forbidden

Lyse syringe failed to return to

0x01005405

home position before action


0x01000335

Lyse syringe failed to leave

0x01005406

Lyse syringe aspirate volume

0x01005407

Manipulator elevation motor


failed to leave end position

Lyse syringe dispense volume

0x01005408

out of range
0x01000338

Manipulator elevation motor


action overtime

out of range
0x01000337

Manipulator elevation motor


initialization failed

home position before action


0x01000336

Manipulator elevation motor

Manipulator elevation motor


failed to return to end position

Lyse syringe action overtime

0x01005500

Manipulator elevation motor


forbid mix motor action

0x01000340

Diluent syringe busy

0x01005501

Mix motor busy

0x01000341

Diluent syringe photocoupler

0x01005502

Mix motor failed to leave

abnormal
0x01000342

home position

Diluent syringe failed to return

0x01005503

to home position after action


0x01000343

Mix motor failed to return to


home position

Diluent syringe failed to leave

0x01005504

Mix motor action forbidden

0x01005505

Mix motor initialization failed

0x01005506

Mix motor action overtime

0x01005507

Mix motor failed to leave end

home position after action


0x01000344

Diluent syringe failed to return


to home position before action

0x01000345

Diluent syringe failed to leave


home position before action

0x01000346

Diluent

syringe

aspirate

8-5

Troubleshooting
volume out of range
0x01000347

Diluent

syringe

position
dispense

0x01005508

volume out of range


0x01000348

Diluent

syringe

Mix motor failed to return to


home position

action

0x01005600

overtime

Action forbidden when the


mix motor is not at home
position

0x01000401

Optical system setting out of

0x01005601

Mix mechanism busy

0x01005602

Mix mechanism initialization

limit
0x01000402

DIFF bath temperature setting


out of limit

0x01000601

failed

Setting pressure failed

0x01005603

Mix

mechanism

action

overtime
0x01000602

Setting vacuum setting failed

0x01005604

Mix time setting out of limit

0x01000603

Adjusting pressure chamber

0x01005605

Mix mechanism initialization

pressure failed
0x01000604

failed

Adjusting vacuum chamber

0x01005606

vacuum failed

Mix

mechanism

current

action forbidden

0x01000605

Pressure test failed

0x01005700

Feeding motor busy

0x01000606

Vacuum test failed

0x01005701

Feeding motor initial position


photocoupler error

0x01000607

Pressure chamber pressure

0x01005702

out of control limit


0x01000608

error

Vacuum chamber vacuum out

0x01005703

of control limit
0x01000611

Feeding position tube rack


Feeding motor end position
photocoupler error

Flow cell clog

0x01005704

Feeding motor photocoupler


error

0x01000701

Driver board FPGA download

0x01005705

Feeding motor loading error

0x01005706

Feeding

symbol error
0x01000702

Driver board FPGA download


command error

0x01000703

Driver

board

motor

action

overtime
FPGA

load

0x01005708

Feeding position switch error

Drive board single data written

0x01005801

Autoloader board functional

address out of range


0x01000704

out of limit
0x01000705

code error

Drive board data write out of

0x01005802

limit
0x01000706

Autoloader board data length


error

Drive board write forbidden

0x01005803

Autoloader board command


label error

0x01000707

Drive

board

FPGA

write

0x01005804

8-6

Autoloader board check code

Troubleshooting
overtime
0x01000731

error

Drive board EEPROM write

0x01005805

error
0x01000801

error

Drive board functional code

0x01005806

error
0x01000802

Autoloader board end code


Autoloader

board

identity

board

FPGA

code error

Drive board data length error

0x01005820

Autoloader

download symbol error


0x01000803

Drive board command label

0x01005821

error
0x01000804

Autoloader

board

FPGA

download command error

Drive board check code error

0x01005822

Autoloader board FPGA load


address out of range

0x01000805

Drive board end code error

0x01005823

Autoloader board single data


write out of limit

0x01000806

Drive board identity code error

0x01005824

Autoloader board data write


out of limit

0x01000807

Sequence pack analysis busy

0x01005825

Autoloader

board

write

board

write

forbidden
0x01000808

No complete sequence pack

0x01005826

Autoloader
overtime

0x01000809

Sequence pack head frame

0x01005900

error
0x01000810

Sequence pack start analysis

0x01005901

receive

Loading motor initialization


forbidden

Sequence pack total frames

0x01005902

error
0x01000812

motor

command error

number error
0x01000811

Loading

Unloading tray full, unloading


forbidden

Sequence pack save error

0x01005903

Loading motor initial position


photocoupler error

0x01000813

Sequence pack end frame

0x01005904

error
0x01000814

Sequence pack body frame

0x01005905

Sequence pack frame order


Sequence

unloading

Unloading

position

right

photocoupler error
0x01005906

error
0x01000816

motor

position photocoupler error

error
0x01000815

Loading

Unloading

position

left

photocoupler error
pack

execution

0x01005907

Loading motor not initialized

None-sequence pack analysis

0x01005908

Loading motor feeding not at

overtime
0x01000817

error
0x01002000

Background abnormal

initial position
0x01005909

Loading motor unloading not


at initial position

8-7

Troubleshooting
0x01002010

WBC count starts too slow

0x0100590A

Loading

motor

action

overtime
0x01002011

WBC count time too long

0x0100590B

Autoloader receive command


error(not in sampling mode)

0x01002020

WBC count starts too fast

0x0100590C

Autoloader receive command


error(not in stop status)

0x01002021

WBC count time too short

0x0100590D

Autoloader horizontal loading


photocoupler match error

0x01002022

WBC bubbles

0x0100590E

Autoloader unloading tubes


out of limit when initialization

0x01002030

RBC count starts slow

0x0100590F

Photocoupler blocked after


autoloader initialization

0x01002031

RBC count time too long

0x01005a00

Autoloader board EEPROM


chip error

0x01002040

RBC count starts too fast

0x01005a01

Opening

sample

compartment door failed


0x01002041

RBC count time too short

0x01005a02

Autoloader action forbidden


when autoloader is paused

0x01002042

RBC bubbles

0x01005a03

Autoloader adjust forbidden


when autoloader is not at
adjusting status

0x01003000

Low vacuum

0x01005a04

Autoloader
parameter

adjustment
setting

range
0x01003001

High vacuum

0x01003010

Low pressure

0x01005a05

8-8

Scanner read error

out

of

Troubleshooting

8.2 Errors indicated by error messages


When operating the analyzer, if error(s) is detected, the corresponding error message will be
displayed on the bottom of the screen. In the error message area, the severity levels are
discriminated from high to low by background colors, with red for the highest and green for the
lowest.
Click the error message on the screen and the corresponding help information will pop up. You
can click the "Remove error" button as instructed by the help information to remove the error,
or, remove some errors as instructed by the troubleshooting procedures of this manual.

8.2.1 Pressure errors


Table 8-2 Pressure errors
Error Message

Description

Setting pressure failed

The pressure created in

Pressure pump abnormal

the specified time can

Tubing connects the pressure chamber

not

or pressure pump leaks

meet

Possible causes

the

requirement.

Pressure filter leaks


Pressure sensor abnormal, immoderate
error
Related detecting circuit abnormal

Setting vacuum setting

The vacuum created in

Vacuum pump abnormal

failed

the specified time can

Tubing connects the vacuum chamber or

not

vacuum pump leaks

meet

the

requirement.

Vacuum sensor abnormal, immoderate


error
Related detecting circuit abnormal

8.2.2 Reagent errors


Table 8-3 Reagent errors
Error Message
No Diluent

No LH lyse

Description

Possible causes

Diluent is used up or the

The Diluent is used up.

sensor of the diluent

The sensor of the diluent pick up tube is

pick

connected improperly or damaged and

up

tube

is

connected improperly.

needs to be replaced.

LH lyse is used up or

The LH lyse is used up.

excessive bubbles exist

LH

in the LH lyse channel

excessive bubbles.

8-9

lyse

channel

leaks,

leading

to

Troubleshooting
No LEO(I) lyse

LEO(I) lyse is used up or

The LEO(I) lyse is used up.

excessive bubbles exist

LEO(I) lyse channel leaks, leading to

in

excessive bubbles.

the

LEO(I)

lyse

channel
No LEO(II) lyse

LEO(II) lyse is used up

The LEO(II) lyse is used up.

or

LEO(II) lyse channel leaks, leading to

excessive

bubbles

exist in the LEO(II) lyse

excessive bubbles.

channel
No Cleanser

Waste is full

Cleanser is used up or

The cleanser is used up.

excessive bubbles exist

Cleanser

in the Cleanser channel

excessive bubbles.

The waste container is

Waste container is full.

full

sensor

The sensor of the waste pick up tube is

waste

connected improperly or damaged and

or

connecting

the
the

container is connected

channel

leaks,

leading

to

needs to be replaced.

improperly
Diluent expired
LEO(I) Lyse Expired
LEO(II) Lyse expired
LH Lyse expired
Cleanser expired

Diluent expired

Diluent expired
Exp. date setting is wrong

LEO(I) lyse expired

LEO(I) Lyse expired


Exp. date setting is wrong

LEO(II) lyse expired

LEO(II) Lyse expired


Exp. date setting is wrong

LH lyse expired

LH Lyse expired
Exp. date setting is wrong

Cleanser expired

Cleanser expired
Exp. date setting is wrong

8.2.3 Hardware errors


Refer to Chapter 5 Hardware System for how to troubleshoot each board.

8.2.4 Measurement errors


Table 8-4 Measurement errors
Error Message

Description

Possible causes

Background

One or more background

1. Bath, sample probe, probe wipe or

abnormal

results are out of the


specified range

aperture are contaminated.


2. Diluent is expired or contaminated
3. Diluent tubing and back bath tubing
leak, leading to excessive bubbles

8-10

Troubleshooting
4. Bubbles or clog is alarmed during the
background count.
5. Outside interference caused by poor
shielding
LAS

background

voltage abnormal

Value is out of the range


of 0-400mv

1. LAS voltage signal is improperly


inducted.
2. Flow cell is contaminated.
3. Related detecting circuit abnormal

HGB

background

voltage abnormal

HGB background voltage


is

out

of

the

range

[3.2,4.9]V

1. No diluent in the WBC/HGB bath;


HGB light is not turned on.
2. WBC/HGB bath is contaminated.
3. Reagent is expired or contaminated.
4. Improper HGB gain settings
5. HGB light assembly abnormal
6. Related detecting circuit abnormal

RBC clog

RBC count time too long


RBC starts too slow

1. Improper settings for reference count


time and start time.
2. The bath is contaminated or the
aperture is clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
6. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.

RBC bubbles

RBC count time too short


RBC starts too fast

1. Improper settings for reference count


time and start time.
2. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
7. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.

WBC clog

WBC count time too long


WBC starts too slow

1. Improper settings for reference count


time and start time.
2. The bath is contaminated or the

8-11

Troubleshooting
aperture is clogged by impurity.
3. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
4. Vacuum abnormal
5. Volumetric-tube-related tubing clogs.
6. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.
WBC bubbles

WBC count time too short


WBC starts too fast

1. Improper settings for reference count


time and start time.
2. The photocoupler of the volumetric
tube is damaged.
3. Volumetric tube is dirty.
4. Bubbles exist at the tee connector of
the volumetric tube.
5. Fluidic error that leads to the failed
emptying of the volumetric tube.
6. Vacuum abnormal
7. Poor connections between the valves
and the driver board.

8.2.5 Temperature errors


Table 8-5 Temperature errors
Error Message

Description

Possible causes

Optical system temp.

Temperature value read

The temperature transducer inner the

error

is out of the range of [30,

optical system error

40] .

The heater inner the optical system error

Reaction bath abnormal

The bath temperature is out of the

or

bath

reference range of 35-37. Please

transducer

adjust the temperature to meet the

DIFF

reaction

bath

temp. error

reaction

temperature
error

requirement.
The temperature transducer of reaction
bath is damaged and needs to be
replaced.

Ambient

temperature

out of working range

Ambient
abnormal
temperature

temperature
or

The ambient temperature is out of the

ambient

working range of 15-30. Please

transducer

adjust the temperature to meet the

error

requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.
8-12

Troubleshooting
Ambient

temperature

out of operating range

Ambient

temperature

abnormal

or

temperature

The ambient temperature is out of the

ambient

operating range of 10-40. Please

transducer

adjust the temperature to meet the

error

requirement
The ambient temperature transducer is
damaged and needs to be replaced.

8.2.6 Scattergram errors


Table 8-6 Scattergram errors
Error Message

Description

Possible causes
Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential

Fuzzy division between


Fuzzy
between

division
MON

and

NEU

MON and NEU occur on


normal samples, which
leads to abnormal or no
MON differential result.

reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be


1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
Flow cell is dirty.
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
normal

range.

The

reaction

is

not

thoroughly processed.
For normal samples, the
DIFF

scattergram

differentiates but fuzzy


LYM too high

division occur between


LYM and Ghost, which
leads to abnormal or no
LYM differential result.
Spots

obtained

from

Spots scatter all over

normal patient samples

the scattergram

are randomly scattered


all over the scattergram.

RBCs are not thoroughly hemolyzed.


Inaccurate volume of DIFF differential
reagents is added in. LEO(I) should be
1.2ml and LEO(II) should be 0.15ml.
The DIFF bath is contaminated.
Reaction bath temperature is out of the
normal

range.

The

reaction

is

not

thoroughly processed.
Sheath flow is not formed. Excessive
bubbles enter the WBC channel. Check
whether the diluent container is empty to
make sure if something is wrong with the
diluent sensor.
Calculate the gain of the analyzer

For
Compressed
scattergram

normal

patient

according to the standard scattergram. If

the

the newly set gain is normal and the

samples,

scattergrams obtained is

scattergram

compressed

without the compressed problem, then no

either

evenly or to one side.

differentiates

properly

further adjustment is necessary.


If the gain setup cannot solve the

8-13

Troubleshooting
problem, refer to the optical system
section in the service manual to remove
the error.

8-14

Appendixes

A. Accessories
A.1
No.

Spare parts and assemblies


Code/Model

Name

3001-30-68501

Data Board

3101-30-68503

Drive Board

3101-30-68505

Mother Board

3101-30-68507

Liquid Detection Board

3101-30-68509

Power Supply Board

3101-30-68511

Volumetric Board

3101-30-68513

Laser Control Board

3101-30-68515

FS Pre-amplify Board

3101-30-68517

SS Pre-Amplify Board

10

3101-30-68519

Indicator Board

11

3102-30-69199

Autoloader board

12

0033-30-74615

10ml syringe

13

3100-10-49438

100ul syringe

14

3101-10-69301

250ul syringe

15

M90-100032---

2.5ml syringe

16

3003-20-34942

2-way valve(Asco)

17

3003-20-34941

3-way valve(Asco)

18

3101-30-68611

Release Valve Assembly

19

M07-00014S-00

Pinch Valve Assembly

20

3101-30-68351

Waste Pump Assembly

21

3001-10-07252

Waste Pump

22

530B-10-05275

Pressure Pump

23

3001-10-07057

Volumetric Tube

24

3100-30-40745

tube rack assembly

25

3101-30-68320

Diff Bath Assembly

26

3102-30-69230

HGB assembly

27

3102-30-69253

WBC bath assembly


A-1

Appendixes
28

3102-30-69223

RBC bath assembly

29

3003-20-53969

RBC Ruby (D70nm)

30

3003-20-53970

WBC Ruby (D100nm)

31

3102-20-69171

Sampling probe

32

3101-30-68756

Diluent Cap Assembly

33

3101-30-68765

LEO (I) Lyse Cap Assembly

34

3101-30-68766

LEO (II) Lyse Cap Assembly

35

3101-30-68767

LH Lyse Cap Assembly

36

3101-30-68768

Cleanser Cap Assembly

37

3101-30-68776

Waste Cap Assembly

38

3006-20-74804

Probe Wipe

39

3003-20-34949

Isolation Chamber

40

3102-20-69165

Pressure Chamber

41

3101-30-68547

Vacuum Chamber

42

3001-10-07054

Air filter

43

2800-21-28878

Syringe Motor Position Sensor Assembly

44

3003-21-34925

Sampling Motor Position Sensor Assembly

45

0030-10-13064

Syringe Motor (100ul 250ul 2.5ml 10ml)

46

BA30-10-15115

Sampling motor

47

0000-10-11272

motor 2.33V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly

48

0000-10-11271

motor 2.1V 1.8'for sample mixing assembly

49

3102-30-69231

autoloader assembly

50

3101-30-68651

Optical System Assembly

51

3100-30-49556

Front Laser Assembly

52

3100-30-49559

Back Laser Assembly

53

3100-30-49560

Splitter Assembly

54

3101-30-68662

Las Stop Assembly

55

3101-30-68663

Mas Stop Assembly

56

3101-30-68664

Las PD Assembly

57

3101-30-68665

Mas PD Assembly

58

3100-30-49568

Flow Cell Assembly

59

3100-10-49436

7um particle (15ml)

60

M90-100031---

Tubing, PTFE, 0.066"X0.098"

61

M90-000026---

Tubing, PTFE,1/32"X1/16", 3000074

62

M90-000025---

Tubing, 1/8"X1/4",R-3603AAC02007, Tygon


A-2

Appendixes
63

M6G-020011---

Tubing, PharMed, 1/16"ODX1/8"ID

64

M6G-020009---

Tubing, 0.031"ID0.156"OD

65

M6G-020007---

Tubing, OD3mm ID1mm EVA

66

M6G-020006---

Tubing, Silicone, 1/16"X3/16", TYGON 3350

67

A21-000007---

Tubing, Silicone,3/32"X7/32"2800392-100

68

3001-10-07069

Tubing,1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon

69

0040-10-32301

Tubing,PTFE,.040"ID+/-.002"X.066"OD+/-.002

70

3101-20-68590

Fan of Power Supply Assembly

71

3101-20-68572

Fan of Main Unit

72

M07-00097S---

Switch

73

3001-10-07060

Aspirate key

A.2
No.

Spare pipes
Code/Model

Name

0040-10-32301

Tubing.PTFE,.040""ID+/-.00

3001-10-07069

Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,Tygon

A21-000002---

Tubing.Silicone,1/8"X1/4" X100ft,2800546-100

M6G-020006---

Tubing.Silicone,1/16""X3/1

M6G-020007---

Tubing OD3mm ID1mm EVA

M6G-020009---

Tubing. Silicone 0.031""ID

M90-000025---

Tubing.1/8""X1/4"",R-3603

A.3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Spare PCBA
Code/Model
051-000014-00
3101-30-68503
3101-30-68505
3101-30-68507
3101-30-68509
3101-30-68511
3101-30-68513
3101-30-68515
3101-30-68517
3101-30-68519
3102-30-69197
3102-30-69199

Name
Data board (including rootfs)
Drive board
Mother board
Liquid-level board
Power board
Volumetric board
Laser control board
FS pre-amplification board
SS pre-amplification board
Indicator board
Key board
Autoloading board

A-3

Appendixes

A.4
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

A.5
No.

Spare cables
Code/Model
3100-20-49018
3100-20-49040
3101-20-68574
3101-20-68575
3101-20-68578
3101-20-68581
3101-20-68584
3101-20-68585
3101-20-68589
3101-20-68590
3101-20-68591
3101-20-68592
3101-21-68588
3101-21-68593
3102-20-69101
3102-20-69102
3102-20-69104
3102-20-69105
3102-20-69106
3102-20-69107
3102-20-69108
3102-20-69103

Name
Network cable (for connection between the analyzer and the
computer)
Connecting cable of Micro-switch
Connecting cable of reagent sensor
Connecting cable of volumetric board
Connecting cable of power switch
Connecting cable of laser control
SS signal line
FS signal line
Connecting cable from switch to power board
Power box fan and connecting cable
Outlet earth wire
Connecting cable of pump
Connecting cable of AC input
Connecting cable of laser
Power cord of the autoloading unit
Connecting cable of autoloader control
Wiring harness of the mixing motors
Connecting cable of DIFF bath
Connecting cable of the indicator board
Connecting cable of the switch control
Connecting cable of the autoloading motors and sensors
of the autoloading motors and sensors

Spare connectors
Code/Model

Name

3001-10-07066

Tee connector T220/230-1

3102-20-69219

Waste tube connector

M90-100009---

Connector. Female Luer,Lug,Panel,1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID


Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Orange

M90-100010---

Nylon

M90-100012---

Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,White Nylon

M90-100013---

Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Black Nylon

M90-100015---

Lock Nut

M90-100016---

Connector. Lock Nut, Panel Mount,1/4-28UNF,Blue Nylon


Connector.

Male

Luer

Lock

Ring,

For

MTLP

or

M90-100017---

LC23,Orange

10

M90-100019---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,White

11

M90-100020---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Black


A-4

Appendixes
12

M90-100021---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Red

13

M90-100022---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Green

14

M90-100023---

Connector. Male Luer Lock Ring, For MTLP or LC23,Blue

15

M90-100024---

Connector. Male Luer,1/16"Barb,White Nylon,MTL210-1

16

M90-100025---

Connector. Male Luer,1/8"Barb,White Nylon,MTL230-1

17

M90-100028---

Connector.Tee,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon

18

M90-100028-01

Connector. Straight Through,40 0Barb,3/32"ID,White

19

M90-100028-03

Connector.Y,400Barb,3/32"ID,White Nylon

20

M90-100030---

Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,White Nylon

21

M90-100046---

Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Orange

22

M90-100048---

Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, White

23

M90-100049---

Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Black

24

M90-100051---

Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Green

25

M90-100052---

Connector. Coded Lock Ring, For FTLLB or FTLB, Blue

26

M90-100065---

Connector. Tee Reduction,400Barb,1/8"&3/32"ID,White

27

M90-100069---

Connector.Thread,10-32UNF,1/4"Hex,400Barb,3/32"ID

A.6

Consumables

No.

Name

Code/Model

Package
Specifications

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(Chinese/4L)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53LEO(I)
Lyse(English/4L)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(Chinese/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(Chinese/400mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(English/200mlX4)
M-53LEO(II)
Lyse(English/400mlX4)
M-53LH
Lyse(Chinese/500mlX4)

A11-000105---

4LX1

A11-000113---

1LX4

A11-000128---

1LX4

A11-000129---

4LX1

A11-000114---

200mLX4

A11-000115---

400mLX4

A11-000130---

200mLX4

A11-000131---

400mLX4

A11-000116---

500mLX4

A-5

Appendixes

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

M-53LH
Lyse(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53LH
Lyse(English/500mlX4)
M-53LH
Lyse(English/1LX4)
M-53
Cleanser(Chinese/1LX4)
M-53
Cleanser(English/1LX4)
M-53D
Diluent(domestic/20L)
M-53D
Diluent(export/20L)
M-50P Probe Cleanser
domestic/50mL

18

M-50P Probe Cleanser


export/50mL

A11-000117---

1LX4

A11-000132---

500mLX4

A11-000133---

1LX4

A11-000118---

1LX4

A11-000134---

1LX4

A12-000140---

20LX1

A12-000167---

20LX1

A12-000151---

A12-000178---

A-6

50mLX1

50mLX1

B. List of Wearing Parts


No.

Code/Model

Name

3001-10-07054

Air Filter

3003-20-34941

Tee valve ASCO458284

3003-20-34942

Two-way valve ASCO458283

3006-20-74804

Probe Wipe

M07-00014S-00

VAL S305 07-Z030H 12VDC

M07-00076F---

FUSE Slow-Blow

M07-00077F---

FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 5A

M07-00079F---

FUSE Slow-Blow 125V 7A

M08-000789---

PHOTOELEC switch

10

M6G-020011---

Tubing.PharMed,1/16""ODX1/

B-1

C. Fluidic diagram

C-1

D. Pump and Valve Function Table


D1.

Valve Function Table

No.
V01
V02
V03
V04

Function
Provides fluid for the sample probe; V01 opens, the waste discharging
path of the diluent syringe connects the sample probe.
Provides fluid for the probe wipe; V02 opens, the waste discharging
path of the diluent syringe connects the inlet of the probe wipe.
Aspirating/discharging switch of diluent syringe
Cleans the interior of the sample probe; V04 opens, the sample probe
connects the sheath fluid syringe.

Two
way/Tee
3
3
3
2

V05

Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (I) lyse

V06

Aspirating/discharging switch of LEO (II) lyse

V07

Aspirating/discharging switch of LH lyse

V08
V09
V10
V11
V12
V13

Provides fluid for RBC bath; V08 opens, the waste discharging path of
the diluent syringe connects the fluidic line of RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the waste outlet of the
DIFF bath; bubbles the DIFF bath
Opens and closes the path between the vacuum chamber and the
pressure chamber
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
the RBC bath; bubbles the RBC bath
Opens and closes the pressure chamber and the isolation chamber t of
the WBC bath; bubbles the WBC bath
Together with V33 and V29 to control the cleaning of the WBC back
bath

3
2
2
2
2
2

V14

Together with V34 and V30 to control the cleaning of the RBC back bath

V15

Controls the aspiration of the cleanser

V21
V22
V23
V24
V25

Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and the sample dispensation
syringe; assists the sheath fluid dispensing the sample
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and DIFF bath; cleans DIFF
bath
Aspirating/discharging switch of sheath fluid syringe
Opens and closes the sheath fluid syringe and flow cell; dispenses
sheath fluid
Empties the WBC volumetric tube

D-1

2
2
3
2
2

Appendixes
V26

Empties the RBC volumetric tube

V27

Controls the waste discharging of the probe wipe

V28

Controls the waste discharging of the flow cell

V29

Controls the cleaning of the WBC back bath

V30

Controls the cleaning of the RBC back bath

V31

Empties the WBC volumetric tube

V32

Empties the RBC volumetric tube

V33

Controls the WBC counting

V34

Controls the RBC counting

V35

Controls the draining of the RBC bath

V36

Controls the draining of the WBC bath

V37

Controls the draining of the vacuum chamber

V38

Controls the draining of the DIFF bath

V39

Controls the preparation of the DIFF sample

D2.

Pump function table

Name

Function
Creates pressure in the pressure chamber, which is used to bubble and flash

P1

the aperture
Discharges the waste of the DIFF bath; empties and creates vacuum in the

P2

vacuum chamber to drive the counting by impedance method, clean the back
bath and drain the volumetric tube.
Discharges the waste of the WBC bath, RBC bath and probe wipe

P3

D3.

Syringe function table


Name

Diluent syringe
Sheath syringe
Aspiration

Function
Dispenses diluent into the WBC bath and RBC bath; cleans the sample
probe and dispenses fluid for the probe wipe
Prepares samples; forms sheath fluid; cleans the DIFF bath and the
sample preparation tubing
Aspirates and dispenses samples

syringe
Sample syringe

Dispenses the sample into the flow cell

Lyse-Syringe

Aspirates and dispenses the LEO (I) Lyse, LEO (II) Lyse and LH Lyse

D-2

E. Tubing
E1.

Components

E-1

F. Method to identify cross network cable and


direct-connected network cable
F.1.

Identify cross network cable

1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

Connector of the network cable


2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B


End Awhite and green, green, white and orange, blue, white and blue, orange, white and
brown, and brown 1 and 3 is exchanged; 2 and 6 is exchanged
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown

F.2.

Identify direct-connected network cable

1. With the metal contactors side up, mark the 8 lines in the connector from left to right with 1-8.
Accordingly, the colors of the lines are: white and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white
and blue, green, white and brown, and brown.

F-1

Appendixes

Connector of the direct-connected network cable


2. Define one end of the cable to be A randomly. Then, the other end is B. way to connect the
end A and B is shown in the Figure below.

End A and End B of the direct-connected network cable


End Awhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown
End Bwhite and orange, orange, white and green, blue, white and blue, green, white and
brown, and brown

F-2

P/N: 046-000142-00(V1.0)